Command Line PDF

Reference Manual
Command Line Interface

Industrial ETHERNET (Gigabit) Switch
RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30, OCTOPUS, PowerMICE,
RSR20/RSR30, MACH 100, MACH 1000, MACH 4000
L2P Rel. 8.0
CLI L2P Technical Support

Release 8.0 05/2013 HAC-Support@belden.com
The naming of copyrighted trademarks in this manual, even when not specially indicated, should
not be taken to mean that these names may be considered as free in the sense of the trademark
and tradename protection law and hence that they may be freely used by anyone.
© 2013 Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH
Manuals and software are protected by copyright. All rights reserved. The copying, reproduction,
translation, conversion into any electronic medium or machine scannable form is not permitted,
either in whole or in part. An exception is the preparation of a backup copy of the software for
your own use. For devices with embedded software, the end-user license agreement on the enc-
losed CD applies
The performance features described here are binding only if they have been expressly
guaranteed in the contract. This publication has been created by Hirschmann Automation and
Control GmbH according to the best of our knowledge. Hirschmann reserves the right to change
the contents of this manual without prior notice. Hirschmann can give no guarantee in respect
of the correctness or accuracy of the details in this publication.
Hirschmann can accept no responsibility for damages, resulting from the use of the network
components or the associated operating software. In addition, we refer to the conditions of use
specified in the license contract.
Printed in Germany 4/26/13
Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH

Stuttgarter Str. 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen
Germany
Tel.: +49 1805 141538 05-05/2013
Content
Content
About this Manual 21

Maintenace 22
1 Command Structure 23
1.1 Format 24
1.1.1 Command 25
1.1.2 Parameters 25
1.1.3 Values 25
1.1.4 Conventions 27
1.1.5 Annotations 28
1.1.6 Special keys 29
1.1.7 Special characters in scripts 30
1.1.8 Secrets in scripts 32
2 Quick Start up 35
2.1 Quick Starting the Switch 36
2.2 System Info and System Setup 37
3 Mode-based CLI 43
3.1 Mode-based Topology 44
3.2 Mode-based Command Hierarchy 45
3.3 Flow of Operation 47
3.4 “No” Form of a Command 49
3.4.1 Support for “No” Form 49
3.4.2 Behavior of Command Help ("?") 49
4 CLI Commands: Base 51

4.1 System Information and Statistics 52
4.1.1 show 52
4.1.2 show address-conflict 52
4.1.3 show arp switch 53
4.1.4 show bridge address-learning 53
4.1.5 show bridge address-relearn-detect 54
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 3
Content
4.1.6 show bridge aging-time 54

4.1.7 show bridge duplex-mismatch-detect 55
4.1.8 show bridge fast-link-detection 55
4.1.9 show bridge framesize 55
4.1.10 show bridge vlan-learning 56
4.1.11 bridge framesize 56
4.1.12 show config-watchdog 57
4.1.13 show device-status 57
4.1.14 show authentication 58
4.1.15 show eventlog 59
4.1.16 show interface 60
4.1.17 show interface ethernet 62
4.1.18 show interface switchport 69
4.1.19 show interface utilization 70
4.1.20 show logging 71
4.1.21 show mac-addr-table 72
4.1.22 show signal-contact 73
4.1.23 show slot 75
4.1.24 show running-config 76
4.1.25 show sysinfo 77
4.1.26 show temperature 80
4.1.27 utilization alarm-threshold 80
4.2 Debug Commands 81
4.2.1 debug tcpdump help 81
4.2.2 debug tcpdump start cpu 81
4.2.3 debug tcpdump start cpu filter 82
4.2.4 debug tcpdump stop 82
4.2.5 debug tcpdump filter show 83
4.2.6 debug tcpdump filter list 83
4.2.7 debug tcpdump filter delete 84
4.3 Management VLAN Commands 85
4.3.1 network mgmt_vlan 85
4.4 Class of Service (CoS) Commands 86
4.4.1 classofservice dot1p-mapping 87
4.4.2 classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 88
4.4.3 classofservice trust 89
4.4.4 show classofservice dot1p-mapping 90
4.4.5 show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 91
4.4.6 show classofservice trust 92
CLI L2P
4 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.4.7 vlan port priority all 92

4.4.8 vlan priority 93
4.4.9 dvlan-tunnel ethertype 94
4.4.10 mode dvlan-tunnel 95
4.4.11 show dvlan-tunnel 96
4.5 Link Aggregation(802.3ad) Commands 97
4.5.1 link-aggregation staticcapability 97
4.5.2 show link-aggregation brief 98
4.6 Management Commands 99
4.6.1 telnet 99
4.6.2 transport input telnet 100
4.6.3 transport output telnet 101
4.6.4 session-limit 102
4.6.5 session-timeout 103
4.6.6 bridge address-learning 103
4.6.7 bridge address-relearn detect operation 104
4.6.8 bridge address-relearn detect threshold 104
4.6.9 bridge aging-time 105
4.6.10 bridge fast-link-detection 106
4.6.11 bridge duplex-mismatch-detect operation 106
4.6.12 bridge vlan-learning 107
4.6.13 digital-input 107
4.6.14 digital-output 109
4.6.15 show digital-input 112
4.6.16 show digital-input config 113
4.6.17 show digital-input all 114
4.6.18 show digital-input <slot/input> 115
4.6.19 show digital-output 116
4.6.20 show digital-output config 117
4.6.21 show digital-output all 118
4.6.22 show digital-output <slot/output> 119
4.6.23 ethernet-ip 120
4.6.24 iec61850-mms 121
4.6.25 show iec61850-mms 122
4.6.26 network javascriptmode 123
4.6.27 network mgmt-access add 124
4.6.28 network mgmt-access delete 124
4.6.29 network mgmt-access modify 125
4.6.30 network mgmt-access operation 126
4.6.31 network mgmt-access status 126
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 5
Content
4.6.32 network parms 127

4.6.33 network protocol 127
4.6.34 network priority 128
4.6.35 profinetio 129
4.6.36 serial timeout 130
4.6.37 set prompt 130
4.6.38 show ethernet-ip 131
4.6.39 show network 131
4.6.40 show network mgmt-access 133
4.6.41 show profinetio 134
4.6.42 show serial 134
4.6.43 show snmp-access 135
4.6.44 show snmpcommunity 136
4.6.45 show snmptrap 137
4.6.46 show telnet 138
4.6.47 show telnetcon 139
4.6.48 show trapflags 140
4.6.49 snmp-access global 141
4.6.50 snmp-access version 142
4.6.51 snmp-access version v3-encryption 143
4.6.52 snmp-server 144
4.6.53 snmp-server community 145
4.6.54 snmp-server contact 146
4.6.55 snmp-server community ipaddr 147
4.6.56 snmp-server community ipmask 148
4.6.57 snmp-server community mode 149
4.6.58 snmp-server community ro 150
4.6.59 snmp-server community rw 150
4.6.60 snmp-server location 150
4.6.61 snmp-server sysname 151
4.6.62 snmp-server enable traps 151
4.6.63 snmp-server enable traps chassis 152
4.6.64 snmp-server enable traps l2redundancy 153
4.6.65 snmp-server enable traps linkmode 154
4.6.66 snmp-server enable traps multiusers 155
4.6.67 snmp-server enable traps port-sec 156
4.6.68 snmp-server enable traps stpmode 157
4.6.69 snmptrap 158
4.6.70 snmptrap ipaddr 159
4.6.71 snmptrap mode 160
4.6.72 snmptrap snmpversion 161
CLI L2P
6 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.6.73 telnetcon maxsessions 162

4.6.74 telnetcon timeout 163
4.7 Syslog Commands 164
4.7.1 logging buffered 164
4.7.2 logging buffered wrap 165
4.7.3 logging cli-command 166
4.7.4 logging console 167
4.7.5 logging host 168
4.7.6 logging host reconfigure 169
4.7.7 logging host remove 169
4.7.8 logging snmp-requests get operation 169
4.7.9 logging snmp-requests set operation 170
4.7.10 logging snmp-requests get severity 170
4.7.11 logging snmp-requests set severity 171
4.7.12 logging syslog 171
4.7.13 logging syslog port 172
4.8 Scripting Commands 173
4.8.1 script apply 173
4.8.2 script delete 174
4.8.3 script list 174
4.8.4 script show 175
4.8.5 script validate 175
4.9 Device Configuration Commands 177
4.9.1 addport 177
4.9.2 adminmode 178
4.9.3 auto-disable reason 179
4.9.4 auto-disable timer 180
4.9.5 auto-negotiate 181
4.9.6 auto-negotiate all 182
4.9.7 cable-crossing 183
4.9.8 media-module 184
4.9.9 deleteport 185
4.9.10 deleteport all 185
4.9.11 dip-switch operation 186
4.9.12 macfilter 187
4.9.13 macfilter adddest 188
4.9.14 macfilter adddest all 189
4.9.15 mac notification (Global Config) 190
4.9.16 mac notification (Interface Config) 191
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 7
Content
4.9.17 monitor session <session-id> 192

4.9.18 monitor session <session-id> mode 194
4.9.19 monitor session <session-id> source/destination 195
4.9.20 link-aggregation 196
4.9.21 link-aggregation adminmode 197
4.9.22 link-aggregation linktrap 198
4.9.23 link-aggregation name 199
4.9.24 rmon-alarm add 199
4.9.25 rmon-alarm delete 200
4.9.26 rmon-alarm enable 200
4.9.27 rmon-alarm disable 201
4.9.28 rmon-alarm modify mib-variable 201
4.9.29 rmon-alarm modify thresholds 202
4.9.30 rmon-alarm modify interval 202
4.9.31 rmon-alarm modify sample-type 203
4.9.32 rmon-alarm modify startup-alarm 203
4.9.33 rmon-alarm modify rising-event 204
4.9.34 rmon-alarm modify falling-event 204
4.9.35 set garp timer join 205
4.9.36 set garp timer leave 206
4.9.37 set garp timer leaveall 207
4.9.38 set gmrp adminmode 208
4.9.39 set gmrp interfacemode 209
4.9.40 set gmrp interfacemode 210
4.9.41 set gmrp forward-all-groups 211
4.9.42 set gmrp forward-unknown 212
4.9.43 set igmp 213
4.9.44 set igmp 214
4.9.45 set igmp aging-time-unknown 214
4.9.46 set igmp automatic-mode 215
4.9.47 set igmp forward-all 216
4.9.48 set igmp forward-unknown 217
4.9.49 set igmp static-query-port 218
4.9.50 set igmp groupmembershipinterval 219
4.9.51 set igmp interfacemode 220
4.9.52 set igmp lookup-interval-unknown 220
4.9.53 set igmp lookup-resp-time-unknown 221
4.9.54 set igmp maxresponse 222
4.9.55 set igmp querier max-response-time 223
4.9.56 set igmp querier protocol-version 223
4.9.57 set igmp querier status 224
CLI L2P
8 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.9.58 set igmp querier tx-interval 224

4.9.59 set igmp query-ports-to-filter 225
4.9.60 set pre-login-banner text 226
4.9.61 selftest ramtest 226
4.9.62 selftest reboot-on-hdxerror 227
4.9.63 selftest reboot-on-error 228
4.9.64 show auto-disable brief 229
4.9.65 show auto-disable reasons 230
4.9.66 show dip-switch 231
4.9.67 show garp 232
4.9.68 show gmrp configuration 232
4.9.69 show igmpsnooping 233
4.9.70 show mac-filter-table gmrp 235
4.9.71 show mac-filter-table igmpsnooping 236
4.9.72 show mac-filter-table multicast 237
4.9.73 show mac-filter-table static 238
4.9.74 show mac-filter-table staticfiltering 239
4.9.75 show mac-filter-table stats 240
4.9.76 show mac notification 240
4.9.77 show monitor session 242
4.9.78 show port 243
4.9.79 show link-aggregation 244
4.9.80 show rmon-alarm 245
4.9.81 show selftest 246
4.9.82 show storm-control 247
4.9.83 show storm-control limiters port 248
4.9.84 show vlan 248
4.9.85 show vlan brief 251
4.9.86 show vlan port 251
4.9.87 show voice vlan 253
4.9.88 show voice vlan interface 254
4.9.89 shutdown 255
4.9.90 shutdown all 256
4.9.91 snmp trap link-status 257
4.9.92 snmp trap link-status all 258
4.9.93 spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck 259
4.9.94 speed 260
4.9.95 storm-control broadcast 261
4.9.96 storm-control egress-limiting 261
4.9.97 storm-control ingress-limiting 262
4.9.98 storm-control ingress-mode 262
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 9
Content
4.9.99 storm-control broadcast (port-related) 263

4.9.100 storm-control egress-limit 263
4.9.101 storm-control ingress-limit 264
4.9.102 storm-control ingress-mode 264
4.9.103 storm-control flowcontrol 265
4.9.104 storm-control flowcontrol per port 266
4.9.105 vlan 267
4.9.106 vlan0-transparent-mode 268
4.9.107 vlan acceptframe 269
4.9.108 vlan database 270
4.9.109 vlan ingressfilter 271
4.9.110 vlan name 272
4.9.111 vlan participation 273
4.9.112 vlan participation all 274
4.9.113 vlan port acceptframe all 275
4.9.114 vlan port ingressfilter all 276
4.9.115 vlan port pvid all 277
4.9.116 vlan port tagging all 278
4.9.117 vlan pvid 279
4.9.118 vlan tagging 280
4.9.119 voice vlan (Global Config Mode) 281
4.9.120 voice vlan <id> 282
4.9.121 voice vlan dot1p 283
4.9.122 voice vlan none 283
4.9.123 voice vlan untagged 284
4.9.124 voice vlan auth 284
4.10 User Account Management Commands 285
4.10.1 disconnect 285
4.10.2 show loginsession 286
4.10.3 show users 287
4.10.4 users defaultlogin 288
4.10.5 users login <user> 289
4.10.6 users access 290
4.10.7 users name 291
4.10.8 users passwd 292
4.10.9 users snmpv3 accessmode 293
4.10.10 users snmpv3 authentication 294
4.10.11 users snmpv3 encryption 295
4.11 System Utilities 296
4.11.1 address-conflict 296
CLI L2P
10 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.11.2 boot skip-aca-on-boot 297

4.11.3 show boot skip-aca-on-boot 297
4.11.4 cablestatus 298
4.11.5 clear eventlog 298
4.11.6 traceroute 299
4.11.7 clear arp-table-switch 299
4.11.8 clear config 300
4.11.9 clear config factory 300
4.11.10 clear counters 300
4.11.11 clear hiper-ring 301
4.11.12 clear igmpsnooping 301
4.11.13 clear mac-addr-table 302
4.11.14 clear pass 302
4.11.15 clear link-aggregation 303
4.11.16 clear signal-contact 303
4.11.17 clear traplog 304
4.11.18 clear ring-coupling 304
4.11.19 clear vlan 304
4.11.20 config-watchdog 305
4.11.21 copy 305
4.11.22 device-status connection-error 314
4.11.23 device-status monitor 315
4.11.24 logout 316
4.11.25 ping 316
4.11.26 signal-contact connection-error 317
4.11.27 signal-contact 317
4.11.28 temperature 319
4.11.29 reboot 320
4.11.30 show reboot 321
4.11.31 reload 322
4.11.32 show reload 323
4.12 LLDP - Link Layer Discovery Protocol 324
4.12.1 show lldp 324
4.12.2 show lldp config 324
4.12.3 show lldp config chassis 325
4.12.4 show lldp config chassis admin-state 325
4.12.5 show lldp config chassis notification-interval 325
4.12.6 show lldp config chassis re-init-delay 326
4.12.7 show lldp config chassis tx-delay 326
4.12.8 show lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult 326
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 11
Content
4.12.9 show lldp config chassis tx-interval 327

4.12.10 show lldp config port 328
4.12.11 show lldp config port tlv 329
4.12.12 show lldp med 330
4.12.13 show lldp med interface 331
4.12.14 show lldp med local-device detail 332
4.12.15 show lldp med remote-device 333
4.12.16 show lldp med remote-device detail 334
4.12.17 show lldp remote-data 334
4.12.18 lldp 336
4.12.19 lldp config chassis admin-state 337
4.12.20 lldp config chassis notification-interval 337
4.12.21 lldp config chassis re-init-delay 338
4.12.22 lldp config chassis tx-delay 338
4.12.23 lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult 339
4.12.24 lldp chassis tx-interval 339
4.12.25 clear lldp config all 340
4.12.26 lldp admin-state 340
4.12.27 lldp fdb-mode 341
4.12.28 lldp hm-mode 341
4.12.29 lldp max-neighbors 342
4.12.30 lldp med 343
4.12.31 lldp med all 344
4.12.32 lldp med confignotification 344
4.12.33 lldp med confignotification all 345
4.12.34 lldp med faststartrepeatcount 346
4.12.35 lldp med transmit-tlv 347
4.12.36 lldp med transmit-tlv all 348
4.12.37 lldp notification 349
4.12.38 lldp tlv link-aggregation 349
4.12.39 lldp tlv mac-phy-config-state 349
4.12.40 lldp tlv max-frame-size 350
4.12.41 lldp tlv mgmt-addr 350
4.12.42 lldp tlv pnio 350
4.12.43 lldp tlv pnio-alias 351
4.12.44 lldp tlv pnio-mrp 351
4.12.45 lldp tlv port-desc 351
4.12.46 lldp tlv port-vlan 352
4.12.47 lldp tlv gmrp 352
4.12.48 lldp tlv igmp 352
4.12.49 lldp tlv portsec 353
CLI L2P
12 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.12.50 lldp tlv ptp 353

4.12.51 lldp tlv protocol 353
4.12.52 lldp tlv sys-cap 354
4.12.53 lldp tlv sys-desc 354
4.12.54 lldp tlv sys-name 354
4.12.55 lldp tlv vlan-name 355
4.12.56 name 355
4.13 SNTP - Simple Network Time Protocol 356
4.13.1 show sntp 356
4.13.2 show sntp anycast 358
4.13.3 show sntp client 358
4.13.4 show sntp operation 359
4.13.5 show sntp server 360
4.13.6 show sntp status 360
4.13.7 show sntp time 361
4.13.8 no sntp 361
4.13.9 sntp anycast address 362
4.13.10 sntp anycast transmit-interval 362
4.13.11 sntp anycast vlan 363
4.13.12 sntp client accept-broadcast 363
4.13.13 sntp client disable-after-sync 364
4.13.14 sntp client offset 364
4.13.15 sntp client request-interval 365
4.13.16 no sntp client server 365
4.13.17 sntp client server primary 366
4.13.18 sntp client server secondary 367
4.13.19 sntp client threshold 368
4.13.20 sntp operation 369
4.13.21 sntp server disable-if-local 370
4.13.22 sntp time system 370
4.14 PTP - Precision Time Protocol 371
4.14.1 show ptp 371
4.14.2 show ptp configuration 374
4.14.3 show ptp operation 374
4.14.4 show ptp port 375
4.14.5 show ptp status 376
4.14.6 ptp clock-mode 377
4.14.7 ptp operation 378
4.14.8 ptp sync-lower-bound 378
4.14.9 ptp sync-upper-bound 379
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 13
Content
4.14.10 ptp v1 preferred-master 379

4.14.11 ptp v1 re-initialize 380
4.14.12 ptp v1 subdomain-name 380
4.14.13 ptp v1 sync-interval 381
4.14.14 ptp v2bc priority1 382
4.14.15 ptp v2bc priority2 382
4.14.16 ptp v2bc domain 383
4.14.17 ptp v2bc utc-offset 383
4.14.18 ptp v2bc utc-offset-valid 383
4.14.19 ptp v2bc vlan 384
4.14.20 ptp v2bc vlan-priority 384
4.14.21 ptp v1 burst 385
4.14.22 ptp v1 operation 385
4.14.23 ptp v2bc operation 386
4.14.24 ptp v2bc announce-interval 386
4.14.25 ptp v2bc announce-timeout 387
4.14.26 ptp v2bc sync-interval 387
4.14.27 ptp v2bc delay-mechanism 387
4.14.28 ptp v2bc pdelay-interval 388
4.14.29 ptp v2bc network-protocol 388
4.14.30 ptp v2bc v1-compatibility-mode 388
4.14.31 ptp v2bc asymmetry 389
4.14.32 ptp v2tc asymmetry 389
4.14.33 ptp v2tc delay-mechanism 389
4.14.34 ptp v2tc management 390
4.14.35 ptp v2tc multi-domain-mode 390
4.14.36 ptp v2tc network-protocol 391
4.14.37 ptp v2tc operation 391
4.14.38 ptp v2tc pdelay-interval 392
4.14.39 ptp v2tc primary-domain 392
4.14.40 ptp v2tc profile 393
4.14.41 ptp v2tc syntonization 393
4.14.42 ptp v2tc vlan 394
4.14.43 ptp v2tc power-tlv-check 394
4.14.44 ptp v2tc vlan-priority 395
4.14.45 ptp v2tc sync-local-clock 395
4.15 PoE - Power over Ethernet 396
4.15.1 show inlinepower 396
4.15.2 show inlinepower port 396
4.15.3 inlinepower (Global Config) 397
CLI L2P
14 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
4.15.4 inlinepower (Interface Config) 398

4.15.5 clear inlinepower 398
4.16 PoE+ - Power over Ethernet Plus 399
4.16.1 show inlinepower slot 399
4.16.2 inlinepower budget slot 400
4.16.3 inlinepower threshold slot 401
4.16.4 inlinepower trap slot 401
4.17 Port monitor 402
4.17.1 show port-monitor 403
4.17.2 show port-monitor <slot/port> 404
4.17.3 show port-monitor brief 405
4.17.4 show port-monitor crc-fragment 406
4.17.5 show port-monitor link-flap 406
4.17.6 port-monitor (Global Config) 407
4.17.7 port-monitor (Interface Config) 407
4.17.8 port-monitor action 408
4.17.9 port-monitor condition overload-detection polling-interval
(Global Config) 409
4.17.10 port-monitor condition overload-detection (Interface Config)
409
4.17.11 show port-monitor overload-detection 411
4.17.12 port-monitor condition link-flap (Global Config) 412
4.17.13 port-monitor condition link-flap (Interface Config) 412
4.17.14 port-monitor condition crc-fragment (Global Config) 413
4.17.15 port-monitor condition crc-fragment (Interface Config) 413
5 CLI Commands: Switching 415

5.1 Spanning Tree Commands 417
5.1.1 show spanning-tree 417
5.1.2 show spanning-tree interface 420
5.1.3 show spanning-tree mst detailed 421
5.1.4 show spanning-tree mst port detailed 422
5.1.5 show spanning-tree mst port summary 425
5.1.6 show spanning-tree mst summary 426
5.1.7 show spanning-tree summary 427
5.1.8 show spanning-tree vlan 428
5.1.9 spanning-tree 429
5.1.10 spanning-tree auto-edgeport 430
5.1.11 spanning-tree bpduguard 431
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 15
Content
5.1.12 spanning-tree configuration name 432

5.1.13 spanning-tree configuration revision 433
5.1.14 spanning-tree edgeport 434
5.1.15 spanning-tree forceversion 435
5.1.16 spanning-tree forward-time 436
5.1.17 spanning-tree guard loop 437
5.1.18 spanning-tree guard none 438
5.1.19 spanning-tree guard root 439
5.1.20 spanning-tree hello-time 440
5.1.21 spanning-tree hold-count 441
5.1.22 spanning-tree max-age 442
5.1.23 spanning-tree max-hops 443
5.1.24 spanning-tree mst 444
5.1.25 spanning-tree mst priority 446
5.1.26 spanning-tree mst vlan 447
5.1.27 spanning-tree mst instance 448
5.1.28 spanning-tree port mode 449
5.1.29 spanning-tree port mode all 450
5.1.30 spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode 451
5.1.31 spanning-tree tcnguard 452
5.2 MRP 453
5.2.1 show mrp 453
5.2.2 show mrp current-domain 454
5.2.3 mrp current-domain 455
5.2.4 mrp delete-domain 457
5.2.5 mrp new-domain 457
5.2.6 arc 458
5.2.7 show arc 459
5.3 HIPER-Ring 461
5.3.1 show hiper-ring 462
5.3.2 hiper-ring 463
5.3.3 hiper-ring mode 463
5.3.4 hiper-ring port primary 464
5.3.5 hiper-ring port secondary 464
5.3.6 hiper-ring recovery-delay 465
5.4 Fast-HIPER-Ring 466
5.4.1 show fast-hiper-ring (MACH1000, RSR20/RSR30) 467
5.4.2 show fast-hiper-ring current-id (MACH1000, RSR20/RSR30)
468
CLI L2P
16 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
5.4.3 fast-hiper-ring 469

5.5 Redundant Coupling 471
5.5.1 show ring-coupling 472
5.5.2 ring-coupling 474
5.5.3 ring-coupling config 475
5.5.4 ring-coupling net-coupling 476
5.5.5 ring-coupling operation 476
5.5.6 ring-coupling port 477
5.5.7 ring-coupling redundancy-mode 477
5.6 Port Security 478
5.6.1 show port-sec mode 478
5.6.2 show port-sec port 478
5.6.3 port-sec mode 479
5.6.4 port-sec action 480
5.6.5 port-sec allowed-ip 481
5.6.6 port-sec allowed-ip add 481
5.6.7 port-sec allowed-ip remove 482
5.6.8 port-sec allowed-mac 482
5.6.9 port-sec allowed-mac add 483
5.6.10 port-sec allowed-mac remove 483
5.6.11 clear port-sec 484
5.7 DHCP Relay Commands 485
5.7.1 dhcp-relay 486
5.7.2 dhcp-relay 487
5.7.3 show dhcp-relay 488
5.8 DHCP Server Commands 490
5.8.1 DHCP server configuration example 490
5.8.2 show dhcp-server 492
5.8.3 show dhcp-server operation 493
5.8.4 show dhcp-server port 493
5.8.5 show dhcp-server pool 494
5.8.6 dhcp-server addr-probe 494
5.8.7 dhcp-server operation 495
5.8.8 dhcp-server pool add <id> 495
5.8.9 dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode 496
5.8.10 dhcp-server pool modify <id> option 498
5.8.11 dhcp-server pool modify leasetime 499
5.8.12 dhcp-server pool modify <id> hirschmann-device 499
5.8.13 dhcp-server pool enable 500
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 17
Content
5.8.14 dhcp-server pool disable 500

5.8.15 dhcp-server pool delete 500
5.9 Sub-Ring Commands 501
5.9.1 show sub-ring 501
5.9.2 sub-ring <id> mode 503
5.9.3 sub-ring <id> operation 504
5.9.4 sub-ring <id> protocol 504
5.9.5 sub-ring <id> port 505
5.9.6 sub-ring <id> ring-name 505
5.9.7 sub-ring <id> vlan 506
5.9.8 sub-ring <id> mrp-domainID 507
5.9.9 sub-ring delete-ring 508
5.9.10 sub-ring new-ring 508
6 CLI Commands: Security 509

6.1 Security Commands 511
6.1.1 authentication login 511
6.1.2 authorization network radius 513
6.1.3 clear dot1x statistics 513
6.1.4 clear radius statistics 514
6.1.5 dot1x defaultlogin 514
6.1.6 dot1x dynamic-vlan enable 515
6.1.7 dot1x guest-vlan 516
6.1.8 dot1x initialize 517
6.1.9 dot1x login 517
6.1.10 dot1x mac-auth-bypass 518
6.1.11 dot1x max-req 519
6.1.12 dot1x max-users 520
6.1.13 dot1x port-control 521
6.1.14 dot1x port-control all 522
6.1.15 dot1x re-authenticate 523
6.1.16 dot1x re-authentication 523
6.1.17 dot1x safe-vlan 524
6.1.18 dot1x system-auth-control 525
6.1.19 dot1x timeout 525
6.1.20 dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period 527
6.1.21 dot1x unauthenticated-vlan 528
6.1.22 dot1x user 529
6.1.23 ip ssh protocol 530
6.1.24 radius accounting mode 531
CLI L2P
18 Release 8.0 05/2013
Content
6.1.25 radius server host 531

6.1.26 radius server key 533
6.1.27 radius server msgauth 533
6.1.28 radius server primary 534
6.1.29 radius server retransmit 535
6.1.30 radius server timeout 536
6.1.31 show radius accounting 536
6.1.32 show authentication 539
6.1.33 show authentication users 540
6.1.34 show dot1x 540
6.1.35 show dot1x users 545
6.1.36 show dot1x clients 546
6.1.37 show ip ssh 547
6.1.38 show radius 548
6.1.39 show radius statistics 549
6.1.40 show users authentication 551
6.1.41 users login 552
6.2 HTTP Commands 553
6.2.1 ip http secure-port 553
6.2.2 ip http secure-protocol 554
6.2.3 ip http server 555
6.2.4 show ip http 556
6.2.5 ip https server 557
6.2.6 ip https port 558
6.2.7 ip https certgen 558
6.2.8 show ip https 559
7 Appendix- VLAN Example 561

7.1 SOLUTION 1 563
7.2 SOLUTION 2 565
8 Glossary 567
9 Index 583
10 Further support 591
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 19
Content
CLI L2P
20 Release 8.0 05/2013
About this Manual
About this Manual
The “GUI” reference manual contains detailed information on using the

graphical user interface (web-based interface) to operate the individual func-
tions of the device.
The "Command Line Interface" reference manual contains detailed informa-

tion on using the Command Line Interface to operate the individual functions
of the device.
The "Installation" user manual contains a device description, safety instruc-

tions, a description of the display, and the other information that you need to
install the device.
The "Basic Configuration" user manual contains the information you need to
start operating the device. It takes you step by step from the first startup op-
eration through to the basic settings for operation in your environment.
The "Redundancy Configuration" user manual contains the information you

need to select a suitable redundancy procedure and configure that proce-
dure.
The "Industry Protocols" user manual describes how the device is connected
by means of a communication protocol commonly used in the industry, such
as EtherNet/IP or PROFINET IO.
The HiVision Network Management Software provides you with additional

options for smooth configuration and monitoring:
D Simultaneous configuration of multiple devices
D Graphic interface with network layout
D Auto-topology recognition
D Event log
D Event handling
D Client/server structure
D Browser interface
D ActiveX control for SCADA integration
D SNMP/OPC gateway.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 21
About this Manual
Maintenace
Hirschmann are continually working on improving and developing their soft-
ware. You should regularly check whether there is a new version of the soft-
ware that provides you with additional benefits. You will find software
information and downloads on the product pages of the Hirschmann website.
CLI L2P
22 Release 8.0 05/2013
Command Structure
1 Command Structure
The Command Line Interface (CLI) syntax, conventions and terminology are
described in this section. Each CLI command is illustrated using the structure
outlined below.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 23
Command Structure 1.1 Format
1.1 Format
Commands are followed by values, parameters, or both.
U Example 1
network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [gateway]
D network parms
is the command name.
D <ipaddr> <netmask>
are the required values for the command.
D [gateway]
is the optional value for the command.
U Example 2
snmp-server location <loc>
D snmp-server location
D <loc>
is the required parameter for the command.
U Example 3
clear vlan
D clear vlan
CLI L2P
24 Release 8.0 05/2013
1.1.1 Command
The text in courier font is to be typed exactly as shown.
1.1.2 Parameters
Parameters are order dependent.
Parameters may be mandatory values, optional values, choices, or a combi-

nation.
D <parameter>. The <> angle brackets indicate that a mandatory param-
eter is to be entered in place of the brackets and text inside them.
D [parameter]. The [] square brackets indicate that an optional parame-
ter may be entered in place of the brackets and text inside them.
D choice1 | choice2. The | indicates that only one of the parameters
should be entered.
D The {} curly braces indicate that a parameter must be chosen from the list
of choices.
1.1.3 Values
macaddr The MAC address format is six hexadeci-
mal numbers separated by colons, for
example 00:06:29:32:81:40.
areaid Area IDs may be entered in dotted-decimal
notation (for example, 0.0.0.1). An area ID
of 0.0.0.0 is reserved for the backbone.
Area IDs have the same form as IP
addresses, but are distinct from IP
addresses. The IP network address of the
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 25
sub-netted network may be used for the

area ID.
slot/port Valid slot and port number separated by
forward slashes. For example, 1/1 repre-
sents slot number 1 and port number 1.
logical slot/port Logical slot and port number. This is appli-
cable in the case of a link-aggregation
(LAG) and vlan router interfaces (9/x). The
operator can use the logical slot/port to
configure the link-aggregation.
CLI L2P
26 Release 8.0 05/2013
1.1.4 Conventions
Network addresses are used to define a link to a remote host, workstation or
network. Network addresses are shown using the following syntax:
Address Type Format Range

ipaddr 192.168.11.110 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (decimal)
macaddr A7:C9:89:DD:A9:B3 hexadecimal digit pairs
Table 1: Network Address Syntax
Double quotation marks such as "System Name with Spaces" set off user de-
fined strings. If the operator wishes to use spaces as part of a name param-
eter then it must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
Empty strings (““) are not valid user defined strings.
Command completion finishes spelling the command when enough letters of

a command are typed to uniquely identify the command word. The command
may be executed by typing <enter> (command abbreviation) or the com-
mand word may be completed by typing the <tab> or <space bar> (command
completion).
The value 'Err' designates that the requested value was not internally acces-
sible.
The value of '-----' designates that the value is unknown.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 27
1.1.5 Annotations
The CLI allows the user to type single-line annotations at the command
prompt for use when writing test or configuration scripts and for better read-
ability. The exclamation point (‘!’) character flags the beginning of a com-
ment. The comment flag character can begin a word anywhere on the
command line and all input following this character is ignored. Any command
line that begins with the character ‘!’ is recognized as a comment line and ig-
nored by the parser.
Some examples are provided below:

! Script file for setting the CLI prompt
set prompt example-switch
! End of the script file
CLI L2P
28 Release 8.0 05/2013
1.1.6 Special keys

The following list of special keys may be helpful to enter command lines.
BS delete previous character

Ctrl-A go to beginning of line
Ctrl-E go to end of line
Ctrl-F go forward one character
Ctrl-B go backward one character
Ctrl-D delete current character
Ctrl-H display command history or retrieve a command
Ctrl-U, X delete to beginning of line
Ctrl-K delete to end of line
Ctrl-W delete previous word
Ctrl-T transpose previous character
Ctrl-P go to previous line in history buffer
Ctrl-R rewrites or pastes the line
Ctrl-N go to next line in history buffer
Ctrl-Y print last deleted character
Ctrl-Q enables serial flow
Ctrl-S disables serial flow
Ctrl-Z return to root command prompt
Tab, <SPACE> command-line completion
Exit go to next lower command prompt
? list choices
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 29
1.1.7 Special characters in scripts

Some of the configuration parameters are strings that can contain special
characters. When the switch creates a script from the running configuration
(by use of the command #show running-config <scriptname.cli>), these spe-
cial characters are written to the script with a so-called escape character pre-
ceding them. This ensures that when applying the script, these characters
are regarded as a normal part of the configuration parameter, not having the
special meaning they usually have.
Character (plain) Meaning, when entered in the CLI

! Begin of a comment, ! and the rest of the line will be ignored
" Begin or end of a string that may contain space characters
' Begin or end of a string that may contain space characters
? Shows possible command keywords or parameters
\ The backslash is used as an escape character to mask characters that
normally have a special meaning
Tab. 2: Special characters
Character (escaped) Meaning, when entered in the CLI

\! ! becomes part of the string
\" " becomes part of the string
\' ' becomes part of the string
\? ? becomes part of the string
\\ \ becomes part of the string
Tab. 3: Special characters escaped
CLI L2P
30 Release 8.0 05/2013
The commands with strings that may contain these special characters are
listed below.
Note: Not every string is allowed to contain special characters. The string
that is output with the escape characters (if necessary) is shown as "...".
Command Note
!System Description "..." "At the beginning of the script
!System Version "..." "At the beginning of the script
Tab. 4: Commands in Privileged Exec mode
Command Note
snmp-server location "..."
snmp-server contact "..."
snmp-server community "..."
snmp-server community ipaddr <ip> "..."
snmp-server community ipmask <ip> "..."
snmp-server community ro "..."
snmp-server community rw "..."
no snmp-server community mode "..."
no snmp-server community "..."
link-aggregation "..."
spanning-tree configuration name "..."
ptp subdomain-name "..."
Tab. 5: Commands in Global Config mode
Command Note
name "..."
Tab. 6: Commands in Interface Config mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 31
Command Note
vlan name <n> "..."
Tab. 7: Commands in VLAN Database mode
When a device creates a script, a human-readable header is included that

lists the special characters and the escape characters:
!Parameter string escape handling \, 1
!Characters to be preceded with escape char (\): \, !, ", ', ?
1.1.8 Secrets in scripts

A configuration may include secrets (e. g., passwords). When creating a
script, these secrets are written to it in a scrambled form, not in clear text.
These secrets may be up to 31 characters long. The format for a scrambled
secret is: ":v1:<scrambled secret>:" (without the quotes ("), they were added
for readability). v1 denotes the scrambling method (v1 in this case), the value
of the scrambled secret is a 64-digit hex string.
The following commands produce scrambled secrets (if necessary):
Command Note
radius server key acct <ip> <password>
radius server key auth <ip> <password>
users passwd <username> <password>
users snmpv3 encryption <username> des <password>
Tab. 8: Commands in Global Config mode
Applying or validating a script requires the following conditions for a scram-

bled secret, else it will be considered invalid (usually only relevant if a script
is edited manually):
CLI L2P
32 Release 8.0 05/2013
D string must not be longer than 64 hex digits

D string must only contain the digits 0-9 and the characters A-F (or a-f)
D string length must be even
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 33
CLI L2P
34 Release 8.0 05/2013
Quick Start up
2 Quick Start up
The CLI Quick Start up details procedures to quickly become acquainted with
the software.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 35
Quick Start up 2.1 Quick Starting the Switch
2.1 Quick Starting the Switch
D Read the device Installation Guide for the connectivity procedure. In-band
connectivity allows access to the software locally or from a remote work-
station. The device must be configured with IP information (IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway).
D Turn the Power on.
D Allow the device to load the software until the login prompt appears. The
device‘s initial state is called the default mode.
D When the prompt asks for operator login, execute the following steps:
D Type the word admin in the login area. Since a number of the Quick
Setup commands require administrator account rights, we recom-
mend logging into an administrator account. Press the enter key.
D Enter the state on delivery password private.
D Press the enter key
D The CLI User EXEC prompt will be displayed.
User EXEC prompt:
(Hirschmann Product) >
D Use “enable” to switch to the Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC.
Privileged EXEC prompt:
(Hirschmann Product) #
D Use “configure” to switch to the Global Config mode from Privileged
EXEC.
Global Config prompt:
(Hirschmann Product) (Config)#
D Use “exit” to return to the previous mode.
CLI L2P
36 Release 8.0 05/2013
Quick Start up 2.2 System Info and System Setup
2.2 System Info and System

Setup
This chapter informs you about:

D Quick Start up Software Version Information
D Quick Start up Physical Port Data
D Quick Start up User Account Management
D Quick Start up IP Address
D Quick Start up Uploading from Switch to Out-of-Band PC
Only XMODEM)
D Quick Start up Downloading from Out-of-Band PC to Switch
(Only XMODEM)
D Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server
D Quick Start up Factory Defaults
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 37
U Quick Start up Physical Port Data
Command Details
show port all Displays the Ports
(in Privileged EXEC)
slot/port
Type - Indicates if the port is a special type of port
Admin Mode - Selects the Port Control Administration State
Physical Mode - Selects the desired port speed and duplex mode
Physical Status - Indicates the port speed and duplex mode
Link Status - Indicates whether the link is up or down
Link Trap - Determines whether or not to send a trap when link status
changes
LACP Mode - Displays whether LACP is enabled or disabled on this
port.
Table 9: Quick Start up Physical Port Data
U Quick Start up User Account Management
Command Details
show users Displays all of the users that are allowed to access the
(in Privileged EXEC) switch
Access Mode - Shows whether the user is able to change
parameters on the switch(Read/Write) or is only able to
view them (Read Only).
As a factory default, the ‘admin’ user has Read/Write
access and the ‘user’ user has Read Only access. There
can only be one Read/Write user and up to five Read Only
users.
show loginsession Displays all of the login session information

(in User EXEC)
Table 10: Quick Start up User Account Management
CLI L2P
38 Release 8.0 05/2013
Command Details
users passwd <user- Allows the user to set passwords or change passwords
name> needed to login
(in Global Config) A prompt will appear after the command is entered
requesting the users old password. In the absence of an
old password leave the area blank. The operator must
press enter to execute the command.
The system then prompts the user for a new password
then a prompt to confirm the new password. If the new
password and the confirmed password match a message
will be displayed.
User password should not be more than eight characters in
length.
Make sure, that the passwords of the users differ from
each other. If two or more users try to choose the same
password, the CLI will display an error message.
copy system:running- This will save passwords and all other changes to the
config device.
nvram:startup-config If you do not save the configuration by doing this com-
(in Privileged EXEC) mand, all configurations will be lost when a power cycle is
performed on the switch or when the switch is reset.
logout Logs the user out of the switch

(in User EXEC and Privileged
EXEC)
Table 10: Quick Start up User Account Management
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 39
U Quick Start up IP Address

To view the network parametes the operator can access the device by the
following three methods.
D Simple Network Management Protocol - SNMP
D Telnet
D Web Browser
Note: After configuring the network parameters it is advisable to execute the

command ‘copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config’
to ensure that the configurations are not lost.
Command Details
show network Displays the Network Configurations
(in User EXEC)
IP Address - IP Address of the switch
Default IP is 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask - IP Subnet Mask for the switch
Default is 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway - The default Gateway for this switch
Default value is 0.0.0.0
Burned in MAC Address - The Burned in MAC Address used for in-
band connectivity
Network Configurations Protocol (BOOTP/DHCP) - Indicates which
network protocol is being used
Default is DHCP
Network Configurations Protocol HiDiscovery - Indicates the status of
the HiDiscovery protocol.
Default is read-write
Management VLAN Id - Specifies VLAN id
Web Mode - Indicates whether HTTP/Web is enabled.
JavaScript Mode - Indicates whether java mode is enabled.
When the user accesses the switch’s graphical user interface (web
interface) and JavaScript Mode is enabled, the switch’s web server
will deliver a HTML page that contains JavaScript. Some browsers do
not support JavaScript. In this case, a HTML page without JavaScript
is necessary. In this case, set JavaScript Mode to disabled.
Default: enabled.
network parms Sets the IP Address, subnet mask and gateway of the router. The IP
<ipaddr> <net- Address and the gateway must be on the same subnet.
mask> [gateway]
(in Privileged EXEC)
IP Address range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Table 11: Quick Start up IP Address
CLI L2P
40 Release 8.0 05/2013
Command Details
Subnet Mask range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Table 11: Quick Start up IP Address
U Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server

Before starting a TFTP server download, the operator must complete the
Quick Start up for the IP Address.
Command Details
copy <url> {nvram:startup- Sets the destination (download) datatype to be an
config | system:image} image (system:image) or a configuration file
(nvram:startup-config).
The URL must be specified as:
tftp://ipAddr/filepath/fileName.
The nvram:startup-config option downloads the
configuration file using tftp and system:image
option downloads the code file.
Table 12: Quick Start up Downloading from TFTP Server
U Quick Start up Factory Defaults
Command Details
clear config Enter yes when the prompt pops up to clear all the confi-
(in Privileged EXEC Mode) gurations made to the switch.
copy system:running- Enter yes when the prompt pops up that asks if you want
config nvram:startup- to save the configurations made to the switch.
config
reboot (or cold boot the switch) Enter yes when the prompt pops up that asks if you want
(in Privileged EXEC Mode) to reset the system.
This is the users choice either reset the switch or cold
boot the switch, both work effectively.
Table 13: Quick Start up Factory Defaults
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 41
CLI L2P
42 Release 8.0 05/2013
Mode-based CLI
3 Mode-based CLI
The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the na-
ture of the command. A sample of the CLI command modes are described
below. Each of the command modes support specific software commands.
D User Exec Mode
D Privileged Exec Mode
D Global Config Mode
D Vlan Mode
D Interface Config Mode
D Line Config Mode
The Command Mode table captures the command modes, the prompts visi-
ble in that mode and the exit method from that mode.
Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit or Access Next Mode

User Exec Mode This is the first level of (Hirschmann Enter Logout command
access. Perform basic Product)>
tasks and list system
information
Privileged Exec From the User Exec (Hirschmann To exit to the User Exec
Mode Mode, enter the Product)# mode, enter exit or press
enable command Ctrl-Z.
VLAN Mode From the Privileged (Hirschmann To exit to the Privileged
User Exec mode, enter Product) Exec mode, enter the exit
the vlan database (Vlan) # command, or press Ctrl-Z to
command switch to User Exec mode.
Global Config From the Privileged (Hirschmann To exit to the Privileged
Mode Exec mode, enter the Product) Exec mode, enter the exit
configure com- (Config)# command, or press Ctrl-Z to
mand switch to user exec mode.
Interface Config From the Global Con- (Hirschmann To exit to the Global Config
Mode figuration mode, enter Product) mode enter exit. To return to
the interface (Interface- user EXEC mode enter ctrl-
<slot/port> com- "if num- Z.
mand ber")#
Line Config Mode From the Global Con- (Hirschmann To exit to the Global Config
figuration mode, enter Product) mode enter exit. To return to
the lineconfig (line) # User Exec mode enter ctrl-
command Z.
Table 14: Command Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 43
Mode-based CLI 3.1 Mode-based Topology
3.1 Mode-based Topology
The CLI tree is built on a mode concept where the commands are available
according to the interface. Some of the modes are depicted in the following
figure.
ROOT
The User Exec commands

User Exec
are also accessible in the
Privileged Exec mode.
Enable
Privileged Exec
VLAN Global Config
Interface Config
Line Config
Fig. 1: Mode-based CLI
CLI L2P
44 Release 8.0 05/2013
Mode-based CLI 3.2 Mode-based Command Hierarchy
3.2 Mode-based Command

Hierarchy
The CLI is divided into various modes. The Commands in one mode are not
available until the operator switches to that particular mode, with the excep-
tion of the User Exec mode commands. The User Exec mode commands
may also be executed in the Privileged Exec mode.
The commands available to the operator at any point in time depend upon
the mode. Entering a question mark (?) at the CLI prompt, displays a list of
the available commands and descriptions of the commands.
The CLI provides the following modes:
User Exec Mode
When the operator logs into the CLI, the User Exec mode is the initial
mode. The User Exec mode contains a limited set of commands. The
command prompt shown at this level is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)>
Privileged Exec Mode
To have access to the full suite of commands, the operator must enter
the Privileged Exec mode. Privileged users authenticated by login are
able to enter the Privileged EXEC mode. From Privileged Exec mode,
the operator can issue any Exec command, enter the VLAN mode or
enter the Global Configuration mode . The command prompt shown
at this level is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)#
VLAN Mode
This mode groups all the commands pertaining to VLANs. The com-
mand prompt shown at this level is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)(VLAN)#
Global Config Mode
This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the running
configuration. General setup commands are grouped in this mode.
From the Global Configuration mode, the operator can enter the Sys-
tem Configuration mode, the Physical Port Configuration mode, the
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 45
Mode-based CLI 3.2 Mode-based Command Hierarchy
Interface Configuration mode, or the Protocol Specific modes speci-

fied below. The command prompt at this level is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)(Config)#
From the Global Config mode, the operator may enter the following configu-
ration modes:
Interface Config Mode
Many features are enabled for a particular interface. The Interface
commands enable or modify the operation of an interface.
In this mode, a physical port is set up for a specific logical connection
operation. The Interface Config mode provides access to the router
interface configuration commands. The command prompt at this level
is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)(Interface
<slot/port>)#
The resulting prompt for the interface configuration command entered
in the Global Configuration mode is shown below:
(Hirschmann Product)(Config)# interface 2/1
(Hirschmann Product)(Interface 2/1)#
Line Config Mode
This mode allows the operator to configure the console interface. The
operator may configure the interface from the directly connected con-
sole or the virtual terminal used with Telnet. The command prompt at
this level is:
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)(Line)#
MAC Access-List Config Mode
Use the MAC Access-List Config mode to create a MAC Access-List
and to enter the mode containing Mac Access-List configuration com-
mands.
(Hirschmann Product)(Config)# mac-access-list
extended <name>
Command Prompt: (Hirschmann Product)(Config mac-
access-list)#
CLI L2P
46 Release 8.0 05/2013
Mode-based CLI 3.3 Flow of Operation
3.3 Flow of Operation
This section captures the flow of operation for the CLI:

D The operator logs into the CLI session and enters the User Exec mode.
In the User Exec mode the (Hirschmann Product)(exec)> prompt is
displayed on the screen.
The parsing process is initiated whenever the operator types a command and
presses <ENTER>. The command tree is searched for the command of in-
terest. If the command is not found, the output message indicates where the
offending entry begins. For instance, command node A has the command
"show spanning-tree" but the operator attempts to execute the com-
mand "show arpp brief" then the output message would be
(Hirschmann Product)(exec)> show sspanning-tree^.
(Hirschmann Product)%Invalid input detected at '^' mark-
er. If the operator has given an invalid input parameter in the command, then
the message conveys to the operator an invalid input was detected. The lay-
out of the output is depicted below:
(Hirschmann Product)(exec) #show sspanning-tree

^
(Hirschmann Product)Invalid input detected at '^' marker.
Fig. 2: Syntax Error Message
After all the mandatory parameters are entered, any additional parameters
entered are treated as optional parameters. If any of the parameters are not
recognized a syntax error message will be displayed.
D After the command is successfully parsed and validated, the control of
execution goes to the corresponding CLI callback function.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 47
Mode-based CLI 3.3 Flow of Operation
D For mandatory parameters, the command tree extends till the mandatory
parameters make the leaf of the branch. The callback function is only in-
voked when all the mandatory parameters are provided. For optional pa-
rameters, the command tree extends till the mandatory parameters and
the optional parameters make the leaf of the branch. However, the call
back function is associated with the node where the mandatory parame-
ters are fetched. The call back function then takes care of the optional pa-
rameters.
D Once the control has reached the callback function, the callback function
has complete information about the parameters entered by the operator.
CLI L2P
48 Release 8.0 05/2013
Mode-based CLI 3.4 “No” Form of a Command
3.4 “No” Form of a Command
“No” is a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new
or distinct command. Only the configuration commands are available in the
“no” form. The behavior and the support details of the “no” form is captured
as part of the mapping sheets.
3.4.1 Support for “No” Form

Almost every configuration command has a “no” form. In general, use the no
form to reverse the action of a command or reset a value back to the default.
For example, the no shutdown interface configuration command re-
verses the shutdown of an interface. Use the command without the keyword
”no“ to re-enable a disabled feature or to enable a feature that is disabled by
default.
3.4.2 Behavior of Command Help ("?")

The “no” form is treated as a specific form of an existing command and does
not represent a new or distinct command. However, the behavior of the “?”
and help text differ for the “no” form (the help message shows only options
that apply to the “no” form).
D The help message is the same for all forms of the command. The help
string may be augmented with details about the “no” form behavior.
D For the (no interface?) and (no inte?) cases of the “?”, the options
displayed are identical to the case when the “no” token is not specified as
in (interface) and (inte?).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 49
Mode-based CLI 3.4 “No” Form of a Command
CLI L2P
50 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base
4 CLI Commands: Base
This chapter provides detailed explanation of the Switching commands. The

commands are divided into five functional groups:
D Show commands display switch settings, statistics, and other information.
D Configuration commands configure features and options of the switch.
For every configuration command, there is a show command that displays
the configuration setting.
D Copy commands transfer or save configuration and informational files to
and from the switch.
D Clear commands clear
- some
(e.g. the ”clear arp-table-switch” command which clears the agent´s
ARP table) or
- all
(e.g. the ”clear config” command which resets the whole
configuration to the factory defaults
This chapter includes the following configuration types:

D System information and statistics commands
D Management commands
D Device configuration commands
D User account management commands
D Security commands
D System utilities
D Link Layer Discovery Protocol Commands
D Simple Network Time Protocol Commands
D Precision Time Protocol Commands
D Power over Ethernet Commands
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 51
CLI Commands: Base 4.1 System Information and Statistics
4.1 System Information and

Statistics
4.1.1 show
This command displays the interface's configuration.
Format
show [all]
Mode
Interface Config
all
Show all the running configuration parameters on this interface.
The configuration parameters will be displayed even if their value is
the default value.
4.1.2 show address-conflict

This command displays address-conflict settings.
Format
show address-conflict
Mode
Privileged EXEC and User EXEC
CLI L2P
52 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.3 show arp switch

This command displays the Address Resolution Protocol cache of the switch.
Format
show arp switch
Mode
4.1.4 show bridge address-learning

This command displays the address-learning setting.
The setting can be enable or disable.
Format
show bridge address-learning
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 53
4.1.5 show bridge address-relearn-detect

This command displays the Bridge Address Relearn Detection setting and
the Bridge Address Relearn Threshold.
Format
show bridge address-relearn-detect
Mode
Bridge Address Relearn Detection
Setting can be enable or disable.
Bridge Address Relearn Threshold
The threshold can be 1 to 1024.
4.1.6 show bridge aging-time

This command displays the timeout for address aging.
Format
show bridge aging-time
Mode
CLI L2P
54 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.7 show bridge duplex-mismatch-detect

This command displays the Bridge Duplex Mismatch Detection setting
(Enabled or Disabled).
Format
show bridge duplex-mismatch-detect
Mode
4.1.8 show bridge fast-link-detection

This command displays the Bridge Fast Link Detection setting.
Format
show bridge fast-link-detection
Mode
4.1.9 show bridge framesize

This command displays the maximum size of frame (packet size) setting.
Format
show bridge framesize
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 55
4.1.10 show bridge vlan-learning

This command displays the bridge vlan-learning mode.
Format
show bridge vlan-learning
Mode
4.1.11 bridge framesize

Activation of long frames. Configure 1522 or 16321) or 90222) as maximum
size of frame (packet size).
Default
1522
Format
bridge framesize { 1522 | 16321) | 90222) }
Mode
Global Config
bridge framesize 1522
Configure 1522 as maximum size of frame (packet size).
bridge framesize 1632 1)
Configure 1632 1) as maximum size of frame (packet size).
bridge framesize 9022 1)
Configure 9022 2) as maximum size of frame (packet size,
jumbo frames).
1) On MACH4000, MACH100, MACH1000 and PowerMICE: 1552

2) Available for the MACH104 and MACH1040 devices.
CLI L2P
56 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.12 show config-watchdog

Activating the watchdog enables you to return automatically to the last
configuration after a set time period has elapsed. This gives you back your
access to the Switch.
Format
show config-watchdog
Mode
4.1.13 show device-status

The signal device status is for displaying
D the monitoring functions of the switch,
D the device status trap setting.
Format
show device-status
[monitor|state|trap]
Mode
Device status monitor
Displays the possible monitored events and which of them are
monitored:
– the detected failure of at least one of the supply voltages.
– the removal of the ACA
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 57
– the removal of a media module

– the temperature limits
– the defective link status of at least one port. With the switch, the
indication of link status can be masked by the management for each
port. Link status is not monitored in the delivery condition.
– the loss of Redundancy guarantee.
Ring/network coupling:
– The following conditions are reported in Stand-by mode:
– interrupted control line
– partner device running in Stand-by mode.
HIPER-Ring:
– The following condition is reported in RM mode additionally:
– Ring redundancy guaranteed. Ring redundancy is not monitored in
the delivery condition.
Device status state
Error The current device status is error.
No Error The current device status is no error.
Device status trap
enabled A trap is sent if the device status changes.
disabled No trap is sent if the device status changes.
4.1.14 show authentication

This command displays users assigned to authentication login lists.
Format
show authentication [users <listname>]
Mode
CLI L2P
58 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.15 show eventlog

This command displays the event log, which contains error messages from
the system. The event log is not cleared on a system reset.
Format
show eventlog
Mode
File
The file in which the event originated.
Line
The line number of the event
Task Id
The task ID of the event.
Code
The event code.
Time
The time this event occurred.
Note: Event log information is retained across a switch reset.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 59
4.1.16 show interface

This command displays a summary of statistics for a specific port or a count
of all CPU traffic based upon the argument.
Format
show interface {<slot/port> |
ethernet{<slot/port>|switchport} |
switchport}
Mode
The display parameters, when the argument is ' <slot/port>', is as follows :

Packets Received Without Error
The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multi-
cast packets) received by the processor.
Packets Received With Error
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Broadcast Packets Received
The total number of packets received that were directed to the broad-
cast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Packets Transmitted Without Error
The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.
Transmit Packets Errors
The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted
because of errors.
Collisions Frames
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet
segment.
Time Since Counters Last Cleared
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the sta-
tistics for this port were last cleared.
The display parameters, when the argument is 'switchport', is as follows :
CLI L2P
60 Release 8.0 05/2013
Packets Received Without Error

The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multi-
cast packets) received by the processor.
Broadcast Packets Received
The total number of packets received that were directed to the broad-
cast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Packets Received With Error
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Packets Transmitted Without Error
The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.
Broadcast Packets Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to
be transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
Transmit Packet Errors
The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted
because of errors.
Address Entries Currently In Use
The total number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries now
active on the switch, including learned and static entries.
VLAN Entries Currently In Use
The number of VLAN entries presently occupying the VLAN table.
tistics for this switch were last cleared.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 61
4.1.17 show interface ethernet

This command displays detailed statistics for a specific port or for all CPU
traffic based upon the argument.
Format
show interface ethernet {<slot/port> | switchport}
Mode
The display parameters, when the argument is '<slot/port>', are as follows :
Packets Received
Octets Received - The total number of octets of data (including those
in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but
including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets). This object can be
used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization. If greater preci-
sion is desired, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects
should be sampled before and after a common interval. ----- The
result of this equation is the value Utilization which is the percent utili-
zation of the ethernet segment on a scale of 0 to 100 percent.
Packets Received < 64 Octets - The total number of packets (includ-
ing bad packets) received that were < 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Received 64 Octets - The total number of packets (includ-
ing bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Received 65-127 Octets - The total number of packets
(including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
octets).
octets).
CLI L2P
62 Release 8.0 05/2013

octets).
octets).
octets).
Packets Received > 1522 Octets - The total number of packets
received that were longer than 1522 octets (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Packets Received Successfully
Total - The total number of packets received that were without errors.
Unicast Packets Received - The number of subnetwork-unicast
packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Multicast Packets Received - The total number of good packets
received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this
number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
Broadcast Packets Received - The total number of good packets
received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this
does not include multicast packets.
Packets Received with MAC Errors
Total - The total number of inbound packets that contained errors pre-
venting them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Jabbers Received - The total number of packets received that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-
gral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that this definition of
jabber is different than the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5
(10BASE5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents
define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The
allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms.
Fragments/Undersize Received - The total number of packets
received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 63
Alignment Errors - The total number of packets received that had a

length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between
64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with a non-integral number of octets.
Rx FCS Errors - The total number of packets received that had a
(FCS) with an integral number of octets
Overruns - The total number of frames discarded as this port was
overloaded with incoming packets, and could not keep up with the
inflow.
Received Packets not forwarded
Total - A count of valid frames received which were discarded (i.e. fil-
tered) by the forwarding process.
Local Traffic Frames - The total number of frames dropped in the
forwarding process because the destination address was located off
of this port.
802.3x Pause Frames Received - A count of MAC Control frames
received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE oper-
ation. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating
in half-duplex mode.
Unacceptable Frame Type - The number of frames discarded from
this port due to being an unacceptable frame type.
VLAN Membership Mismatch - The number of frames discarded on
this port due to ingress filtering.
VLAN Viable Discards - The number of frames discarded on this
port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the
VLAN table is being modified, or if the VLAN has not been configured.
Multicast Tree Viable Discards - The number of frames discarded
when a lookup in the multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree
is being modified.
Reserved Address Discards - The number of frames discarded that
are destined to an IEEE 802.1 reserved address and are not sup-
ported by the system.
Broadcast Storm Recovery - The number of frames discarded that
are destined for FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery
is enabled.
CFI Discards - The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set
and the addresses in RIF are in non-canonical format.
CLI L2P
64 Release 8.0 05/2013
Upstream Threshold - The number of frames discarded due to lack

of cell descriptors available for that packet's priority level.
Packets Transmitted Octets
Total Bytes - The total number of octets of data (including those in
bad packets) transmitted into the network (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets). This object can be used as a reasonable esti-
mate of ethernet utilization. If greater precision is desired, the ether-
StatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before
and after a common interval. -----
Packets Transmitted 64 Octets - The total number of packets
(including bad packets) transmitted that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted 65-127 Octets - The total number of packets
(including bad packets) transmitted that were between 65 and 127
octets).
octets).
octets).
octets).
Packets Transmitted 1024-1518 Octets - The total number of pack-
ets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 1024 and
1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted 1519-1522 Octets - The total number of pack-
ets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 1519 and
1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
Max Info - The maximum size of the Info (non-MAC) field that this
port will receive or transmit.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 65
Packets Transmitted Successfully

Total - The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port
to its segment.
Unicast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-uni-
cast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast
address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast
Transmit Errors
Total Errors - The sum of Single, Multiple, and Excessive Collisions.
Tx FCS Errors - The total number of packets transmitted that had a
(FCS) with an integral number of octets
Oversized - The total number of frames that exceeded the max per-
mitted frame size. This counter has a max increment rate of 815
counts per sec. at 10 Mb/s.
Underrun Errors - The total number of frames discarded because
the transmit FIFO buffer became empty during frame transmission.
Transmit Discards
Total Discards - The sum of single collision frames discarded, multi-
ple collision frames discarded, and excessive frames discarded.
Single Collision Frames - A count of the number of successfully
transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is
inhibited by exactly one collision.
Multiple Collision Frames - A count of the number of successfully
transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is
inhibited by more than one collision.
Excessive Collisions - A count of frames for which transmission on
a particular interface is discontinued due to excessive collisions.
Port Membership - The number of frames discarded on egress for
this port due to egress filtering being enabled.
VLAN Viable Discards - The number of frames discarded on this
port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the
VLAN table is being modified, or if the VLAN has not been configured.
CLI L2P
66 Release 8.0 05/2013
Protocol Statistics
BPDUs received - The count of BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
received in the spanning tree layer.
BPDUs Transmitted - The count of BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data
Units) transmitted from the spanning tree layer.
802.3x Pause Frames Received - A count of MAC Control frames
received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE oper-
ation. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating
in half-duplex mode.
GVRP PDU's Received - The count of GVRP PDU's received in the
GARP layer.
GMRP PDU's received - The count of GMRP PDU's received in the
GARP layer.
GMRP PDU's Transmitted - The count of GMRP PDU's transmitted
from the GARP layer.
GMRP Failed Registrations - The number of times attempted
GMRP registrations could not be completed.
STP BPDUs Transmitted - Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol
Data Units sent
STP BPDUs Received - Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol
Data Units received
RST BPDUs Transmitted - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge
Protocol Data Units sent
RSTP BPDUs Received - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Pro-
tocol Data Units received
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted - Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge
Protocol Data Units sent
MSTP BPDUs Received - Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge
Protocol Data Units received
Dot1x Statistics
EAPOL Frames Received- The number of valid EAPOL frames of
any type that have been received by this authenticator.
EAPOL Frames Transmitted - The number of EAPOL frames of any
type that have been transmitted by this authenticator.
tistics for this port were last cleared.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 67
The display parameters, when the argument is ‘switchport, are as follows :

Octets Received - The total number of octets of data received by the
processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Total Packets Received Without Error- The total number of packets
(including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the
processor.
Unicast Packets Received - The number of subnetwork-unicast
packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Multicast Packets Received - The total number of packets received
that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does
not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
Broadcast Packets Received - The total number of packets
received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this
does not include multicast packets.
Receive Packets Discarded - The number of inbound packets which
were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been
detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer
space.
Octets Transmitted - The total number of octets transmitted out of
the interface, including framing characters.
Packets Transmitted without Errors - The total number of packets
transmitted out of the interface.
Unicast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-uni-
cast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast
Broadcast Packets Transmitted - The total number of packets that
higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast
Transmit Packets Discarded - The number of outbound packets
which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been
detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer
space.
Most Address Entries Ever Used - The highest number of Forward-
ing Database Address Table entries that have been learned by this
switch since the most recent reboot.
CLI L2P
68 Release 8.0 05/2013
Address Entries in Use - The number of Learned and static entries

in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch.
Maximum VLAN Entries - The maximum number of Virtual LANs
(VLANs) allowed on this switch.
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used - The largest number of VLANs that
have been active on this switch since the last reboot.
Static VLAN Entries - The number of presently active VLAN entries
on this switch that have been created statically.
Dynamic VLAN Entries - The number of presently active VLAN
entries on this switch that have been created by GVRP registration.
VLAN Deletes - The number of VLANs on this switch that have been
created and then deleted since the last reboot.
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the
statistics for this switch were last cleared.
4.1.18 show interface switchport

This command displays data concerning the internal port to the management
agent.
Format
show interface switchport
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 69
4.1.19 show interface utilization

This command displays the utilization statistics for the entire device.
Format
show interface utilization
Mode
Global Config
Interface
Display port number in <slot/port> notation.
Utilization
Display the utilization on this port.
Possible values: 0..100.00%
Lower threshold
Display the lower threshold setting for the utilization statistics on this
port.
Upper threshold
Display the upper threshold setting for the utilization statistics on this
port.
Alarm condition
Display the alarm condition setting for the utilization statistics on this
port.
Possible values: true, false
CLI L2P
70 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.20 show logging

This command displays the trap log maintained by the switch. The trap log
contains a maximum of 256 entries that wrap.
Format
show logging [buffered | hosts | traplogs |
snmp-requests]
Mode
buffered
Display buffered (in-memory) log entries.
hosts
Display logging hosts.
traplogs
Display trap records.
snmp-requests
Display logging SNMP requests and severity level.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 71
4.1.21 show mac-addr-table

This command displays the forwarding database entries. If the command is
entered with no parameter, the entire table is displayed. This is the same as
entering the optional all parameter. Alternatively, the administrator can en-
ter a MAC Address to display the table entry for the requested MAC address
and all entries following the requested MAC address.
Note: This command displays only learned unicast addresses. For other
addresses use the command show mac-filter-table.
See “show mac-filter-table gmrp” on page 235.
Format
show mac-addr-table [<macaddr> <1-4042> | all]
Mode
Mac Address
A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering
information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are
separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
Slot/Port
The port which this address was learned.
if Index
This object indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry associated
with this port.
Status
The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are:
Learned The value of the corresponding instance was learned by
observing the source MAC addresses of incoming traffic, and is cur-
rently in use.
Management The value of the corresponding instance (system MAC
address) is also the value of an existing instance of
dot1dStaticAddress.
CLI L2P
72 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.22 show signal-contact

The signal contact is for displaying
D the manual setting and the current state of the signal contact,
D the monitoring functions of the switch,
D the signal-contacts trap setting.
Format
show signal-contact
[1|2|all [mode|monitor|state|trap]]
Mode
Signal contact mode
Auto The signal contact monitors the functions of the switch which
makes it possible to perform remote diagnostics.
A break in contact is reported via the zero-potential signal contact
(relay contact, closed circuit).
Device Status The signal contact monitors the device-status.
Manual This command gives you the option of remote switching the
signal contact.
Signal contact monitor
Displays the possible monitored events and which of them are moni-
tored:
– the detected failure of at least one of the supply voltages.
– the removal of the ACA
– the removal of a media module
– the temperature limits
– the defective link status of at least one port. With the switch, the
indication of link status can be masked by the management for each
port. Link status is not monitored in the delivery condition.
– the loss of Redundancy guarantee.
Ring/network coupling:
– The following conditions are reported in Stand-by mode:
– interrupted control line
– partner device running in Stand-by mode.
HIPER-Ring:
– The following condition is reported in RM mode additionally:
– Ring redundancy guaranteed. Ring redundancy is not monitored in
the delivery condition.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 73
Signal contact manual setting

closed The signal contact´s manual setting is closed.
open The signal contact´s manual setting is open.
Signal contact operating state
closed The signal contact is currently closed.
open The signal contact is currently open.
Signal contact trap
enabled A trap is sent if the signal contact state changes.
disabled No trap is sent if the signal contact state changes.
Note: To show the signal contact´s port related settings, use the command
show port {<slot/port> | all} (see “show port” on page 243).
CLI L2P
74 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.23 show slot

This command is used to display information about slot(s).
For [slot] enter the slot ID.
Format
show slot [slot]
Mode
Privileged EXEC, Global Config
Slot
Display the number of the media module slot.
Status
Full The media module slot is equipped with a module.
Empty The media module slot is not equipped.
Admin State
Note: This feature is available for MS20/MS30, PowerMICE,
MACH102 and MACH4000 devices.
Enable The media module slot is logically enabled.
Disable The media module slot is logically disabled.
Configured Card Model ID
Display the type of the media module.
Card Description
Product Code
Pluggable
Yes The module is pluggable.
No The module is not pluggable.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 75
4.1.24 show running-config

This command is used to display the current setting of different protocol
packages supported on the switch. This command displays only those
parameters, the values of which differ from default value. The output is
displayed in the script format, which can be used to configure another switch
with the same configuration.
Format
show running-config [all | <scriptname>]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
all
Show all the running configuration on the switch. All configuration
parameters will be output even if their value is the default value.
<scriptname>
Script file name for writing active configuration.
Note: Make sure that the file extension is .cli, that the file name does
not exceed 16 characters, does not start with a dot (.) and does not
contain a directory.
CLI L2P
76 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.1.25 show sysinfo

This command displays switch information.
Format
show sysinfo
Mode
Alarm
Displays the latest present Alarm for a signal contact.
System Description
Text used to identify this switch.
System Name
Name used to identify the switch.
System Location
Text used to identify the location of the switch. May be up to 31 alpha-
numeric characters. The factory default is blank.
System Contact
Text used to identify a contact person for this switch. May be up to 31
alpha-numeric characters. The factory default is blank.
System UpTime
The time in days, hours and minutes since the last switch reboot.
System Date and Time
The system clock´s date and time in local time zone.
System IP Address
The system´s IP address.
Boot Software Release
The boot code´s version number.
Boot Software Build Date
The boot code´s build date.
Operating system Software Release
The operating system´s software version number.
Operating system Software Build Date
The operating system´s software build date.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 77
Running Software Release

The operating system´s software version number.
Running Software Build Date
The operating system´s software build date.
Stored Software Release
The stored operating system´s software version number.
Stored Software Build Date
The stored operating system´s software build date.
Backup Software Release
The backup operating system´s software version number.
Backup Software Build Date
The backup operating system´s software build date.
Backplane Hardware Revision
The hardware´s revision number.
Backplane Hardware Description
The hardware´s device description.
Serial Number (Backplane)
The hardware´s serial number.
Base MAC Address (Backplane)
The hardware´s base MAC address.
Number of MAC Addresses (Backplane)
The number of hardware MAC addresses.
Configuration state
The state of the actual configuration.
Configuration signature
The signature (watermark) of the stored configuration. The signature
changes each time the configuration is saved.
Auto Config Adapter, State
The Auto Configuration Adapter's state.
Auto Config Adapter, Serial Number
The Auto Configuration Adapter's serial number (if present and
operative).
CLI L2P
78 Release 8.0 05/2013
Fan Status
The status of the MACH4000 fan.
Power Supply Information
The status of the power supplies.
Media Module Information
The description of each media module
– Description: media module type,
– Serial Number of the media modul (if available),
SFP Information:
– SFP Part ID: SFP type (if available),
– SFP Serial No. of the SFP module (if available),
– SFP Supported: yes/no,
– SFP Temperature (°C, F),
– SFP Tx Pwr, SFP transmit power (dBm / mW),
– SFP Rx Pwr, SFP receive power (dBm / mW),
– SFP Rx Pwr State: ok/warning/alarm.
CPU Utilization
The utilization of the central processing unit.
Average CPU Utilization
The average utilization of the central processing unit.
Flashdisk
Free memory on flashdisk (in Kbytes).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 79
4.1.26 show temperature
Note: The command is available for RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30,

RSR20/RSR30, MACH100, MACH1000, PowerMICE, MACH4000 and
OCTOPUS devices.
This command displays the lower and upper temperature limit for sending a
trap.
Format
show temperature
Mode
4.1.27 utilization alarm-threshold

Use this command to add the alarm threshold value for monitoring bandwidth
utilization of the interface.
Format
utilization alarm-threshold
{lower <0..10000> | upper <0..10000>}
Mode
Interface Config
lower
Enter lower utilization alarm threshold in the range of 0..10000
where 10000 represents 100%.
upper
Enter upper utilization alarm threshold in the range of 0..10000
where 10000 represents 100%.
CLI L2P
80 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base 4.2 Debug Commands
4.2 Debug Commands
4.2.1 debug tcpdump help

Run diagnostics commands. With the TCP dump you run a packet
analyzer for capturing network traffic.
This command displays the supported options and expressions for the
tcpdump command.
Format
debug tcpdump help
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.2.2 debug tcpdump start cpu

This command starts a capture on the CPU interface with the options and
expressions in the <command> parameter.
Without the <command> parameter this command starts a capture on the
CPU interface using default options and no explicit filtering.
Format
debug tcpdump start cpu <command>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 81
4.2.3 debug tcpdump start cpu filter

This command starts a capture on the CPU interface with the options and
expressions in the filter file.
Format
debug tcpdump start cpu filter <capturefilter>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.2.4 debug tcpdump stop

This command stops a running capture on the CPU interface.
Format
debug tcpdump stop
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
82 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.2.5 debug tcpdump filter show

This command shows a saved filter file stored in flash memory.
Format
debug tcpdump filter show <capturefilter>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.2.6 debug tcpdump filter list

This command lists all saved filter files stored in flash memory.
Format
debug tcpdump filter list
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 83
4.2.7 debug tcpdump filter delete

This command removes a saved filter file from the flash memory.
Format
debug tcpdump filter delete <capturefilter>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
84 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base 4.3 Management VLAN Commands
4.3 Management VLAN Com-

mands
4.3.1 network mgmt_vlan

This command configures the Management VLAN ID. If you enter the VLAN
ID “0” , the agent can be accessed by all VLANs.
Default
1
Format
network mgmt_vlan <0-4042>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 85
CLI Commands: Base 4.4 Class of Service (CoS) Commands
4.4 Class of Service (CoS)

Commands
This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the QoS CoS commands.

The following commands are available.
The commands are divided into these different groups:

D Configuration Commands are used to configure features and options of
the switch. For every configuration command there is a show command
that will display the configuration setting.
D Show commands are used to display device settings, statistics and other
information.
Note: The 'Interface Config' mode only affects a single interface, whereas the
'Global Config' mode is applied to all interfaces.
CLI L2P
86 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.4.1 classofservice dot1p-mapping

This command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class for a device
when in ‘Global Config’ mode. The number of available traffic classes may
vary with the platform. Userpriority and trafficclass can both be the range
from 0-7. The command is only available on platforms that support priority to
traffic class mapping on a ‘per-port’ basis, and the number of available traffic
classes may vary with the platform.
Format
classofservice dot1p-mapping
<userpriority> <trafficclass>
Mode
Global Config or Interface Config
userpriority
Enter the 802.1p priority (0-7).
trafficclass
Enter the traffic class to map the 802.1p priority (0-3).
U no classofservice dot1p-mapping
This command restores the default mapping of the 802.1p priority to an
internal traffic class.
Format
no classofservice dot1p-mapping
Modes
Global Config or Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 87
4.4.2 classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

This command maps an IP DSCP value to an internal traffic class.
The <ipdscp> value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63, or
symbolically through one of the following keywords: af11, af12, af13, af21,
af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5,
cs6, cs7, ef.
Format
classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
<ipdscp> <trafficclass>
Mode
Global Config
ipdscp
Enter the IP DSCP value in the range of 0 to 63 or an IP DSCP
keyword (af11, af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41,
af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef).
trafficclass
Enter the traffic class to map the 802.1p priority (0-3).
U no classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
This command restores the default mapping of the IP DSCP value to an
internal traffic class.
Format
no classofservice dot1p-mapping
Modes
Global Config
CLI L2P
88 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.4.3 classofservice trust

This command sets the class of service trust mode of an interface. The mode
can be set to trust one of the Dot1p (802.1p) or IP DSCP packet markings.
Note: In trust ip-dscp mode the switch modifies the vlan priority for out-
going frames according to
– the DSCP mapping and VLAN mapping table
(PowerMICE, MACH1000, MACH4000)
– the a fix mapping table
(see Reference Manual „GUI Graphical User Interface“ (Web-based
Interface) for further details).
Format
classofservice trust dot1p | ip-dscp
Mode
Global Config or
Interface Config (PowerMICE, MACH1000, MACH4000)
U no classofservice trust
This command sets the interface mode to untrusted, i.e. the packet prior-
ity marking is ignored and the default port priority is used instead.
Format
no classofservice trust
Modes
Global Config or
Interface Config (PowerMICE, MACH1000, MACH4000)
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 89
4.4.4 show classofservice dot1p-mapping

This command displays the current 802.1p priority mapping to internal traffic
classes for a specific interface. The slot/port parameter is required on
platforms that support priority to traffic class mapping on a ‘per-port’ basis.
Platforms that support priority to traffic class mapping on a per-port basis:

Format
show classofservice dot1p-mapping
Platforms that do not support priority to traffic class mapping on a per-port

basis:
Format
show classofservice dot1p-mapping
Mode
CLI L2P
90 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.4.5 show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

This command displays the current IP DSCP mapping to internal traffic class-
es for the global configuration settings.
Format
show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping [<slot/port>]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
The following information is repeated for each user priority.

IP DSCP
The IP DSCP value.
Traffic Class
The traffic class internal queue identifier to which the IP DSCP value
is mapped.
slot/port
Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 91
4.4.6 show classofservice trust

This command displays the current trust mode for the specified interface.
The slot/port parameter is optional. If specified, the trust mode of the inter-
face is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are
displayed.
Format
show classofservice trust [slot/port]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Class of Service Trust Mode
The current trust mode: Dot1p, IP DSCP, or Untrusted.
Untrusted Traffic Class
The traffic class used for all untrusted traffic. This is only displayed
when the COS trust mode is set to 'untrusted'.
slot/port
4.4.7 vlan port priority all

This command configures the port priority assigned for untagged packets for
all ports presently plugged into the device. The range for the priority is 0-7.
Any subsequent per port configuration will override this configuration setting.
Format
vlan port priority all <priority>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
92 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.4.8 vlan priority

This command configures the default 802.1p port priority assigned for un-
tagged packets for a specific interface. The range for the priority is 0-7
Default
0
Format
vlan priority <priority>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 93
4.4.9 dvlan-tunnel ethertype
Note: This command is available for the RS20/RS30/RS40, RSB20, MS20/

MS30, RSR20/RSR30, MACH100, MACH104, MACH1000, MACH1040,
MACH4002-24G/48G (XG), OCTOPUS, OS20/OS30 devices.
This command configures the ethertype for all core ports. The ethertype may
have the values of 802.1q, vMAN or custom. The configured ethertype is
used for VLAN classification on all ports which are configured as core ports.
Default
802.1Q
Format
dvlan-tunnel ethertype
{802.1Q | vman | custom <0-65535>}
Mode
Global Config
802.1Q
Configure the etherType as 0x8100.
custom
Custom configure the etherType for the DVlan tunnel.
Range for the optional value of the custom ethertype: 0 to 65535.
vman
Configure the etherType as 0x88A8.
CLI L2P
94 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.4.10 mode dvlan-tunnel

Use this command to configure the port either as core port or access port.
Default
Disabled
Format
mode dvlan-tunnel {access | core}
Mode
Interface Config
access
Configure this port as a customer port.
core
Configure this port as a provider network port.
U no mode dvlan-tunnel
Use this command to configure the port as normal switch port and to
disable the DVLAN tunneling.
Default
Disabled
Format
no mode dvlan-tunnel
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 95
4.4.11 show dvlan-tunnel

Use this command to display the DVLAN-Tunnel mode and used ether-type
for the specified interface(s).
Format
show dvlan-tunnel [interface {slot/port} | all]
Modes
Privileged EXEC
User EXEC
<slot/port>
Enter an interface in slot/port format.
all
Enter 'all' for all interfaces.
Interface
Display the number of the interface (slot/port).
Possible values (example): 1/1, 1/2, 2/1, 2/2, 2/3.
Mode
Display the DVLAN-Tunnel mode.
Possible values: normal, ....
EtherType
Display the used ether-type.
Possible values: 802.1Q, vman, custom.
CLI L2P
96 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base 4.5 Link Aggregation(802.3ad) Commands
4.5 Link Aggregation(802.3ad)

Commands
4.5.1 link-aggregation staticcapability

This command enables the support of link-aggregations (static LAGs) on the
device. By default, the static capability for all link-aggregations is disabled.
Default
disabled
Format
link-aggregation staticcapability
Mode
Global Config
U no link-aggregation staticcapability
This command disables the support of static link-aggregations (LAGs) on
the device.
Default
disabled
Format
no link-aggregation staticcapability
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 97
CLI Commands: Base 4.5 Link Aggregation(802.3ad) Commands
4.5.2 show link-aggregation brief

This command displays the static capability of all link-aggregations (LAGs)
on the device as well as a summary of individual link-aggregations.
Format
show link-aggregation brief
Mode
Static Capability
This field displays whether or not the device has static capability
enabled.
For each link-aggregation the following information is displayed:

Name
This field displays the name of the link-aggregation.
Link State
This field indicates whether the link is up or down.
Mbr Ports
This field lists the ports that are members of this link-aggregation, in
<slot/port> notation.
Max. num. of LAGs
Displays the maximum number of concurrently configured link aggre-
gations on this device.
Slot no. for LAGs
Displays the slot number for all configured link aggregations on this
device.
CLI L2P
98 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base 4.6 Management Commands
4.6 Management Commands
These commands manage the switch and show current management

settings.
4.6.1 telnet
This command establishes a new outbound telnet connection to a remote
host. The host value must be a valid IP address. Valid values for port should
be a valid decimal integer in the range of 0 to 65535, where the default value
is 23. If [debug] is used, the current telnet options enabled is displayed. The
optional line parameter sets the outbound telnet operational mode as
‘linemode’, where by default, the operational mode is ‘character mode’. The
echo option enables local echo and only takes effect when the local switch is
accessed via the serial connection (V.24).
Format
telnet <host> <port> [debug] [line] [echo]
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 99
4.6.2 transport input telnet

This command regulates new telnet sessions. If sessions are enabled, new
telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions
available. If sessions are disabled, no new telnet sessions are established.
An established session remains active until the session is ended or an
abnormal network error ends the session.
Default
enabled
Format
transport input telnet
Mode
Line Config
U no transport input telnet

This command disables telnet sessions. If sessions are disabled, no new
telnet sessions are established.
Format
no transport input telnet
Mode
Line Config
CLI L2P
100 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.3 transport output telnet

This command regulates new outbound telnet connections. If enabled, new
outbound telnet sessions can be established until it reaches the maximum
number of simultaneous outbound telnet sessions allowed.
If disabled, no new outbound telnet session can be established. An
established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal
network error ends it.
Default
enabled
Format
transport output telnet
Mode
Line Config
U no transport output telnet

This command disables new outbound telnet connections. If disabled, no
new outbound telnet connection can be established.
Format
no transport output telnet
Mode
Line Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 101
4.6.4 session-limit
This command specifies the maximum number of simultaneous outbound
telnet sessions. A value of 0 indicates that no outbound telnet session can be
established.
Default
4
Format
session-limit <0-5>
Mode
Line Config
U no session-limit
This command sets the maximum number of simultaneous outbound tel-
net sessions to the default value.
Format
no session-limit
Mode
Line Config
CLI L2P
102 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.5 session-timeout
This command sets the telnet session timeout value.The timeout value unit
of time is minutes.
Default
5
Format
session-timeout <1-160>
Mode
Line Config
U no session-timeout
This command sets the telnet session timeout value to the default. The
timeout value unit of time is minutes.
Format
no session-timeout
Mode
Line Config
4.6.6 bridge address-learning

To enable you to observe the data at all the ports, the Switch allows you to
disable the learning of addresses. When the learning of addresses is dis-
abled, the Switch transfers all the data from all ports to all ports. The default
value is enable.
Format
bridge address-learning {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 103
4.6.7 bridge address-relearn detect operation

This command enables or disables Bridge Address Relearn Detection.
The default value is disable.
Default
Disabled
Format
bridge address-relearn detect operation
{disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
4.6.8 bridge address-relearn detect threshold

This command defines the value of relearned addresses to signal address
relearn threshold exceeded.
The default relearn threshold is 1. Possible values to configure threshold
count are 1 to 1024.
Default
1
Format
bridge address-relearn-detect threshold <value>
Mode
Global Config
value
1 to 1024
CLI L2P
104 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.9 bridge aging-time

This command configures the forwarding database address aging timeout in
seconds.
Default
30
Format
bridge aging-time <10-630>
Mode
Global Config
Seconds
The <seconds> parameter must be within the range of 10 to 630 sec-
onds.
U no bridge aging-time
This command sets the forwarding database address aging timeout to
30 seconds.
Format
no bridge aging-time
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 105
4.6.10 bridge fast-link-detection

This command enables or disables the Bridge Fast Link Detection.
Default
Enabled
Format
bridge fast-link-detection {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
4.6.11 bridge duplex-mismatch-detect operation

This command enables or disables Bridge Duplex Mismatch Detection.
Reasons for Duplex Mismatch can be:

- A local port is configured to fix full-duplex.
- A port is configured to auto-negotiation and has negotiated HalfDuplex-
Mode.
Duplex Mismatch can be excluded, when the local port is configured to auto-
negotiation and duplex mode is negotiated to full-duplex.
Note: If counters and configuration settings indicate a Duplex Mismatch, the

reason can also be a bad cable and/or EMI.
Default
Enabled
Format
bridge duplex-mismatch-detect operation
{disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
106 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.12 bridge vlan-learning

With ”independent” you set the Shared VLAN Learning mode to Indepen-
dent. The switch will treat equal MAC source addresses from different VLANs
as separate addresses.
With ”shared” you set the Shared VLAN Learning mode to Shared. The
switch will treat equal MAC source addresses from different VLANs as the
same adress.
Format
bridge vlan-learning {independent|shared}
Mode
Global Config
4.6.13 digital-input
This command configures the MICE IO-Module digital inputs.
Format
digital-input
admin-state {enable | disable}
refresh-interval <refresh-interval>
log-event {all | <slot/input>} {enable|disable}
snmp-trap {all | <slot/input>} {enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
admin-state
This command enables or disables the polling task for digital inputs of
the MICE IO-Module. When disabled, no event logging or SNMP
traps will work. Default: disable.
disable Disable the IO-Module digital inputs admin state.
enable Enable the IO-Module digital inputs admin state.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 107
refresh-interval
This command configures the digital inputs refresh interval. Each
input configured for event logging or SNMP traps is polled with this
interval.
<refresh-interval> The refresh interval is in the range of 1..10
seconds. Default: 1.
log-event
This command enables or disables the event logging of input status
changes for one or all digital inputs. Default: disable.
The input state will be checked according to the interval set with IO-
<refresh-interval>.
all Configure the IO-Module event logging for all digital inputs.
<slot/input> Configure the IO-Module event logging for a single
digital input.
disable Disable event logging for digital input status changes.
enable Enable event logging for digital input status changes.
snmp-trap
This command enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps in
case of input status changes for one or all digital inputs. Default:
disable.
The trap will be sent to all SNMP trap receivers configured with
snmptrap.
The input state will be checked according to the interval set with IO-
<refresh-interval>.
all Configure the IO-Module SNMP trap for all digital inputs.
<slot/input> Configure the IO-Module SNMP trap for a single
digital input.
disable Disable SNMP traps for digital input status changes.
enable Enable SNMP traps for digital input status changes.
CLI L2P
108 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.14 digital-output
This command configures the IO-Module digital outputs.
Format
digital-output
admin-state {enable | disable}
refresh-interval <refresh-interval>
retry-count <refresh-interval>
log-event {all | <slot/output>} {enable|disable}
snmp-trap {all | <slot/output>} {enable|disable}
mirror all | <slot>/<output> {disable |
from <IPaddress> <slot>/<input>}
Mode
Global Config
admin-state
This command enables or disables the polling task for digital outputs
of the MICE IO-Module. When disabled, no event logging or SNMP
traps will work. Default: disable.
disable Disable the IO-Module digital outputs admin state.
enable Enable the IO-Module digital outputs admin state.
refresh-interval
This command configures the IO-Module digital outputs refresh
interval. Each output configured for input mirroring is refreshed (input
is polled) with this interval.
retry-count
This command configures the number of retry counts for setting digi-
tal outputs of the MICE IO-Module. Each output configured for input
mirroring is set to the default value (low) when after the number of
configured retries no SNMP get request was answered.
log-event
This command enables or disables the event logging of output status
changes for one or all digital outputs. Default: disable.
The output state will be checked according to the interval set with IO-
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 109
<refresh-interval>.
Configure the IO-Module event logging for one or all digital outputs.
all Configure the IO-Module event logging for all digital outputs.
<slot/output> Configure the IO-Module event logging for a
single digital output.
disable Disable event logging for digital output status changes.
enable Enable event logging for digital output status changes.
snmp-trap
This command enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps in
case of output status changes for one or all digital outputs. Default:
disable.
The trap will be sent to all SNMP trap receivers configured with
snmptrap.
The output state will be checked according to the interval set with IO-
<refresh-interval>.
all Configure the IO-Module SNMP trap for all digital outputs.
<slot/output> Configure the IO-Module SNMP trap for a single
digital output.
disable Disable SNMP traps for digital output status changes.
enable Enable SNMP traps for digital output status changes.
CLI L2P
110 Release 8.0 05/2013
mirror
Configure the IO-Module mirroring for one or all digital outputs.
This command determines the input mirrored to the currently selected
output.
To disable mirroring, the following commands are equivalent:
digital-output mirror 1/2 disable
digital-output mirror 1/2 from 0.0.0.0 1/1
<all>: Configure the IO-Module mirroring for all digital outputs.
<slot/output>: Configure the IO-Module mirroring for a single
digital output. The <slot> value determines the IO-module slot
number on the device with the selected IP address.
disable: Disable the IO-Module mirroring for a single digital
output.
from: Enable the IO-Module mirroring for a single digital output from
<IP-address> <slot/input>
<IPaddress>: The IP address value detemines the IP address
used for reading the input value. Use IP address 127.0.0.1 or the sys-
tem IP address to mirror inputs from a local IO module. When IP
address is 0.0.0.0 no input is mirrored to the output (the output value
is set to 'low'). Default: 0.0.0.0.
<slot/input>: The <input> value determines the input number on
this device. Default: 1/1.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 111
4.6.15 show digital-input

This command shows the input value or configuration from all available
digital inputs of the MICE I/O Module.
Format
show digital-input
Mode
Global Config
Digital Input System Information:

Admin State
Show the IO-Module digital inputs Admin State.
Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
Refresh Interval [s]
Show the IO-Module digital inputs Refresh Interval in seconds.
Value range: 1-10.
Digital Input Information:

Input
Show numbers of the IO-Module digital input.
Possible values (example): 1/1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4,
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
Value
Show the value of the IO-Module digital inputs.
Possible values: Not available, High, Low.
Log-Event
Show if Event logging is enabled or disabled for the IO-Module digital
inputs.
SNMP-trap
Show if SNMP traps are enabled or disabled for the IO-Module digital
inputs.
CLI L2P
112 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.16 show digital-input config

This command shows the IO-Module digital inputs global configuration.
Format
show digital-input config
Mode
Global Config
Digital Input System Information:

Admin State
Show the IO-Module digital inputs Admin State.
Show the IO-Module digital inputs Refresh Interval in seconds.
Value range: 1-10.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 113
4.6.17 show digital-input all

This command shows the IO-Module value or configuration for all inputs.
Format
show digital-input all {all | config | value}
Mode
Global Config
all
Show the IO-Module configuration and value for all inputs
config
Show the IO-Module configuration for all inputs.
value
Show the IO-Module value for all inputs.
Digital Input Information:

Input
Show numbers of the IO-Module digital input.
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
Value
Show the value of the IO-Module digital inputs.
Log-Event
inputs. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
SNMP-trap
inputs. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
CLI L2P
114 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.18 show digital-input <slot/input>

This command shows the IO-Module value or configuration for a single input.
Format
show digital-input <slot/input>
{all | config | value}
Mode
Global Config
all
Show the IO-Module configuration and value for one input.
config
Show the IO-Module configuration for one input.
value
Show the IO-Module value for one input.
Digital Input <slot/input> Value

Show the value of the IO-Module digital input.
Digital Input <slot/input> Log-Event
input. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
Digital Input <slot/input> SNMP-trap
input. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 115
4.6.19 show digital-output

This command shows the output value or configuration from all available
digital outputs of the MICE I/O Module.
Format
show digital-output
Mode
Global Config
Digital output System Information:

Admin State
Show the IO-Module digital outputs Admin State.
Show the IO-Module digital outputs Refresh Interval in seconds.
Value range: 1-10.
Retry Count
Show the value of the IO-Module digital outputs Retry count.
Value range: 1-10.
Digital output Information:

Output
Show numbers of the IO-Module digital output.
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
Value
Show the value of the IO-Module digital outputs.
Log-Event
outputs.
SNMP-trap
outputs.
CLI L2P
116 Release 8.0 05/2013
Mirror from IP
Show the IP address used for reading the input value.
Possible values: None, a.b.c.d (valid IP address).
Input
Show the input number of the device used for reading the input value.
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
4.6.20 show digital-output config

This command shows the IO-Module digital outputs global configuration.
Format
show digital-output config
Mode
Global Config
Digital output System Information:

Admin State
Show the IO-Module digital outputs Admin State.
Show the IO-Module digital outputs Refresh Interval in seconds.
Value range: 1-10.
Retry Count
Show the value of the IO-Module digital outputs Retry count.
Value range: 1-10.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 117
4.6.21 show digital-output all

This command shows the IO-Module value or configuration for all outputs.
Format
show digital-output all {all | config | value}
Mode
Global Config
all
Show the IO-Module configuration and value for all outputs
config
Show the IO-Module configuration for all outputs.
value
Show the IO-Module value for all outputs.
Digital output Information:

output
Show numbers of the IO-Module digital output.
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
Value
Show the value of the IO-Module digital outputs.
Log-Event
outputs. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
SNMP-trap
outputs. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
Mirror from IP
Possible values: None, a.b.c.d (valid IP address).
Input
Show the input number of the device used for reading the input value.
3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 3/4
CLI L2P
118 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.22 show digital-output <slot/output>

This command shows the IO-Module value or configuration for a single out-
put.
Format
show digital-output <slot/output>
{all | config | value}
Mode
Global Config
all
Show the IO-Module configuration and value for one output.
config
Show the IO-Module configuration for one output.
value
Show the IO-Module value for one output.
Digital output <slot/output> Value

Show the value of the IO-Module digital output.
Possible values: Not available, High, Low, Invalid.
Digital output <slot/output> Log-Event
output. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
Digital output <slot/output> SNMP-trap
output. Possible values: Disabled, Enabled.
Digital Output <slot/output> Mirror from IP
Possible values: Not configured, a.b.c.d (valid IP address).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 119
4.6.23 ethernet-ip
This command controls the EtherNet/IP function on the switch.
Detailed information you can find in the User Manual Industrial Protocols.
Default
depends on the order code (standard = disable)
Format
ethernet-ip admin-state {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
Admin-state
disable: Disables the EtherNet/IP function on this device.
Note: The relevant MIB objects are still accessible.
enable: Enables the EtherNet/IP function on this device.
CLI L2P
120 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.24 iec61850-mms
Note: This command is available for the RSR20/RSR30 and MACH1000

devices.
This command is used to configure the IEC61850 MMS server functionality
on this device.
Default
disable
Format
iec61850-mms { admin-state {enable | disable} |
write-access {enable | disable} }
Mode
Global Config
Admin-state
Disable: Disables the IEC61850 MMS Server functionality on
this device. This is the default.
Enable: Enables the IEC61850 MMS Server functionality on this
device.
Write-access
Disable: Disables the write-access of the IEC61850 MMS Server
on this device.This is the default.
Enable: Enables the write-access of the IEC61850 MMS Server on
this device.
Note: Write-Access via the IEC61850 MMS Server will be non
authenticated. This could be a possible security risk.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 121
4.6.25 show iec61850-mms
Note: This command is available for the RSR20/RSR30 and MACH1000

devices.
This command is used to show the IEC61850 MMS server settings on this
device.
Default
disable
Format
show iec61850-mms
Mode
Global Config
IEC61850 MMS Server Admin State
Display the IEC61850 MMS Server Admin State.
Possible values: Enable, Disable
IEC61850 MMS Server Write-Access State
Show the IEC61850 MMS Server Write-Access State.
Possible values: Enable, Disable
CLI L2P
122 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.26 network javascriptmode

When the user accesses the switch’s graphical user interface (web-based in-
terface), the switch’s web server will deliver a HTML page that contains
JavaScript.
Default
enabled
Format
network javascriptmode
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no network javascriptmode
When the user accesses the switch’s graphical user interface (web-
based interface), the switch’s web server will deliver a HTML page that
contains no JavaScript.
Format
no network javascriptmode
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 123
4.6.27 network mgmt-access add

This command is used to configure the restricted management access
feature (RMA).
It creates a new empty entry at the <index> (if you enter the command with
parameter <index>) or at the next free index (if you enter the command
without parameter <index>).
Format
network mgmt-access add [index]
Mode
Global Config
[index]
Index of the entry in the range 1..16.
4.6.28 network mgmt-access delete

feature (RMA).
It deletes an existing entry with <index>.
Format
network mgmt-access delete <index>
Mode
Global Config
<index>
CLI L2P
124 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.29 network mgmt-access modify

feature (RMA).
The command modifies an existing rule with <index> to change IP address,
net mask and allowed services.
Format
network mgmt-access modify <index>
{ ip <address> |
mask <netmask> |
http {enable | disable} |
snmp {enable | disable} |
telnet {enable | disable} |
ssh {enable |disable } }
Mode
Global Config
<index>
<ip>
Configure IP address which should have access to management
<mask>
Configure network mask to allow a subnet for management access.
<http>
Configure if HTTP is allowed to have management access.
<snmp>
Configure if SNMP is allowed to have management access.
<telnet>
Configure if TELNET is allowed to have management access.
<ssh>
Configure if SSH is allowed to have management access.
enable
Allow the service to have management access.
disable
Do not allow the service to have management access.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 125
4.6.30 network mgmt-access operation

feature (RMA).
It enables or disables the service to have management
access. The default value is disable.
Format
network mgmt-access operation {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
enable
Enable the restricted management access function globally.
disable
Disable the restricted management access function globally.
4.6.31 network mgmt-access status

feature (RMA).
It activates/deactivates an existing rule with <index>.
Format
network mgmt-access status <index>
{enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
<index>
enable
Allow the service to have management access.
disable
Do not allow the service to have management access.
CLI L2P
126 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.32 network parms

This command sets the IP Address, subnet mask and gateway of the router.
The IP Address and the gateway must be on the same subnet.
Format
network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [gateway]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.6.33 network protocol

This command specifies the network configuration protocol to be used.
If you modify this value, change is effective immediately after you saved your
changes.
The parameter bootp indicates that the switch periodically sends requests
to a Bootstrap Protocol (BootP) server or a DHCP server until a response is
received.
none indicates that the switch should be manually configured with IP infor-
mation.
Independently of the BootP and DHCP settings, HiDiscovery can be

configured as an additional protocol.
Default
DHCP
Format
network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp | hidiscovery
{off | read-only | read-write}}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 127
4.6.34 network priority

This command configures the VLAN priority or the IP DSCP value for out-
going management packets. The <ipdscp> is specified as either an integer
from 0-63, or symbolically through one of the following keywords:
af11,af12,af13,af21,af22,af23,af31,af32,af33,af41,af42,af43,be,cs0, cs1,
cs2,cs3,cs4,cs5,cs6,cs7,ef.
Default
0 for both values
Format
network priority {dot1p-vlan <0-7> |
ip-dscp <ipdscp> }
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no network priority
This command sets the VLAN priority or the IP DSCP value for outgoing
management packets to default which means VLAN priority 0 or
IP DSCP value 0 (Best effort).
Format
no network priority {dot1p-vlan | ip-dscp }
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
128 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.35 profinetio
This command controls the PROFINET IO function on the switch.
Detailed information you can find in the User Manual Industrial Protocols.
Default
depends on the order code (standard = disable)
Format
profinetio admin-state {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
Admin-state
disable Disables the PROFINET IO function on this device.
enable Enables the PROFINET IO function on this device.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 129
4.6.36 serial timeout

This command specifies the maximum connect time (in minutes) without
console activity. A value of 0 indicates that a console can be connected in-
definitely. The time range is 0 to 160.
Default
5
Format
serial timeout <0-160>
Mode
Line Config
U no serial timeout
This command sets the maximum connect time without console activity
(in minutes) back to the default value.
Format
no serial timeout
Mode
Line Config
4.6.37 set prompt

This command changes the name of the prompt. The length of name may be
up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Format
set prompt <prompt string>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
130 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.38 show ethernet-ip

This command displays the admin state of the EtherNet/IP function.
Format
show ethernet-ip
Mode
4.6.39 show network

This command displays configuration settings associated with the switch's
network interface. The network interface is the logical interface used for in-
band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch's front panel ports.
The configuration parameters associated with the switch's network interface
do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is
switched or routed.
Format
show network
Mode
System IP Address
The IP address of the interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
The IP subnet mask for this interface. The factory default value is
0.0.0.0
Default Gateway
The default gateway for this IP interface. The factory default value is
0.0.0.0
Burned In MAC Address
The burned in MAC address used for in-band connectivity.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 131
Network Configuration Protocol (BootP/DHCP)

Indicates which network protocol is being used. The options are
bootp | dhcp | none.
DHCP Client ID (same as SNMP System Name)
Displays the DHCP Client ID.
Network Configuration Protocol HiDiscovery
Indicates in which way the HiDiscovery protocol is being used. The
options are off | read-only | read-write.
Management VLAN ID
Specifies the management VLAN ID.
Management VLAN Priority
Specifies the management VLAN Priority.
Management VLAN IP-DSCP Value
Specifies the management VLAN IP-DSCP value.
Java Script Mode
Specifies if the Switch will use Java Script to start the Management
Applet. The factory default is enabled.
CLI L2P
132 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.40 show network mgmt-access

This command displays the operating status and entries for restricted
management access (RMA).
Format
show network mgmt-access
Mode
Operation
Indicates whether the opeartion for RMA is enabled or not.
The options are Enabled | Disabled.
ID
Index of the entry for restricted management access (1 to max. 16).
IP Address
The IP address which should have access to management.
The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.
Netmask
The network mask to allow a subnet for management access.
The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.
HTTP
Indicates whether HTTP is allowed to have management access or
not. The options are Yes | No.
SNMP
Indicates whether SNMP is allowed to have management access or
TELNET
Indicates whether TELNETis allowed to have management access or
SSH
Indicates whether SSH is allowed to have management access or
Active
Indicates whether the feature is active or not. The options are
[x] | [ ].
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 133
4.6.41 show profinetio

This command displays the admin state of the PROFINET IO function.
Format
show profinetio
Mode
4.6.42 show serial

This command displays serial communication settings for the switch.
Format
show serial
Mode
Serial Port Login Timeout (minutes)
Specifies the time, in minutes, of inactivity on a Serial port connection,
after which the Switch will close the connection. Any numeric value
between 0 and 160 is allowed, the factory default is 5. A value of 0
disables the timeout.
CLI L2P
134 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.43 show snmp-access

This command displays SNMP access information related to global and
SNMP version settings. SNMPv3 is always enabled.
Format
show snmp-access
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 135
4.6.44 show snmpcommunity

This command displays SNMP community information. Six communities are
supported. You can add, change, or delete communities. The switch does
not have to be reset for changes to take effect.
The SNMP agent of the switch complies with SNMP Version 1 (for more
about the SNMP specification, see the SNMP RFCs). The SNMP agent
sends traps through TCP/IP to an external SNMP manager based on the
SNMP configuration (the trap receiver and other SNMP community
parameters).
Format
show snmpcommunity
Mode
Privileged EXEC
SNMP Community Name
The community string to which this entry grants access. A valid entry
is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters. Each
row of this table must contain a unique community name.
Client IP Address -
An IP address (or portion thereof) from which this device will accept
SNMP packets with the associated community. The requesting
entity's IP address is ANDed with the Subnet Mask before being com-
pared to the IP Address. Note that if the Subnet Mask is set to 0.0.0.0,
an IP Address of 0.0.0.0 matches all IP addresses. The default value
is 0.0.0.0
Client IP Mask -
A mask to be ANDed with the requesting entity's IP address before
comparison with IP Address. If the result matches with IP Address
then the address is an authenticated IP address. For example, if the
IP Address = 9.47.128.0 and the corresponding Subnet Mask =
255.255.255.0 a range of incoming IP addresses would match, i.e.
the incoming IP Address could equal 9.47.128.0 - 9.47.128.255. The
default value is 0.0.0.0
Access Mode
The access level for this community string.
Status
The status of this community access entry.
CLI L2P
136 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.45 show snmptrap

This command displays SNMP trap receivers. Trap messages are sent
across a network to an SNMP Network Manager. These messages alert the
manager to events occurring within the switch or on the network. Six trap re-
ceivers are simultaneously supported.
Format
show snmptrap
Mode
Privileged EXEC
SNMP Trap Name
The community string of the SNMP trap packet sent to the trap man-
ager. This may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters. This string is
case sensitive.
IP Address
The IP address to receive SNMP traps from this device. Enter four
numbers between 0 and 255 separated by periods.
Status
A pull down menu that indicates the receiver's status (enabled or dis-
abled) and allows the administrator/user to perform actions on this
user entry:
Enable - send traps to the receiver
Disable - do not send traps to the receiver.
Delete - remove the table entry.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 137
4.6.46 show telnet

This command displays outbound telnet settings.
Format
show telnet
Mode
Outbound Telnet Connection Login Timeout (minutes)
This object indicates the number of minutes a remote connection
session is allowed to remain inactive before being logged off. May be
specified as a number from 1 to 160. The factory default is 5.
Maximum Number of Outbound Telnet Sessions
This object indicates the number of simultaneous outbound connec-
tion sessions allowed. The factory default is 5.
Allow New Outbound Telnet Sessions
Indicates that new outbound telnet sessions will not be allowed when
set to no. The factory default value is yes.
CLI L2P
138 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.47 show telnetcon

This command displays inbound telnet settings.
Format
show telnetcon
Mode
Telnet Connection Login Timeout (minutes)
This object indicates the number of minutes a remote connection ses-
sion is allowed to remain inactive before being logged off. May be
specified as a number from 1 to 160. The factory default is 4.
Maximum Number of Remote Telnet Sessions
This object indicates the number of simultaneous remote connection
sessions allowed. The factory default is 2 (4 for version L2P).
Allow New Telnet Sessions
Indicates that new telnet sessions will not be allowed when set to no.
The factory default value is yes.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 139
4.6.48 show trapflags

This command displays trap conditions. Configure which traps the switch
should generate by enabling or disabling the trap condition. If a trap condition
is enabled and the condition is detected, the switch's SNMP agent sends the
trap to all enabled trap receivers. The switch does not have to be reset to im-
plement the changes. Cold and warm start traps are always generated and
cannot be disabled.
Format
show trapflags
Mode
Authentication Flag
May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled. Indicates
whether authentication failure traps will be sent.
Chassis
Indicates whether traps that are related to the chassis functionality of
the switch will be sent. These functions include the signal contacts,
the ACA, temperature limits exceeded, changes in the module map,
addition or removal of SFP modules, status of power supply has
changed and the LLDP and SNTP features. May be enabled or dis-
abled.
Default: enabled.
Layer 2 Redundancy
Indicates whether traps that are related to the layer 2 redundancy
features of the switch will be sent. The HiPER-Ring and the
Redundant Coupling will tell you with these traps when the main line
has become inoperative or returned. May be enabled or disabled.
Default: enabled.
Link Up/Down Flag
whether link status traps will be sent.
Multiple Users Flag
whether a trap will be sent when the same user ID is logged into the
switch more than once at the same time (either via telnet or serial
port).
CLI L2P
140 Release 8.0 05/2013
Port Security (MAC, IP and 802.1X)

Enable/disable sending port security event traps (for MAC/IP port
security as well as for 802.1X).
Spanning Tree Flag
whether spanning tree traps will be sent.
4.6.49 snmp-access global

This command configures the global SNMP access setting (for all SNMP
versions).
Format
snmp-access global {disable|enable|read-only}
Mode
Global Config
disable
Disable SNMP access to this switch, regardless of the SNMP version
used.
enable
Enable SNMP read and write access to this switch, regardless of the
SNMP version used.
read-only
Enable SNMP read-only access to this switch (disable write access),
regardless of the SNMP version used.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 141
4.6.50 snmp-access version

This command configures the SNMP version specific access mode for
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2.
Format
snmp-access version {all|v1|v2} {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
all
Enable or disable SNMP access by all protocol versions (v1 and v2).
v1
Enable or disable SNMP access by v1.
v2
Enable or disable SNMP access by v2.
CLI L2P
142 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.51 snmp-access version v3-encryption

Use this command to activate/deactivate SNMPv3 data encryption.
Format
snmp-access version v3-encryption
{readonly | readwrite} {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
disable
Disable SNMP access to this switch by SNMPv3 protocol version.
enable
Enable SNMP read and write access to this switch by SNMPv3
protocol version.
readonly
Enable SNMP read-only access to this switch (disable write access)
by SNMPv33 protocol version.
readwrite
Enable SNMP read-write access to this switch (enable write access)
by SNMPv3 protocol version.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 143
4.6.52 snmp-server
This command sets the name and the physical location of the switch, and the
organization responsible for the network.The range for name, location and
contact is from 0 to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Default
None
Format
snmp-server
{community <name> |
ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> |
ipmask <ipmask> <name> |
mode <name> |
ro <name> |
rw <name> |
contact <con> |
enable traps { chassis | l2redundancy |
linkmode | multiusers | port-sec | stpmode }
location <loc> |
sysname <name> }
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
144 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.53 snmp-server community

This command adds a new SNMP community name. A community name is
a name associated with the switch and with a set of SNMP managers that
manage it with a specified privileged level. The length of name can be up to
32 case-sensitive characters.
Note: Community names in the SNMP community table must be unique.

When making multiple entries using the same community name, the first
entry is kept and processed and all duplicate entries are ignored.
Default
Two default community names: Public and Private. You can replace
these default community names with unique identifiers for each com-
munity. The default values for the remaining four community names
are blank.
Format
snmp-server community <name>
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server community
This command removes this community name from the table. The name
is the community name to be deleted.
Format
no snmp-server community <name>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 145
4.6.54 snmp-server contact

This command adds a new SNMP server contact.
Format
snmp-server contact <con>
Mode
Global Config
con
Enter system contact up to 63 characters in length.
If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks (").
U no snmp-server contact
This command removes this SNMP server contact from the table.
<con> is the SNMP server contact to be deleted.
Format
no snmp-server contact <con>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
146 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.55 snmp-server community ipaddr

This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community. The ad-
dress is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is
used along with the client IP mask value to denote a range of IP addresses
from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A
value of 0.0.0.0 allows access from any IP address. Otherwise, this value is
ANDed with the mask to determine the range of allowed client IP addresses.
The name is the applicable community name.
Default
0.0.0.0
Format
snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server community ipaddr

This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community to
0.0.0.0. The name is the applicable community name.
Format
no snmp-server community ipaddr <name>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 147
4.6.56 snmp-server community ipmask

This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community. The address
is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used
along with the client IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from
which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A value
of 255.255.255.255 will allow access from only one station, and will use that
machine's IP address for the client IP Address. A value of 0.0.0.0 will allow
access from any IP address. The name is the applicable community name.
Default
0.0.0.0
Format
snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server community ipmask

This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community to 0.0.0.0.
The name is the applicable community name. The community name may
be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Format
no snmp-server community ipmask <name>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
148 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.57 snmp-server community mode

This command activates an SNMP community. If a community is enabled, an
SNMP manager associated with this community manages the switch accord-
ing to its access right. If the community is disabled, no SNMP requests using
this community are accepted. In this case the SNMP manager associated
with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed
back to Enable.
Default
The default private and public communities are enabled by default.
The four undefined communities are disabled by default.
Format
snmp-server community mode <name>
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server community mode

This command deactivates an SNMP community. If the community is
disabled, no SNMP requests using this community are accepted. In this
case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot
manage the switch until the Status is changed back to Enable.
Format
no snmp-server community mode <name>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 149
4.6.58 snmp-server community ro

This command restricts access to switch information. The access mode is
read-only (also called public).
Format
snmp-server community ro <name>
Mode
Global Config
4.6.59 snmp-server community rw

This command restricts access to switch information. The access mode is
read/write (also called private).
Format
snmp-server community rw <name>
Mode
Global Config
4.6.60 snmp-server location

This command configures the system location.
Format
snmp-server location <system location>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
150 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.61 snmp-server sysname

This command configures the system name.
Format
snmp-server sysname <system name>
Mode
Global Config
4.6.62 snmp-server enable traps

This command enables the Authentication Trap Flag.
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps

This command disables the Authentication Trap Flag.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 151
4.6.63 snmp-server enable traps chassis

Configures whether traps that are related to the chassis functionality of the
switch will be sent. These functions include the signal contacts, the ACA,
temperature limits exceeded, changes in the module map, addition or
removal of SFP modules, status of power supply has changed and the LLDP
and SNTP features. May be enabled or disabled.
Default: enabled.
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps chassis
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps chassis

This command disables chassis traps for the entire switch.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps chassis
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
152 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.64 snmp-server enable traps l2redundancy

Indicates whether traps that are related to the layer 2 redundancy features of
the switch will be sent. The HiPER-Ring and the Redundant Coupling will tell
you with these traps when the main line has become inoperative or returned.
May be enabled or disabled.
Default: enabled.
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps l2redundancy
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps l2redundancy

This command disables layer 2 redundancy traps for the entire switch.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps l2redundancy
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 153
4.6.65 snmp-server enable traps linkmode

This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch. When en-
abled, link traps are sent only if the Link Trap flag setting associated with the
port is enabled (see ‘snmp trap link-status’ command).
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps linkmode
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps linkmode

This command disables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps linkmode
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
154 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.66 snmp-server enable traps multiusers

This command enables Multiple User traps. When the traps are enabled, a
Multiple User Trap is sent when a user logs in to the terminal interface (EIA
232 (serial port) or telnet) and there is an existing terminal interface session.
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps multiusers
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps multiusers

This command disables Multiple User traps.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps multiusers
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 155
4.6.67 snmp-server enable traps port-sec

This command enables port security traps. When the traps are enabled, a
Port Security Trap is sent if a port security event occurs
(applies to MAC/IP Port Security as well as to 802.1X Port Security).
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps port-sec
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps port-sec

This command disables Port Security traps.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps port-sec
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
156 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.68 snmp-server enable traps stpmode

This command enables the sending of new root traps and topology change
notification traps.
Default
enabled
Format
snmp-server enable traps stpmode
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp-server enable traps stpmode

This command disables the sending of new root traps and topology
change notification traps.
Format
no snmp-server enable traps stpmode
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 157
4.6.69 snmptrap
This command adds an SNMP trap name. The maximum length of name is
32 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters.
Default
The default name for the six undefined community names is Delete.
Format
snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> [snmpversion snmpv1]
Mode
Global Config
U no snmptrap
This command deletes trap receivers for a community.
Format
no snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
158 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.70 snmptrap ipaddr

This command assigns an IP address to a specified community name. The
maximum length of name is 32 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters.
Note: IP addresses in the SNMP trap receiver table must be unique. If you
make multiple entries using the same IP address, the first entry is retained
and processed. All duplicate entries are ignored.
Format
snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddr> <ipaddrnew>
Mode
Global Config
ipaddr
Enter the old IP Address.
ipaddrnew
Enter the new IP Address.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 159
4.6.71 snmptrap mode

This command activates or deactivates an SNMP trap. Enabled trap receiv-
ers are active (able to receive traps). Disabled trap receivers are inactive (not
able to receive traps).
Format
snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
U no snmptrap mode
This command deactivates an SNMP trap. Disabled trap receivers are
inactive (not able to receive traps).
Format
no snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
160 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.72 snmptrap snmpversion

This command configures SNMP trap version for a specified community.
Format
snmptrap snmpversion <name> <ipAddr>
{snmpv1 | snmpv2}
Mode
Global Config
name
Enter the community name.
ipAaddr
Enter the IP Address.
snmpv1
Use SNMP v1 to send traps.
snmpv2
Use SNMP v2 to send traps.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 161
4.6.73 telnetcon maxsessions

Configure the number of remote telnet connections allowed.
Default
5
Format
telnetcon maxsessions <0-5>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no telnetcon maxsessions
This command sets the maximum number of telnet connection sessions
that can be established to the default value.
Format
no telnetcon maxsessions
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
162 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.6.74 telnetcon timeout

This command sets the telnet connection session timeout value, in minutes.
A session is active as long as the session has not been idle for the value set.
The time is a decimal value from 1 to 160.
Default
5
Format
telnetcon timeout <1-160>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no telnetcon timeout
This command sets the telnet connection session timeout value to the
default.
Changing the timeout value for active sessions does not become effec-
tive until the session is reaccessed. Also, any keystroke activates the
new timeout duration.
Format
no telnetcon timeout
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 163
CLI Commands: Base 4.7 Syslog Commands
4.7 Syslog Commands
This section provides a detailed explanation of the Syslog commands. The

commands are divided into two functional groups:
D Show commands display spanning tree settings, statistics, and other in-
formation.
D Configuration Commands configure features and options of the device.
For every configuration command there is a show command that displays
4.7.1 logging buffered

This command enables logging to an in-memory log where up to 128 logs are
kept.
Default
enabled
Format
logging buffered
Mode
Global Config
U no logging buffered
This command disables logging to in-memory log.
Format
no logging buffered
CLI L2P
164 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.7.2 logging buffered wrap

This command enables wrapping of in-memory logging when full capacity
reached. Otherwise when full capacity is reached, logging stops.
Default
wrap
Format
logging buffered wrap
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no logging buffered wrap

This command disables wrapping of in-memory logging and
configures logging to stop when capacity is full.
Format
no logging buffered wrap
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 165
4.7.3 logging cli-command

This command enables the CLI command Logging feature. The Command
Logging component enables the switch software to log all Command Line
Interface (CLI) commands issued on the system.
Default
disabled
Format
logging cli-command
Mode
Global Config
U no logging cli-command
This command disables the CLI command Logging feature.
Format
no logging cli-command
CLI L2P
166 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.7.4 logging console

This command enables logging to the console. The <severitylevel> value is
specified as either an integer from 0 to 7 or symbolically through one of the
following keywords: emergency (0), alert (1), critical (2), error (3), warning
(4), notice (5), informational (6), debug (7).
Default
disabled; alert
Format
logging console [severitylevel] | <[0-7]>
Mode
Global Config
severitylevel | [0-7]
Enter Logging Severity Level (emergency|0, alert|1, critical|2, error|3,
warning|4, notice|5, info|6, debug|7).
Note: Selecting a lower severity level (larger number) will include all
messages from higher severity levels (smaller numbers).
Possible severity levels: see Table 15
U no logging console
This command disables logging to the console.
Format
no logging console
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 167
4.7.5 logging host

This command enables logging to a host where up to eight hosts can be
configured.
Default
Port - 514; Level - Critical;
Format
logging host <hostaddress>
[<port> [<severitylevel>]]
Mode
Global Config
Severity number Severity name Meaning

0 emergency Minimum severity to be logged is 0. This is the
highest level and will result in all other messages of
lower levels not being logged.
1 alert Minimum severity to be logged is 1.
2 critical Minimum severity to be logged is 2.
3 error Minimum severity to be logged is 3.
4 warning Minimum severity to be logged is 4.
5 notice Minimum severity to be logged is 5.
6 info Minimum severity to be logged is 6.
7 debug Minimum severity to be logged is 7. This is the lowest
level and will result in messages of all levels being
logged.
Tab. 15: Possible severity levels
CLI L2P
168 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.7.6 logging host reconfigure

The Logging Host Index for which to change the IP Address.
Format
logging host reconfigure <hostindex> <hostaddress>
Mode
Global Config
4.7.7 logging host remove

The Logging Host Index to be removed.
Format
logging host remove <hostindex>
Mode
Global Config
4.7.8 logging snmp-requests get operation

This command enables or disables the logging of SNMP GET requests.
Default
Disabled
Format
logging snmp-requests get operation
{ enable | disable }
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 169
4.7.9 logging snmp-requests set operation

This command enables or disables the logging of SNMP SET requests.
Default
Disabled
Format
logging snmp-requests set operation
{ enable | disable }
Mode
Global Config
4.7.10 logging snmp-requests get severity

With this command you can define the severity level of logging SNMP GET
requests.
Default
Disabled
Format
logging snmp-requests get severity <level|[0-7]>
Mode
Global Config
level | [0-7]
CLI L2P
170 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.7.11 logging snmp-requests set severity

With this command you can define the severity level of logging SNMP SET
requests.
Default
Disabled
Format
logging snmp-requests set severity <level|[0-7]>
Mode
Global Config
level | [0-7]
4.7.12 logging syslog

This command enables syslog logging.
Default
disabled
Format
logging syslog
Mode
Global Config
U no logging syslog
This command disables syslog logging.
Format
no logging syslog
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 171
4.7.13 logging syslog port

Enter the port number of the syslog server.
Default
514
Format
logging syslog port <portid>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
172 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Base 4.8 Scripting Commands
4.8 Scripting Commands
Configuration Scripting allows the user to generate text-formatted script files

representing the current configuration. These configuration script files can be
uploaded to a PC and edited, downloaded to the system and applied to the
system. Configuration scripts can be applied to one or more switches with no/
minor modifications.
Use the show running-config command to capture the running configuration

into a script. Use the copy command to transfer the configuration script to and
from the switch.
Scripts are intended to be used on systems with default configuration but

users are not prevented from applying scripts on systems with non-default
configurations.
Note:
D The file extension must be “.cli”.
D A maximum of ten scripts are allowed on the switch.
D The combined size of all script files on the switch shall not exceed
1024 KB.
4.8.1 script apply

This command applies the commands in the script to the switch. We recom-
mend that the system have default configurations but users are not prevent-
ed from applying scripts on systems with non-default configurations. The
<scriptname> parameter is the name of the script to apply.
Format
script apply <scriptname>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 173
4.8.2 script delete

This command deletes a specified script where the <scriptname> parameter
is the name of the script to be deleted. The ‘all’ option deletes all the scripts
present on the switch.
Format
script delete {<scriptname> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.8.3 script list

This command lists all scripts present on the switch as well as the remaining
available space.
Format
script list [aca]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Configuration Script
Name of the script.
Without the optional ACA parameter: Listing of the scripts in the
switch´s flash memory.
With the optional ACA parameter: Listing of the scripts on the external
ACA 21-USB.
Size
Size of the script.
CLI L2P
174 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.8.4 script show

This command displays the contents of a script file. The parameter <script-
name> is the name of the script file.
Format
script show <scriptname>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
The format of display is

Line <no>: <Line contents>
4.8.5 script validate

This command validates a script file by parsing each line in the script file
where <scriptname> is the name of the script to validate.The validate option
is intended to be used as a tool for script development.
Validation identifies potential problems. It may or may not identify all prob-
lems with a given script on any given device.
Format
script validate <scriptname>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 175
CLI L2P
176 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9 Device Configuration Commands
4.9 Device Configuration

Commands
4.9.1 addport
This command adds one port to the Link Aggregation (LAG). The given inter-
face is a logical slot and port number of a configured Link Aggregation.
Note: Before adding a port to a Link Aggregation, set the physical mode of
the port. See ‘speed’ command.
Format
addport <logical slot/port>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 177
4.9.2 adminmode
This command enables the whole Link Aggregation as one single port.
Note: Before adding a port to a Link Aggregation, set the physical mode of
the port. See ‘speed’ command.
Format
adminmode
Mode
Interface Config
U no adminmode
This command disables the whole Link Aggregation as one single port.
Format
no adminmode
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
178 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.3 auto-disable reason

This command enables the port disabling on this device by reason.
Default
Disabled
Format
auto-disable reason
{link-flap | crc-error | overload-detection}
Mode
Global Config
link-flap
Enable the port disabling on this device by link flap.
crc-error
Enable the port disabling on this device by CRC error.
overload-detection
Enable the port disabling on this device by overload detection.
U no auto-disable reason
This command disables the port disabling on this device by reason.
Default
Disabled
Format
no auto-disable reason
{link-flap | crc-error | overload-detection}
Mode
Global Config
link-flap
Disable the port disabling on this device by link flap.
crc-error
Disable the port disabling on this device by CRC error.
overload-detection
Disable the port disabling on this device by overload detection.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 179
4.9.4 auto-disable timer

This command defines the time after which a deactivated port is activated
again.
Default
0
Format
auto-disable timer {0 | 30..2147483}
Mode
Interface Config
{0 | 30..2147483}
Timer value in seconds after a deactivated port is activated again.
Possible values:
0 The value 0 disables the timer.
30..2147483.
CLI L2P
180 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.5 auto-negotiate
This command enables automatic negotiation on a port. The default value is
enable.
Format
auto-negotiate
Mode
Interface Config
U no auto-negotiate
This command disables automatic negotiation on a port.
Format
no auto-negotiate
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 181
4.9.6 auto-negotiate all

This command enables automatic negotiation on all ports.
The default value is enable.
Format
auto-negotiate all
Mode
Global Config
U no auto-negotiate all
This command disables automatic negotiation on all ports.
Format
no auto-negotiate all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
182 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.7 cable-crossing
Note: This function is available for the RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30,

RSR20/RSR30, MACH1000, PowerMICE and OCTOPUS devices.
Use this command to enable or disable the cable crossing function.
Note: The cable-crossing settings become effective for a certain port, if

auto-negotiate is disabled for this port.
The cable-crossing settings are irrelevant for a certain port, if
auto-negotiate is enabled for this port.
Format
cable-crossing {enable|disable}
Mode
Interface Config
cable-crossing enable
The device swaps the port output and port input of the TP port.
cable-crossing disable
The device does not swap the port output and port input of the TP
port.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 183
4.9.8 media-module
Use this command to logically configure media modules.
Default
media-module enable all
Format
media-module { remove <1-7> |
enable { <1-7> | all } |
disable { <1-7> | all } }
Mode
Global Config
remove
Logically remove a media-module that has already been physically
removed.
<1-7>
Enter the number of a media module that has already been physically
removed but is logically still present in the configuration.
enable
Enable a media-module slot.
<1-7>
Enter the number of the media module to be enabled.
all
Enable all media modules on the device.
disable
Disable a media-module slot.
<1-7>
Enter the number of the media module to be disabled.
all
Disable all media modules on the device.
CLI L2P
184 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.9 deleteport
This command deletes the port from the link-aggregation (LAG). The inter-
face is a logical slot and port number of a configured link aggregation.
Note: This command has to be issued in the member port's interface config
mode.
Format
deleteport <logical slot/port>
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.10 deleteport all

This command deletes all configured ports from the link-aggregation (LAG).
The interface is a logical slot and port number of a configured link-
aggregation.
Format
deleteport <logical slot/port> all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 185
4.9.11 dip-switch operation
Note: This command is available for the MICE, PowerMICE and RS20/
RS30/RS40 devices.
Use this command to enable/disable the DIP switch configuration.

Default
disabled
Format
dip-switch operation { enable | disable }
Mode
Global Config
enable
Enable the DIP switch configuration.
disable
Disable the DIP switch configuration.
The device ignores DIP switch settings.
CLI L2P
186 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.12 macfilter
This command adds a static MAC filter entry for the MAC address <macad-
dr> on the VLAN <vlanid>. The <macaddr> parameter must be specified as
a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.
The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00, 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to

01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN (1 to 4042) .
Up to 100 static MAC filters may be created.

Format
macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>
Mode
Global Config
U no macfilter
This command removes all filtering restrictions and the static MAC filter
entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the VLAN <vlanid>. The
<macaddr> parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal num-
ber in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.
The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN (1 to 4042).

Format
no macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 187
4.9.13 macfilter adddest

This command adds the interface to the destination filter set for the MAC filter
with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. The <macaddr> parameter
must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of
b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.
The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN (1-4042).
Format
macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>
Mode
Interface Config
U no macfilter adddest
This command removes a port from the destination filter set for the MAC
filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. The <macaddr>
parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the for-
mat of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.
The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN (1-4042).

Format
no macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
188 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.14 macfilter adddest all

This command adds all interfaces to the destination filter set for the MAC filter
with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. The <macaddr> parameter
must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of
b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.

Format
macfilter adddest {all | <macaddr> <vlanid>}
Mode
Global Config
U no macfilter adddest all

This command removes all ports from the destination filter set for the
MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. The
<macaddr> parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal num-
ber in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.

Format
no macfilter adddest [all | <macaddr> <vlanid>}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 189
4.9.15 mac notification (Global Config)

Use this command to change the settings for MAC address change notifica-
tion globally on the device. This command enables the sending of MAC noti-
fication traps or sets the MAC notification interval in seconds.
Format
mac notification {operation |
interval <0..2147483647> }
Mode
Global Config
operation
Enable sending of MAC notification traps.
interval
Set the MAC notification interval.
<0..2147483647>
MAC notification interval in seconds.
U no mac notification operation

This command disables sending of MAC notification traps globally.
Format
no mac notification operation
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
190 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.16 mac notification (Interface Config)

Use this command to change the settings for MAC address change notifica-
tion for one port. This command enables MAC notification for this port or sets
the mode for which action the device sends a MAC notification.
Format
mac notification {operation |
mode { add | remove | all } }
Mode
Interface Config
operation
Enable sending of MAC notification traps.
mode
Set the mode for which action the device sends a MAC notification.
add
The device sends MAC notification traps when entries are added to
the FDB.
remove
The device sends MAC notification traps when entries are removed
from the FDB.
all
The device sends MAC notification traps when entries are changed in
the FDB.
U no mac notification operation

This command disables sending of MAC notification traps for this port.
Format
no mac notification operation
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 191
4.9.17 monitor session <session-id>

This command configures a probe port and a monitored port for monitor ses-
sion (port monitoring). The first slot/port is the source monitored port and the
second slot/port is the destination probe port. If this command is executed
while port monitoring is enabled, it will have the effect of changing the probe
and monitored port values.
Format
monitor session <session-id>
[ mode |
source interface <slot/port>
[direction { rx | tx | tx/rx } ] |
destination interface <slot/port> ]
Mode
Global Config
session-id
Session number (currently, session number 1 is supported).
mode
Enable/Disable port mirroring session.
Note: does not affect the source or destination interfaces.
source interface <slot/port>

Configure the source interface (in slot/port notation).
direction
Configure the direction of the interface.´
rx
Configure the direction of the interface as rx (receive).
tx
Configure the direction of the interface as tx (transmit).
rx/tx
Configure the direction of the interface as rx/tx (receive and transmit).
destination interface <slot/port>

Configure the probe interface (in slot/port notation).
CLI L2P
192 Release 8.0 05/2013
U no monitor session <session-id>

This command removes the monitor session (port monitoring) designa-
tion from both the source probe port and the destination monitored port
and removes the probe port from all VLANs. The port must be manually
re-added to any desired VLANs.
Format
no monitor session <session-id> [mode]
Mode
Global Config
session-id
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 193
4.9.18 monitor session <session-id> mode

This command configures the monitor session (port monitoring) mode to en-
able. The probe and monitored ports must be configured before monitor ses-
sion (port monitoring) can be enabled. If enabled, the probe port will monitor
all traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored port. It is not
necessary to disable port monitoring before modifying the probe and moni-
tored ports.
Default
disabled
Format
monitor session <session-id> mode
Mode
Global Config
session-id
U no monitor session <session-id> mode

This command sets the monitor session (port monitoring) mode to
disable.
Format
no monitor session <session-id> mode
Mode
Global Config
session-id
CLI L2P
194 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.19 monitor session <session-id> source/

destination
This command allows you to configure and activate the port mirroring func-
tion of the switch. Port mirroring is when the data traffic of a source port is
copied to a specified destination port. The data traffic at the source port is not
influenced by port mirroring. A management tool connected at the specified
port, e.g., an RMON probe, can thus monitor the data traffic of the source
port.
This command can be called multiple times with different ports to add more
than one source port to the session.
It is possible to add/remove ports to/from an active session.
Note:
- The device supports a maximum of one session.
- The maximum number of source ports is 8.
- Ports configured as mirror source or destination ports have to be physical
ports.
Note: In active port mirroring, the specified destination port is used solely for
observation purposes.
Default
none
Format
monitor session <session-id> {source | destination}
interface <slot/port>
Mode
Global Config
session-id
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 195
U no monitor session <session-id> source/destination

This command resets the monitor session (port monitoring) source/desti-
nation. The port will be removed from port mirroring
Format
no monitor session <session-id> {source | destina-
tion} interface
Mode
Global Config
session-id
4.9.20 link-aggregation
This command configures a new Link Aggregation (LAG) and generates a
logical slot/port number for the Link Aggregation. Display this number using
the “show link-aggregation”.
Note: Before including a port in a Link Aggregation, set the port physical
mode. See ‘speed’ command.
Format
link-aggregation <name>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
196 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.21 link-aggregation adminmode

This command enables a Link Aggregation (LAG). The interface is a logical
slot/port for a configured Link Aggregation. The option all sets every con-
figured Link Aggregation with the same administrative mode setting.
Format
link-aggregation adminmode all
Mode
Global Config
U no link-aggregation adminmode
This command disables a Link Aggregation (LAG). The interface is a log-
ical slot/port for a configured Link Aggregation. The option all sets
every configured Link Aggregation with the same administrative mode
setting.
Format
no link-aggregation adminmode all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 197
4.9.22 link-aggregation linktrap

This command enables link trap notifications for the link-aggregation (LAG).
The interface is a logical slot/port for a configured link-aggregation. The op-
tion all sets every configured link-aggregation with the same administrative
mode setting.
Default
enabled
Format
link-aggregation linktrap {<logical slot/port> |
all}
Mode
Global Config
U no link-aggregation linktrap
This command disables link trap notifications for the link-aggregation
(LAG). The interface is a logical unit, slot and port slot and port for a con-
figured link-aggregation. The option all sets every configured link-
aggregation with the same administrative mode setting.
Format
no link-aggregation linktrap {<logical slot/port> |
all]
Mode
GlobalConfig
CLI L2P
198 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.23 link-aggregation name

This command defines a name for the link-aggregation (LAG). The interface
is a logical slot/port for a configured link-aggregation, and name is an alpha-
numeric string up to 15 characters. This command is used to modify the
name that was associated with the link-aggregation when it was created.
Format
link-aggregation name {<logical slot/port> | all |
<name>}
Mode
Global Config
4.9.24 rmon-alarm add

This command adds an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm add <index>
[<mib-variable>
<rising-threshold>
<falling-threshold>]
Mode
Global Config
index
Enter the index of the RMON alarm.
mib-variable
Enter the MIB variable.
rising-threshold
Enter the rising threshold for the RMON alarm.
falling-threshold
Enter the falling threshold for the RMON alarm.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 199
4.9.25 rmon-alarm delete

This command deletes an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm delete <index>
Mode
Global Config
index
4.9.26 rmon-alarm enable

This command enables an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm enable <index>
Mode
Global Config
index
CLI L2P
200 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.27 rmon-alarm disable

This command disables an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm disable <index>
Mode
Global Config
index
4.9.28 rmon-alarm modify mib-variable

This command modifies the mib-variable of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> mib-variable <mib-variable>
Mode
Global Config
index
mib-variable
Enter the MIB variable.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 201
4.9.29 rmon-alarm modify thresholds

This command modifies the thresholds of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> thresholds
<rising-threshold>
<falling-threshold>
Mode
Global Config
index
rising-threshold
Enter the rising threshold for the RMON alarm.
falling-threshold
Enter the falling threshold for the RMON alarm.
4.9.30 rmon-alarm modify interval

This command modifies the interval of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> interval <interval>
Mode
Global Config
index
interval
Enter the interval for the RMON alarm.
CLI L2P
202 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.31 rmon-alarm modify sample-type

This command modifies the sample-type of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> sample-type {absolute|delta}
Mode
Global Config
index
absolute
Sample-type for RMON alarm is absolute.
delta
Sample-type for RMON alarm is delta.
4.9.32 rmon-alarm modify startup-alarm

This command modifies the startup-alarm of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> startup-alarm
{rising | falling | risingorfalling}
Mode
Global Config
index
rising
Start-up alarm if the value is rising.
falling
Start-up alarm if the value is falling.
risingorfalling
Start-up alarm if the value is rising or falling.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 203
4.9.33 rmon-alarm modify rising-event

This command modifies the rising-event of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> rising-event
<rising-event-index>
Mode
Global Config
index
rising-event-index
Enter the index for the rising event for the RMON
alarm.
4.9.34 rmon-alarm modify falling-event

This command modifies the falling-event of an RMON alarm.
Format
rmon-alarm modify <index> falling-event
<falling-event-index>
Mode
Global Config
index
falling-event-index
Enter the index for the falling event for the RMON
alarm.
CLI L2P
204 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.35 set garp timer join

This command sets the GVRP join time per port and per GARP. Join time is
the interval between the transmission of GARP Protocol Data Units (PDUs)
registering (or re-registering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group.
This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled. The time is from
10 to 100 (centiseconds). The value 20 centiseconds is 0.2 seconds.
Default
20
Format
set garp timer join <10-100>
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
U no set garp timer join

This command sets the GVRP join time per port and per GARP to 20
centiseconds (0.2 seconds). This command has an effect only when
GVRP is enabled.
Format
no set garp-timer join
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 205
4.9.36 set garp timer leave

This command sets the GVRP leave time per port. Leave time is the time to
wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or a multicast group be-
fore deleting the VLAN entry. This can be considered a buffer time for anoth-
er station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain
uninterrupted service.time is 20 to 600 (centiseconds). The value 60 centi-
seconds is 0.6 seconds.
Note: This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled.
Default
60
Format
set garp timer leave <20-600>
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
U no set garp timer leave

TThis command sets the GVRP leave time per port to 60 centiseconds
(0.6 seconds).

Format
no set garp timer leave
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
CLI L2P
206 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.37 set garp timer leaveall

This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated per port. A
Leave All PDU indicates that all registrations will be unregistered. Participants
would need to rejoin in order to maintain registration. The value applies per
port and per GARP participation. The time may range from 200 to 6000 (cen-
tiseconds). The value 1000 centiseconds is 10 seconds.
Default
1000
Format
set garp timer leaveall <200-6000>
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
U no set garp timer leaveall

This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated per
port to 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds).

Format
no set garp timer leaveall
Mode
Global Config
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 207
4.9.38 set gmrp adminmode

This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) on
the system. The default value is disable.
Format
set gmrp adminmode
Mode
Privileged EXEC and Global Config
U no set gmrp adminmode

This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
on the system.
Format
no set gmrp adminmode
Mode
Privileged EXEC and Global Config
CLI L2P
208 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.39 set gmrp interfacemode

This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a selected
interface. If an interface which has GARP enabled is enlisted as a member
of a Link Aggregation (LAG), GARP functionality will be disabled on that in-
terface. GARP functionality will subsequently be re-enabled if Link Aggrega-
tion (LAG) membership is removed from an interface that has GARP
enabled.
Default
enabled
Format
set gmrp interfacemode
Mode
Interface Config
U no set gmrp interfacemode

This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a
selected interface. If an interface which has GARP enabled is enlisted as
a member of a Link Aggregation (LAG), GARP functionality will be dis-
abled on that interface. GARP functionality will subsequently be re-
enabled if Link Aggregation (LAG) membership is removed from an inter-
face that has GARP enabled.
Format
no set gmrp interfacemode
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 209
4.9.40 set gmrp interfacemode

This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on all interfac-
es. If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlist-
ed as a member of a link-aggregation (LAG), GARP functionality will be
disabled on that interface. GARP functionality will subsequently be re-en-
abled if routing is disabled and link-aggregation (LAG) membership is re-
moved from an interface that has GARP enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
set gmrp interfacemode
Mode
Global Config
U no set gmrp interfacemode

This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a
selected interface.
Format
no set gmrp interfacemode
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
210 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.41 set gmrp forward-all-groups

This command enables the GMRP Multicast Registration Protocol feature
'Forward All Groups' for all ports.
Default
disabled
Format
set gmrp forward-all-groups
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
U no set gmrp forward-all-groups

This command disables the GMRP Multicast Registration Protocol fea-
ture 'Forward All Groups' for all ports.
Format
no set gmrp forward-all-groups
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 211
4.9.42 set gmrp forward-unknown
Note: This command is available for the devices of the MS20/MS30, RS20/
RS30/RS40, MACH102, MACH104, MACH1000, MACH1040, OCTOPUS,
RSR20/RSR30 family.
Use this command to configure if the device should forward unknown GMRP
multicast packets. The setting can be discard or flood. The default is flood.
Default
flood
Format
set gmrp forward-unknown {discard | flood}
Mode
Global Config
discard
The device discards unknown GMRP multicast packets.
flood
The device floods unknown GMRP multicast packets.
U no set gmrp forward-unknown

This command disables the GMRP Multicast Registration Protocol
feature 'Forward Unknown' for all ports.
Format
no set gmrp forward-unknown
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
212 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.43 set igmp

This command enables IGMP Snooping on the system. The default value is
disable.
Note: The IGMP snooping application supports the following:

D Global configuration or per interface configuration.
D Validation of the IP header checksum (as well as the IGMP header check-
sum) and discarding of the frame upon checksum error.
D Maintenance of the forwarding table entries based on the MAC address
versus the IP address.
D Flooding of unregistered multicast data packets to all ports in the VLAN.
Format
set igmp
Mode
Global Config
U no set igmp
This command disables IGMP Snooping on the system.
Format
no set igmp
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 213
4.9.44 set igmp

This command enables IGMP Snooping on a selected interface.
Default
enabled
Format
set igmp
Mode
Interface Config
U no set igmp
This command disables IGMP Snooping on a selected interface.
Format
no set igmp
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.45 set igmp aging-time-unknown

This command configures the IGMP Snooping aging time for unknown
multicast frames (unit: seconds, min.: 3, max.: 3,600, default: 260).
Format
set igmp aging-time-unknown <3-3600>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
214 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.46 set igmp automatic-mode

If enabled, this port is allowed to be set as static query port automatically, if
the LLDP protocol has found a switch or router connected to this port. Use
the command's normal form to enable the feature, the 'no' form to disable it.
Default
disabled
Format
set igmp automatic-mode
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 215
4.9.47 set igmp forward-all

This command activates the forwarding of multicast frames to this interface
even if the given interface has not received any reports by hosts. N. B.: this
applies only to frames that have been learned via IGMP Snooping. The pur-
pose is that an interface (e. g. a HIPER Ring's ring port) may need to forward
all such frames even if no reports have been received on it. This enables fast-
er recovery from ring interruptions for multicast frames.
Default
disabled
Format
set igmp forward-all
Mode
Interface Config
U no set igmp forward-all

This command disables the forwarding of all multicast frames learned via
IGMP Snooping on a selected interface.
Format
no set igmp forward-all
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
216 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.48 set igmp forward-unknown
Note: This command is available for MS20/MS30.

This command defines how to handle unknown multicast frames.
Format
set igmp forward-unknown
{ discard | flood | query-ports}
Mode
Global Config
discard
Unknown multicast frames will be discarded.
flood
Unknown multicast frames will be flooded.
query-ports
Unknown multicast frames will be forwarded only to query ports.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 217
4.9.49 set igmp static-query-port

This command activates the forwarding of IGMP membership report frames
to this interface even if the given interface has not received any queries. The
purpose is that a port may need to forward such frames even if no queries
have been received on it (e. g., if a router is connected to the interface that
sends no queries).
Default
disabled
Format
set igmp static-query-port
Mode
Interface Config
U no set igmp
This command disables the unconditional forwarding of IGMP member-
ship report frames to this interface.
Format
no set igmp static-query-port
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
218 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.50 set igmp groupmembershipinterval

This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the sys-
tem. The Group Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds
that a switch will wait for a report from a particular group on a particular inter-
face before deleting the interface from the entry. This value must be greater
than the IGMP Maximum Response time value. The range is 3 to
3,600 seconds.
Default
260
Format
set igmp groupmembershipinterval <3-3600>
Mode
Global Config
U no set igmp groupmembershipinterval

This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the
system to 260 seconds.
Format
no set igmp groupmembershipinterval
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 219
4.9.51 set igmp interfacemode

This command enables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces. If an interface
which has IGMP Snooping enabled is enabled for port-based routing or is en-
listed as a member of a link-aggregation (LAG), IGMP Snooping functionality
will be disabled on that interface. IGMP Snooping functionality will subse-
quently be re-enabled if routing is disabled or link-aggregation (LAG) mem-
bership is removed from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled.
Format
set igmp interfacemode
Mode
Global Config
U no set igmp interfacemode

This command disables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces.
Format
no set igmp interfacemode
Mode
Global Config
4.9.52 set igmp lookup-interval-unknown

This command configures the IGMP Snooping lookup response time for
unknown multicast frames (unit: seconds, min.: 2, max.: 3,599, default: 125).
Format
set igmp lookup-interval-unknown <2-3599>
Mode
Global Config
<2-3599>
Enter the IGMP Snooping lookup response time for unknown multi-
cast frames (unit: seconds, min.: 2, max.: 3,599, default: 125).
CLI L2P
220 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.53 set igmp lookup-resp-time-unknown

This command configures the IGMP Snooping lookup interval for unknown
multicast frames (unit: seconds, min.: 1, max.: 3,598, default: 10).
Format
set igmp lookup-resp-time-unknown <1-3598>
Mode
Global Config
<2-3598>
Enter the IGMP Snooping lookup interval for unknown multicast
frames (unit: seconds, min.: 1, max.: 3,598, default: 10).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 221
4.9.54 set igmp maxresponse

This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system. The
Maximum Response time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will
wait after sending a query in response to a received leave message, before
deleting the multicast group received in the leave message. If the switch re-
ceives a report in response to the query within the maxresponse time, then
the multicast group is not deleted. This value must be less than the IGMP
Query Interval time value. The range is 1 to 3,598 seconds.
Default
10
Format
set igmp maxresponse <1-3598>
Mode
Global Config
Note: the IGMP Querier's max. response time was also set. It is always the
same value as the IGMP Snooping max. response time.
U no set igmp maxresponse

This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system to
10 seconds.
Format
no set igmp maxresponse
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
222 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.55 set igmp querier max-response-time

Configure the IGMP Snooping Querier's maximum response time. The range
is 1 to 3,598 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.
Default
10
Format
set igmp querier max-response-time <1-3598>
Mode
Global Config
Note: The IGMP Snooping max. response time was also set. It is always the
same value as the IGMP Querier´s max. response time.
4.9.56 set igmp querier protocol-version

Configure the IGMP Snooping Querier's protocol version (1, 2 or 3).
Default
2
Format
set igmp querier protocol-version {1 | 2 | 3}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 223
4.9.57 set igmp querier status

Configure the IGMP Snooping Querier's administrative status
(enable or disable).
Default
disable
Format
set igmp querier status {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
4.9.58 set igmp querier tx-interval

Configure the IGMP Snooping Querier's transmit interval. The range is 2 to
3,599 seconds.
Default
125
Format
set igmp querier tx-interval <2-3599>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
224 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.59 set igmp query-ports-to-filter

This command enables or disables the addition of query ports to multicast fil-
ter portmasks. The setting can be enable or disable.
Default
Disable
Format
set igmp query-ports-to-filter {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
enable
Addition of query ports to multicast filter portmasks.
disable
No addition of query ports to multicast filter portmasks.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 225
4.9.60 set pre-login-banner text

Use this command to set the text for the pre-login banner. The device
displays this banner additionally before login in the CLI and before login in
the graphical user interface.
Default
Empty string
Format
set pre-login-banner text <text>
Mode
Privileged Exec
text
Enter the text for the pre-login banner.
Possible values: Max. 255 characters in the range ASCII code 0x20
(space character, “ ”) to ASCII code 0x7E (tilde, “~”), except ASCII
code 0x25 (percent sign, "%").
Use “\\n” for new line and ” \\t” for tab.
4.9.61 selftest ramtest

Enable or disable the RAM test for a cold start of the device.
Deactivating the RAM test reduces the booting time for a cold start of the de-
vice.
Default: enabled.
Format
selftest ramtest {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
selftest ramtest disable
Disable the ramtest.
selftest ramtest enable
Enable the ramtest. This is the default.
CLI L2P
226 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.62 selftest reboot-on-hdxerror

Enable or disable a restart when the device detects a half duplex mismatch
error. Default: enabled.
Format
selftest reboot-on-hdxerror {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
selftest reboot-on-hdxerror disable
Disable the reboot-on-hdxerror function.
selftest reboot-on-hdxerror enable
Enable the reboot-on-hdxerror function. This is the default.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 227
4.9.63 selftest reboot-on-error

Enable or disable a restart due to an undefined software or hardware state.
Default: disabled.
Format
selftest reboot-on-error
{disable|enable|seriousOnly}
Mode
Global Config
selftest reboot-on-error disable
Disable the reboot-on-error function. This is the default.
selftest reboot-on-error enable
Enable the reboot-on-error function.
selftest reboot-on-error seriousOnly
The device will only reboot on errors considered to be critical.
Note: Duplex mismatch errors are considered to be non-critical. In case of a
detected duplex mismatch error, the device will not reboot. Reset the device
to restore ports to an usable state.
CLI L2P
228 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.64 show auto-disable brief

Use this command to display the Auto Disable summary.
Format
show auto-disable brief
Mode
Global Config
Intf
Display the number of the interface in slot/port format.
Error reason
Display the error reason for auto-disable.
Possible values: no error, link-flap, crc-error, overload-detection.
Component name
Display the name of the component for auto-disable.
Remaining time(sec.)
Display the remaining time in seconds for auto-disable.
Possible values: 0 | 30..2147483.
Auto-Disable time(sec.)
Display the time for auto-disable in seconds.
Possible values: 0 | 30..2147483.
Auto-Disable oper state
Display the operational state of the auto-disable function.
Possible values: active, inactive.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 229
4.9.65 show auto-disable reasons

Use this command to display the reasons for port auto-disable on this devcie.
Format
show auto-disable reasons
Mode
Global Config
Error reason
Display the error reasons of the port auto-disable function
(link-flap, crc-error, overload-detection).
State
Display the state of the port auto-disable function.
Possible values: enabled, disabled.
CLI L2P
230 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.66 show dip-switch

This command displays the DIP switch operation configuration.
Format
show dip-switch
Mode
Global Config
DIP Switch operation
This field displays the DIP Switch operation status.
Possible values: Enabled, Disabled
DIP Switch conflict
This field displays the DIP Switch conflict status.
Possible values: True, False
DIP Switch Red. Manager
This field displays the DIP Switch Redundancy Manager status.
DIP Switch Standby
This field displays the DIP Switch Standby status.
DIP Switch RingPort
Note: This command is available for the MICE devices.
This field displays the DIP Switch RingPort numbers.
Possible values: Interface number in slot/port notation.
DIP Switch SW config
Note: This command is available for the MICE devices.
This field displays the DIP Switch SW config status.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 231
4.9.67 show garp

This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol (GARP) in-
formation.
Format
show garp
Mode
GMRP Admin Mode
This displays the administrative mode of GARP Multicast Registration
Protocol (GMRP) for the system.
4.9.68 show gmrp configuration

This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol (GARP) in-
formation for one or all interfaces.
Format
show gmrp configuration {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Interface
This displays the slot/port of the interface that this row in the table
describes.
Join Timer
Specifies the interval between the transmission of GARP PDUs regis-
tering (or re-registering) membership for an attribute. Current attri-
butes are a VLAN or multicast group. There is an instance of this
timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values
are 10 to 100 centiseconds (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is
20 centiseconds (0.2 seconds). The finest granularity of specification
is 1 centisecond (0.01 seconds).
CLI L2P
232 Release 8.0 05/2013
Leave Timer
Specifies the period of time to wait after receiving an unregister
request for an attribute before deleting the attribute. Current attributes
are a VLAN or multicast group. This may be considered a buffer time
for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order
to maintain uninterrupted service. There is an instance of this timer on
a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values are 20 to
600 centiseconds (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The factory default is 60 centi-
seconds (0.6 seconds). The finest granularity of specification is 1 cen-
tisecond (0.01 seconds).
LeaveAll Timer
This Leave All Time controls how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are gen-
erated. A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be
deregistered. Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain reg-
istration. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP
participant basis. The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value
in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. Permissible values
are 200 to 6000 centiseconds (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is
1000 centiseconds (10 seconds). The finest granularity of specifica-
tion is 1 centisecond (0.01 seconds).
Port GMRP Mode
Indicates the GMRP administrative mode for the port. It may be
enabled or disabled. If this parameter is disabled, Join Time, Leave
Time and Leave All Time have no effect. The factory default is dis-
abled.
4.9.69 show igmpsnooping

This command displays IGMP Snooping information. Configured information
is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping is enabled. Status information is
only displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled.
Format
show igmpsnooping
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 233
Mode
Admin Mode
This indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping is globally enabled on
the switch.
Forwarding of Unknown Frames
This displays if and how unknown multicasts are forwarded.
The setting can be Discard, Flood or Query Ports.
The default is Query Ports.
Group Membership Interval
This displays the IGMP Group Membership Interval. This is the
amount of time a switch will wait for a report for a particular group on
a particular interface before it sends a query on that interface. This
value may be configured.
Multicast Control Frame Count
This displays the number of multicast control frames that are
processed by the CPU.
Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping
This is the list of interfaces on which IGMP Snooping is enabled.
Additionally, if a port has a special function, it will be shown to the
right of its slot/port number. There are 3 special functions:
Forward All, Static Query Port and Learned Query Port.
Querier Status (the administrative state).
This displays the IGMP Snooping Querier's administrative status.
Querier Mode (the actual state, read only)
This displays the IGMP Snooping Querier's operating status.
Querier Transmit Interval
This displays the IGMP Snooping Querier's transmit interval in
seconds.
Querier Max. Response Time
This displays the IGMP Snooping Querier's maximum response time
in seconds.
Querier Protocol Version
This displays the IGMP Snooping Querier's protocol version number.
CLI L2P
234 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.70 show mac-filter-table gmrp

This command displays the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) table.
Format
show mac-filter-table gmrp
Mode
Mac Address
A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or
filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal num-
bers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In
an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes.
Type
This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are
configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as
a result of a learning process or protocol.
Description
The text description of this multicast table entry.
Interfaces
The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and
filtering (Flt:).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 235
4.9.71 show mac-filter-table igmpsnooping

This command displays the IGMP Snooping entries in the Multicast Forward-
ing Database (MFDB) table.
Format
show mac-filter-table igmpsnooping
Mode
Mac Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or
filtering information. The format is two-digit hexadecimal numbers that
are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
Type
Description
Interfaces
The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and fil-
tering (Flt:).
CLI L2P
236 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.72 show mac-filter-table multicast

This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) informa-
tion. If the command is entered with no parameter, the entire table is dis-
played. This is the same as entering the optional all parameter. The user
can display the table entry for one MAC Address by specifying the MAC ad-
dress as an optional parameter.
Format
show mac-filter-table multicast
[<macaddr> <1-4042>]
Mode
Mac Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or
filtering information. The format is two-digit hexadecimal numbers that
are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
Type
Component
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast For-
warding Database. Possible values are IGMP Snooping, GMRP and
Static Filtering.
Description
Interfaces
tering (Flt:).
Forwarding Interfaces
The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the compo-
nent’s forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are
listed as the static filtering interfaces.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 237
4.9.73 show mac-filter-table static

This command displays the Static MAC Filtering information for all Static
MAC Filters. If all is selected, all the Static MAC Filters in the system are
displayed. If a macaddr is entered, a vlan must also be entered and the Static
MAC Filter information will be displayed only for that MAC address and
VLAN.
Format
show mac-filter-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> |
all}
Mode
MAC Address
Is the MAC Address of the static MAC filter entry.
VLAN ID
Is the VLAN ID of the static MAC filter entry.
Source Port(s)
Indicates the source port filter set's slot and port(s).
Destination Port(s)
Indicates the destination port filter set's slot and port(s).
CLI L2P
238 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.74 show mac-filter-table staticfiltering

This command displays the Static Filtering entries in the Multicast Forward-
ing Database (MFDB) table.
Format
show mac-filter-table staticfiltering
Mode
Mac Address
A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or fil-
tering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal num-
bers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
Type
Description
Interfaces
tering (Flt:).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 239
4.9.75 show mac-filter-table stats

This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) statis-
tics.
Format
show mac-filter-table stats
Mode
Total Entries
This displays the total number of entries that can possibly be in the
Multicast Forwarding Database table.
Most MFDB Entries Ever Used
This displays the largest number of entries that have been present in
the Multicast Forwarding Database table. This value is also known as
the MFDB high-water mark.
Current Entries
This displays the current number of entries in the Multicast Forward-
ing Database table.
4.9.76 show mac notification

This command displays the MAC address change notification configuration.
Format
show mac notification
Mode
Privileged EXEC
MAC notification settings
This table displays the MAC notification settings (status and interval)
for the device.
CLI L2P
240 Release 8.0 05/2013
MAC notification status

This field displays the status of MAC notification traps for the device.
Possible values: enabled, disabled.
MAC notification interval
This field displays the MAC notification interval for the device.
Possible values: 1..2147483647.
Interface
This field displays the number of the interface in slot/port format.
MAC notify
This field displays the status of MAC notification traps for this port.
Possible values: enabled, disabled
Mode
This field displays the mode for which action the device sends a MAC
notification trap.
Possible values: add,remove,all
Last MAC address
This field displays the last MAC address added or removed from the
address table for this interface.
Possible values: Valid MAC address in aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
notation.
Last MAC status
This field displays the status of the last MAC address on this inter-
face.
Possible values: added, removed, other.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 241
4.9.77 show monitor session

This command displays the port monitoring information for the system.
Format
show monitor session <Session Number>
Mode
Global Config, Privileged EXEC, User EXEC
Session
Display port monitor session settings.
Session Number
Session number. Enter 1 for the session number.
Session ID
Displays the session number of the port monitor session.
Possible values: 1.
Admin Mode
Displays the status of the port monitoring feature.
Possible values: Enable, Disable.
Probe Port
Displays the interface configured as the probe port (in slot/port nota-
tion). If this value has not been configured, 'Not Configured' will be
displayed.
Mirrored Port
Displays the interface configured as the mirrored port (in slot/port
notation). If this value has not been configured, 'Not Configured'
will be displayed.
Direction
Displays the direction which has been configured for the port.
Possible values: rx (receive), tx (transmit), rx/tx (receive and
transmit)
If this value has not been configured, 'Not Configured' will be
displayed.
CLI L2P
242 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.78 show port

This command displays port information.
Format
show port {<slot/port> | all} [name]
Mode
Slot/Port
Name
When the optional command parameter name was specified, the out-
put is different. It specifically includes the Interface Name as the sec-
ond column, followed by other basic settings that are also shown by
the normal command without the command parameter name.
Type
If not blank, this field indicates that this port is a special type of port.
The possible values are:
Mon - this port is a monitoring port. Look at the Port Monitoring
screens to find out more information.
LA Mbr - this port is a member of a Link Aggregation (LAG).
Probe - this port is a probe port.
Admin Mode
Indicates the Port control administration state. The port must be
enabled in order for it to be allowed into the network. - May be
enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled.
Physical Mode
Indicates the desired port speed and duplex mode. If auto-negotiation
support is selected, then the duplex mode and speed will be set from
the auto-negotiation process. Note that the port's maximum capability
(full duplex -100M) will be advertised. Otherwise, this object will deter-
mine the port's duplex mode and transmission rate. The factory
default is Auto.
Physical Status
Indicates the port speed and duplex mode.
Link Status
Indicates whether the Link is up or down.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 243
Link Trap
This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status
changes. The factory default is enabled.
Flow
Indicates if enable flow control is enabled on this port.
Device Status
Indicates whether or not the given port's link status is monitored by
the device status.
VLAN Prio
This object displays the port VLAN priority.
4.9.79 show link-aggregation

This command displays an overview of all link-aggregations (LAGs) on the
switch.
Format
show link-aggregation {<logical slot/port> | all}
Mode
Logical slot/port
Name
The name of this link-aggregation (LAG). You may enter any string of
up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Link State
Indicates whether the Link is up or down.
Admin Mode
May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled.
CLI L2P
244 Release 8.0 05/2013
Link Trap Mode

This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status
changes. The factory default is enabled.
STP Mode
The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the
port or link-aggregation (LAG). The possible values are:
Disable - Spanning tree is disabled for this port.
Enable - Spanning tree is enabled for this port.
Mbr Ports
A listing of the ports that are members of this link-aggregation (LAG),
in slot/port notation. There can be a maximum of eight ports assigned
to a given link-aggregation (LAG).
Port Speed
Speed of the link-aggregation port.
Type
This field displays the status designating whether a particular link-
aggregation (LAG) is statically or dynamically maintained. The possi-
ble values of this field are Static, indicating that the link-aggregation is
statically maintained; and Dynamic, indicating that the link-aggrega-
tion is dynamically maintained.
Active Ports
This field lists the ports that are actively participating in the link-aggre-
gation (LAG).
4.9.80 show rmon-alarm

This command displays switch configuration information.
Format
show rmon-alarm
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 245
4.9.81 show selftest

Format
show selftest
Mode
Ramtest state
May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled.
Reboot on error
May be enabled, disabled or seriousOnly. The factory default is
enabled.
CLI L2P
246 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.82 show storm-control

Format
show storm-control
Mode
Ingress Limiting
May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.
Ingress Limiter Mode
Note: This command is available for the MACH4000 and PowerMICE
devices.
Sets the global mode for the ingress limiter. The factory default is:
Broadcasts only.
Egress Broadcast Limiting
Egress Limiting (all traffic)
802.3x Flow Control Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 247
4.9.83 show storm-control limiters port

This command displays the limiter settings per port. "0" means that the re-
spective limiter is disabled.
Format
show storm-control limiters port {<slot/port>|all}
Mode
Ingress Mode
Note: This command is available for the devices RS20/RS30/RS40,
MS20/MS30 and OCTOPUS.
Shows the mode for the ingress limiter. The factory default is: Broad-
casts only.
Ingress Limit
Shows the ingress rate limit. The factory default is: 0.
Egress Broadcast Limit
Shows the egress broadcast rate limit. The factory default is: 0.
Egress Limit (all traffic)
Note: This command is available for the devices RS20/RS30/RS40,
MS20/MS30 and OCTOPUS.
Shows the egress rate limit for all frame types.
The factory default is: 0.
4.9.84 show vlan

This command displays detailed information, including interface information,
for a specific VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number
Format
show vlan <vlanid>
Mode
CLI L2P
248 Release 8.0 05/2013
VLAN ID
There is a VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with each VLAN. The
range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4042.
VLAN Name
A string associated with this VLAN as a convenience. It can be up to
32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is
blank. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of `Default`. This field is
optional.
VLAN Type
Type of VLAN, which can be Default, (VLAN ID = 1), a static (one that
is configured and permanently defined), or Dynamic (one that is cre-
ated by GVRP registration).
VLAN Creation Time
Time since VLAN has been created:
d days, hh:mm:ss (System Uptime).
Interface
Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes. It is possi-
ble to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top
line.
Current
Determines the degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The
permissible values are:
Include - This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is
equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Exclude - This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equiv-
alent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Autodetect - Specifies to allow the port to be dynamically regis-
tered in this VLAN via GVRP. The port will not participate in this
VLAN unless a join request is received on this port. This is equivalent
to registration normal in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Configured
Determines the configured degree of participation of this port in this
VLAN. The permissible values are:
Include - This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is
equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Exclude - This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equiv-
alent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 249
Autodetect - Specifies to allow the port to be dynamically regis-

tered in this VLAN via GVRP. The port will not participate in this
VLAN unless a join request is received on this port. This is equivalent
to registration normal in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Tagging
Select the tagging behavior for this port in this VLAN.
Tagged - specifies to transmit traffic for this VLAN as tagged
frames.
Untagged - specifies to transmit traffic for this VLAN as untagged
frames.
CLI L2P
250 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.85 show vlan brief

This command displays a list of all configured VLANs.
Format
show vlan brief
Mode
VLAN ID
There is a VLAN Identifier (vlanid )associated with each VLAN. The
range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4042.
VLAN Name
A string associated with this VLAN as a convenience. It can be up to
32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is
blank. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of `Default`. This field is
optional.
VLAN Type
Type of VLAN, which can be Default, (VLAN ID = 1), a static (one that
is configured and permanently defined), or a Dynamic (one that is
created by GVRP registration).
VLAN Creation Time
Displays the time (as the system time up time) when the VLAN was
created.
4.9.86 show vlan port

This command displays VLAN port information.
Format
show vlan port {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 251
Slot/Port
Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes. It is possi-
ble to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top
line.
Port VLAN ID
The VLAN ID that this port will assign to untagged frames or priority
tagged frames received on this port. The value must be for an existing
VLAN. The factory default is 1.
Acceptable Frame Types
Specifies the types of frames that may be received on this port. The
options are 'VLAN only' and 'Admit All'. When set to 'VLAN only',
untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are
discarded. When set to 'Admit All', untagged frames or priority tagged
frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of
the Port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged
frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specifica-
tion.
Ingress Filtering
May be enabled or disabled. When enabled, the frame is discarded if
this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associ-
ated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the
tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for
the port that received this frame. When disabled, all frames are for-
warded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification.
The factory default is disabled.
GVRP
The protocol for VLAN administration, GVRP (GARP VLAN Registra-
tion Protocol) is particularly used for the adjustment of terminal
devices and VLAN switches. In realtime, it traces users log-in and
log-off and provides updated configuration data to the network man-
agement system. In order to be able to use this protocol, GVRP has
to be supported by every switch.
GVRP may be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.
Default Priority
The 802.1p priority assigned to tagged packets arriving on the port.
CLI L2P
252 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.87 show voice vlan

Use this command to display the current global Voice VLAN Administrative
Mode.
Voice VLAN is a feature used to automatically separate voice and data traffic
on a port, by VLAN and/or priority. A primary benefit of using Voice VLAN is
to ensure that the sound quality of an IP phone is safeguarded from deterio-
rating when the data traffic on the port is high.
Format
show voice vlan
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Administrative Mode
Possible values: Disable, Enable
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 253
4.9.88 show voice vlan interface

Use this command to display Use this command to display a summary of the
current Voice VLAN configuration for a specific interface.
<slot/port> indicates a specific physical interface.
all indicates all valid interfaces.
Format
show voice vlan interface {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<slot/port>
Indicates a specific physical interface.
all
Indicates all valid interfaces.
Interface
Displays the physical interface.
Voice VLAN Interface Mode
Displays the Voice VLAN Interface Mode.
Value range: Disabled, Enabled.
Voice VLAN Authentication
Displays the Voice VLAN Authentication.
Voice VLAN Port Status
Displays the Voice VLAN Port Status.
CLI L2P
254 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.89 shutdown
This command disables a port.
Default
enabled
Format
shutdown
Mode
Interface Config
U no shutdown
This command enables a port.
Format
no shutdown
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 255
4.9.90 shutdown all

This command disables all ports.
Default
enabled
Format
shutdown all
Mode
Global Config
U no shutdown all
This command enables all ports.
Format
no shutdown all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
256 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.91 snmp trap link-status

This command enables link status traps by interface.
Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is enabled.
See ‘snmp-server enable traps linkmode’ command.
Format
snmp trap link-status
Mode
Interface Config
U no snmp trap link-status

This command disables link status traps by interface.
Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is en-
abled. See ‘snmp-server enable traps linkmode’ command).
Format
no snmp trap link-status
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 257
4.9.92 snmp trap link-status all

This command enables link status traps for all interfaces.
Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is enabled
(see “snmp-server enable traps linkmode” ).
Format
snmp trap link-status all
Mode
Global Config
U no snmp trap link-status all

This command disables link status traps for all interfaces.
Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is enabled
(see “snmp-server enable traps linkmode”).
Format
no snmp trap link-status all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
258 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.93 spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck

This command enables BPDU migration check on a given interface.
This will force the specified port to transmit RST or MST BPDUs.
The all option enables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.
Format
spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port>|all}
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck
This command disables BPDU migration check on a given interface. The
all option disables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.
Format
no spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/
port>|all}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 259
4.9.94 speed
This command sets the speed and duplex setting for the interface.
Format
speed {<100 | 10> <half-duplex | full-duplex> | 1000
full-duplex}
Mode
Interface Config
Acceptable values are:

1000f
1000BASE-T full duplex
100h
100BASE-T half duplex
100f
10h
10BASE-T half duplex
10f
CLI L2P
260 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.95 storm-control broadcast

This command enables the egress broadcast limiter globally.
Format
storm-control broadcast
Mode
Global Config
U no storm-control broadcast
This command disables the egress broadcast limiter globally.
Format
no storm-control broadcast
Mode
Global Config
4.9.96 storm-control egress-limiting

This command enables or disables the egress limiter globally for all frame
types.
Format
storm-control egress-limiting {disable | enable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 261
4.9.97 storm-control ingress-limiting

This command enables or disables the ingress limiter globally.
Format
storm-control ingress-limiting {disable | enable}
Mode
Global Config
4.9.98 storm-control ingress-mode

Note: This command is available for the MACH4000 and PowerMICE
devices.
This command sets the frame type for the ingress limiter globally to:
BC or BC+MC.
Format
storm-control ingress-mode {bc | mc+bc}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
262 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.99 storm-control broadcast (port-related)

This command enables the broadcast limiter per port.
Enter the maximum number of broadcasts that the given port is allowed to
send (unit: frames per second, min.: 0 (no limit), default: 0 (no limit)).
Format
storm-control broadcast <max. broadcast rate>
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.100storm-control egress-limit
Note: This command is available for the RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30 and
OCTOPUS devices.
Sets the egress rate limit in kbit/s. "0" means: no limit.

Format
storm-control egress-limit <max. egress rate>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 263
4.9.101storm-control ingress-limit
Sets the ingress rate limit in kbit/s. "0" means: no limit.
Format
storm-control ingress-limit <max. ingress rate>
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.102storm-control ingress-mode
Note: This command is available for the RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30,
OCTOPUS devices.
This command sets the frame type for the ingress limiter to:
All, BC, BC+MC, BC+MC+uUC.
Format
storm-control ingress-mode {all | bc | mc+bc |
uuc+mc+bc}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
264 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.103storm-control flowcontrol
This command enables 802.3x flow control for the switch.
Note: This command only applies to full-duplex mode ports.
Default
disabled
Format
storm-control flowcontrol
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
U no storm-control flowcontrol
This command disables 802.3x flow control for the switch.

Format
no storm-control flowcontrol
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 265
4.9.104storm-control flowcontrol per port

This command enables 802.3x flow control for the port.
Default
enabled
Format
storm-control flowcontrol
Mode
Interface Config
U no storm-control flowcontrol per port

This command disables 802.3x flow control for the port.

Format
no storm-control flowcontrol
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
266 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.105vlan
This command creates a new VLAN and assigns it an ID. The ID is a valid
VLAN identification number (ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN). VLAN
range is 1-4042.
Format
vlan <1-4042>
Mode
VLAN database
U no vlan
This command deletes an existing VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identifi-
cation number (ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN). VLAN range is
1-4042.
Format
no vlan <1-4042>
Mode
VLAN database
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 267
4.9.106vlan0-transparent-mode
Activate the “Transparent Mode“ to be able to switch priority tagged frames
without a VLAN affiliation thus with VLAN-ID “0”.
In this mode the VLAN-ID “0” persists in the frame, irrespective of the Port
VLAN ID setting in the “VLAN Port“ dialog.
Note: For PowerMICE, MACH100, MACH1000 and MACH4000:
In transparency mode devices ignore received vlan tags. Set the vlan mem-
bership of the ports to untagged for all vlans.
Note: For RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30 and OCTOPUS:
In transparency mode devices ignore the configured port vlan id. Set the vlan
membership of the ports from vlan 1 to untagged or member.
Format
vlan0-transparent-mode {disable|enable}
Mode
VLAN database
CLI L2P
268 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.107vlan acceptframe
This command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface. For VLAN
Only mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are
discarded. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames received
on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN
ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in ac-
cordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.
Default
Admit All
Format
vlan acceptframe <vlanonly | all | untaggedonly>
Mode
Interface Config
all
Untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are
accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this
port.
vlanonly
Only frames received with a VLAN tag will be forwarded. Other
frames will be dropped.
untaggedonly
Only frames received without a VLAN tag will be forwarded. Other
frames will be dropped.
Note: This command is available for devices of the RS20/RS30/
RS40, MS20/MS30, MACH102, RSR20/RSR30, MACH1020/
MACH1030 and OCTOPUS family.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 269
U no vlan acceptframe
This command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface to Admit
All. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on
this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN
ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in
accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.
Format
no vlan acceptframe
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.108vlan database
This command switches into the global VLAN mode.
Default
Admit All
Format
vlan database
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
270 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.109vlan ingressfilter
This command enables ingress filtering. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames
received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the re-
ceiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of
that VLAN.
Default
disabled
Format
vlan ingressfilter
Mode
Interface Config
U no vlan ingressfilter
This command disables ingress filtering. If ingress filtering is disabled,
frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership
of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are
members of that VLAN.
Format
no vlan ingressfilter
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 271
4.9.110vlan name
This command changes the name of a VLAN. The name is an alphanumeric
string of up to 32 characters, and the ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
ID range is 1-4042.
Default
The name for VLAN ID 1 is always Default. The name for other
VLANs is defaulted to a blank string.
Format
vlan name <1-4042> <newname>
Mode
VLAN database
U no vlan name
This command sets the name of a VLAN to a blank string. The VLAN ID
is a valid VLAN identification number. ID range is 1-4042.
Format
no vlan name <1-4042>
Mode
VLAN database
CLI L2P
272 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.111vlan participation
This command configures the degree of participation for a specific interface
in a VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number, and the interface is
a valid interface number .
Format
vlan participation
<exclude | include | auto> <1-4042>
Mode
Interface Config
Participation options are:

include
The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration fixed.
exclude
The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration forbidden.
auto
The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP. The
interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is
received on this interface. This is equivalent to registration normal.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 273
4.9.112vlan participation all

This command configures the degree of participation for all interfaces in a
VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
Format
vlan participation all <exclude | include | auto>
<1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
Participation options are:

include
The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration fixed.
exclude
The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration forbidden.
auto
The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP. The
interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is
received on this interface. This is equivalent to registration normal.
CLI L2P
274 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.113vlan port acceptframe all

This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces. For VLAN
Only mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are
discarded. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames received
on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN
ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in ac-
cordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.
Default
Admit All
Format
vlan port acceptframe all <vlanonly | all>
Mode
Global Config
U no vlan port acceptframe all

This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces to
Admit All. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames
received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the
interface VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames
are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.
Format
no vlan port acceptframe all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 275
4.9.114vlan port ingressfilter all

This command enables ingress filtering for all ports. If ingress filtering is dis-
abled, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN member-
ship of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are
members of that VLAN.
Default
disabled
Format
vlan port ingressfilter all
Mode
Global Config
U no vlan port ingressfilter all

This command disables ingress filtering for all ports. If ingress filtering is
disabled, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN
membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to
ports that are members of that VLAN.
Format
no vlan port ingressfilter all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
276 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.115vlan port pvid all

This command changes the VLAN ID for all interface.
Default
1
Format
vlan port pvid all <1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
U no vlan port pvid all

This command sets the VLAN ID for all interfaces to 1.
Format
no vlan port pvid all <1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 277
4.9.116vlan port tagging all

This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN to
enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames. If tag-
ging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The ID is a valid
VLAN identification number.
Format
vlan port tagging all <1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
U no vlan port tagging all

This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a
VLAN to disabled. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as
untagged frames. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
Format
no vlan port tagging all <1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
278 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.117vlan pvid
This command changes the VLAN ID per interface.
Default
1
Format
vlan pvid <1-4042>
Mode
Interface Config
U no vlan pvid
This command sets the VLAN ID per interface to 1.
Format
no vlan pvid <1-4042>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 279
4.9.118vlan tagging
This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a
VLAN to enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged
frames. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The
ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
Format
vlan tagging <1-4042>
Mode
Interface Config
U no vlan tagging
This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in
a VLAN to disabled. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as
untagged frames. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
Format
no vlan tagging <1-4042>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
280 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.119voice vlan (Global Config Mode)

This command enables the Voice VLAN feature.
Voice VLAN is a feature used to automatically separate voice and data traffic
on a port, by VLAN and/or priority. A primary benefit of using Voice VLAN is
to ensure that the sound quality of an IP phone is safeguarded from
deteriorating when the data traffic on the port is high.
Default
Disabled
Format
voice vlan
Mode
Global Config
U no voice vlan
This command disables the Voice VLAN feature.
Default
Disabled
Format
no voice vlan
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 281
4.9.120voice vlan <id>

Use this command to configure VLAN tagging and 802.1p priority.
Format
voice vlan <id> [dot1p <priority>] }
Mode
Interface Config
<id>
Enter the Voice VLAN ID.
dot1p
Configure Voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic.
<priority>
The priority tag range is 0–7.
U no voice vlan
This command disables the Voice VLAN feature on the interface.
Default
Disabled
Format
no voice vlan
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
282 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.9.121voice vlan dot1p

Use this command to configure Voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice
traffic.
Format
voice vlan dot1p <priority>
Mode
Interface Config
<priority>
Configure Voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic.
The priority tag range is 0–7.
4.9.122voice vlan none

Use this command to allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send
untagged voice traffic.
Format
voice vlan none
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 283
4.9.123voice vlan untagged

Use this command to configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.
Format
voice vlan untagged
Mode
Interface Config
4.9.124voice vlan auth

Use this command to set Voice VLAN Authentication Mode. If disabled, VOIP
devices which are detected via LLDP-med will have access to the Voice
VLAN without authentication.
Default
Enabled
Format
voice vlan auth [enabled | disabled]
Mode
Interface Config
disable
VOIP devices which are detected via LLDP-MED will have access to
the Voice VLAN without authentication.
enable
VOIP devices which are detected via LLDP-MED will not have access
to the Voice VLAN without authentication.
CLI L2P
284 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10 User Account Management Commands
4.10 User Account Management

Commands
These commands manage user accounts.
4.10.1 disconnect
This command closes a telnet session.
Format
disconnect {<sessionID> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Session ID
Enter the session ID (1-11).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 285
4.10.2 show loginsession

This command displays current telnet and serial port connections to the
switch.
Format
show loginsession
Mode
ID
Login Session ID
User Name
The name the user will use to login using the serial port or Telnet. A
new user may be added to the switch by entering a name in a blank
entry. The user name may be up to 8 characters, and is not case sen-
sitive. Two users are included as the factory default, ‘admin’ and
‘user’.
Connection From
IP address of the telnet client machine or EIA-232 for the serial port
connection.
Idle Time
Time this session has been idle.
Session Time
Total time this session has been connected.
CLI L2P
286 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10.3 show users

This command displays the configured user names and their settings. This
command is only available for users with readwrite privileges. The SNMPv3
fields will only be displayed if SNMP is available on the system.
Format
show users
Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Name
The name the user will use to login using the serial port, Telnet or
Web. A new user may be added to the switch by entering a name in a
blank entry. The user name may be up to eight characters, and is not
case sensitive. Two users are included as the factory default, ‘admin’
and ‘user’
Access Mode
Shows whether the operator is able to change parameters on the
switch (Read/Write) or is only able to view them (Read Only). As a
factory default, the ‘admin’ user has Read/Write access and the ‘user’
has Read Only access. There can only be one Read/Write user and
up to five Read Only users.
SNMPv3 AccessMode
This field displays the SNMPv3 Access Mode. If the value is set to
ReadWrite, the SNMPv3 user will be able to set and retrieve parame-
ters on the system. If the value is set to ReadOnly, the SNMPv3 user
will only be able to retrieve parameter information. The SNMPv3
access mode may be different than the CLI and Web access mode.
SNMPv3 Authentication
This field displays the authentication protocol to be used for the spec-
ified login user.
SNMPv3 Encryption
This field displays the encryption protocol to be used for the specified
login user.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 287
4.10.4 users defaultlogin

This command assigns the authentication login list to use for non-configured
users when attempting to log in to the system. This setting is overridden by
the authentication login list assigned to a specific user if the user is config-
ured locally. If this value is not configured, users will be authenticated using
local authentication only.
Format
users defaultlogin <listname>
Mode
Global Config
listname
Enter an alphanumeric string of not more than 15 characters.
CLI L2P
288 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10.5 users login <user>

Enter user name.
Format
users login <user> <listname>
Mode
Global Config
Note:
When assigning a list to the 'admin' account, include an authentica-
tion method that allows administrative access even when remote
authentication is unavailable (use 'authentication login <listname>
[method1 [method2 [method3]]]').
U no users login <user>

This command removes an operator.
Format
no users login <user> <listname>
Mode
Global Config
Note:
The ‘admin’ user account cannot be deleted.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 289
4.10.6 users access

This command sets access for a user: readonly/readwrite.
Format
users access <username> {readonly | readwrite}
Mode
Global Config
<username>
Enter a name up to 32 alphanumeric characters in length.
readonly
Enter the access mode as readonly.
readwrite
Enter the access mode as readwrite.
U no users access
This command deletes access for a user.
Format
no users access <username>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
290 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10.7 users name

This command adds a new user (account) if space permits. The account
<username> can be up to eight characters in length. The name may be com-
prised of alphanumeric characters as well as the dash (‘-’) and underscore
(‘_’). The <username> is not case-sensitive.
Six user names can be defined.
Format
users name <username>
Mode
Global Config
U no users name
This command removes an operator.
Format
no users name <username>
Mode
Global Config
Note:
The ‘admin’ user account cannot be deleted.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 291
4.10.8 users passwd

This command is used to change a password. The password should not be
more than eight alphanumeric characters in length. If a user is authorized for
authentication or encryption is enabled, the password must be at least eight
alphanumeric characters in length. The username and password are case-
sensitive. When a password is changed, a prompt will ask for the former
password. If none, press enter.
Note: Make sure, that the passwords of the users differ from each other. If
two or more users try to choose the same password, the CLI will display an
error message.
Default
No Password
Format
users passwd <username> {<password>}
Mode
Global Config
U no users passwd
This command sets the password of an existing operator to blank. When
a password is changed, a prompt will ask for the operator's former pass-
word. If none, press enter.
Format
no users passwd <username> {<password>}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
292 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10.9 users snmpv3 accessmode

This command specifies the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login
user. The valid accessmode values are readonly or readwrite. The
<username> is the login user name for which the specified access mode
applies. The default is readwrite for ‘admin’ user; readonly for all other
users
Default
admin -- readwrite; other -- readonly
Format
users snmpv3 accessmode <username> <readonly |
readwrite>
Mode
Global Config
U no users snmpv3 accessmode

This command sets the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login
user as readwrite for the ‘admin’ user; readonly for all other users.
The <username> is the login user name for which the specified access
mode will apply.
Format
no users snmpv3 accessmode <username>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 293
4.10.10users snmpv3 authentication

This command specifies the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login
user. The valid authentication protocols are none, md5 or sha. If md5 or sha are
specified, the user login password is also used as the snmpv3 authentication
password and therefore must be at least eight characters in length. The
<username> is the login user name associated with the authentication pro-
tocol.
Default
no authentication
Format
users snmpv3 authentication <username> <none | md5
| sha>
Mode
Global Config
U no users snmpv3 authentication

This command sets the authentication protocol to be used for the speci-
fied login user to none. The <username> is the login user name for
which the specified authentication protocol will be used.
Format
users snmpv3 authentication <username>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
294 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.10.11 users snmpv3 encryption

This command specifies the encryption protocol to be used for the specified
login user. The valid encryption protocols are des or none.
If des is specified, the required key may be specified on the command line.
The key may be up to 16 characters long. If the des protocol is specified but
a key is not provided, the user will be prompted for the key. When using the
des protocol, the user login password is also used as the snmpv3 encryption
password and therefore must be at least eight characters in length.
If none is specified, a key must not be provided. The <username> is the
login user name associated with the specified encryption.
Default
no encryption
Format
users snmpv3 encryption <username> <none |
des[key]>
Mode
Global Config
U no users snmpv3 encryption

This command sets the encryption protocol to none. The <username> is
the login user name for which the specified encryption protocol will be
used.
Format
no users snmpv3 encryption <username>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 295
4.11 System Utilities
This section describes system utilities.
4.11.1 address-conflict
This command configures the setting for detection possible address conflicts
of the agent´s IP address with other devices´ IP addresses in the network.
Format
address-conflict
{detection-mode { active-only | disable |
enable | passive-only}|
ongoing-detection { disable | enable } }
Mode
Global Config
detection mode
Configure the device's address conflict detection mode (active-only,
disable, enable or passive-only). Default: enable.
ongoing detection
Disable or enable the ongoing address conflict detection.
Default: enable.
CLI L2P
296 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.2 boot skip-aca-on-boot

Use this command to skip external memory (AutoConfiguration Adapter
ACA21) during boot phase to shorten startup duration.
The ACA21 functionality will be available after the boot phase.
Format
boot skip-aca-on-boot {disable | enable}
Mode
Global Config
Default
disabled
enable
Enable ACA21 skip during boot phase.
disable
Disable ACA21 skip during boot phase.
4.11.3 show boot skip-aca-on-boot

Use this command display the status of the option of skipping external
memory (AutoConfiguration Adapter ACA21) during boot phase.
Format
show boot skip-aca-on-boot
Mode
Global Config
Default
disabled
Enabled
ACA21 skip during boot phase is enabled.
Disabled
ACA21 skip during boot phase is disabled.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 297
4.11.4 cablestatus
This command tests the cable attached to an interface for short or open
circuit. During the test the traffic is interrupted on this port.
Format
cablestatus <slot/port>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.5 clear eventlog

Clear the event log. The CLI will ask for confirmation.
Answer y (yes) or n (no).
The CLI displays the end of this operation.
Format
clear eventlog
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
298 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.6 traceroute
This command is used to discover the routes that packets actually take when
traveling to their destination through the network on a hop-by-hop basis.
<ipaddr> should be a valid IP address.
The optional port parameter is the UDP port used as the destination of pack-
ets sent as part of the traceroute. This port should be an unused port on the
destination system. [port] should be a valid decimal integer in the range of 0
(zero) to 65,535. The default value is 33,434.
Format
traceroute <ipaddr> [port]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.7 clear arp-table-switch

This command clears the agent´s ARP table (cache).
Format
clear arp-table-switch
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 299
4.11.8 clear config

This command resets the configuration in RAM to the factory defaults without
powering off the switch.
Format
clear config
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.9 clear config factory

This command resets the whole configuration to the factory defaults. Confi-
guration data and scripts stored in nonvolatile memory will also be deleted.
Format
clear config factory
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.10clear counters
This command clears the stats for a specified <slot/port>or for all the ports or
for the entire switch based upon the argument.
Format
clear counters {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
300 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.11clear hiper-ring
This command clears the HIPER Ring configuration (deletes it).
Format
clear hiper-ring
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.12clear igmpsnooping
This command clears the tables managed by the IGMP Snooping function
and will attempt to delete these entries from the Multicast Forwarding Data-
base.
Format
clear igmpsnooping
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 301
4.11.13clear mac-addr-table
This command clears the switch's MAC address table (the forwarding data-
base that contains the learned MAC addresses).
Note: this command does not affect the MAC filtering table.
Format
clear mac-addr-table
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.14clear pass
This command resets all user passwords to the factory defaults without pow-
ering off the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the password reset
should proceed.
Format
clear pass
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
302 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.15clear link-aggregation
This command clears all link-aggregations (LAGs).
Format
clear link-aggregation
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.16clear signal-contact
This command clears the signal-contact output configuration.
Switches the signal contact 1´s mode to auto and its manual setting to open.
Switches the signal contact 2´s mode to manual and its manual setting to
closed.
Enables the monitoring of the power supplies for signal contact 1 only.
Disables the sending of signal contact traps.
Format
clear signal-contact
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 303
4.11.17clear traplog
This command clears the trap log.
Format
clear traplog
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.18clear ring-coupling
This command clears the ring-coupling configuration.
Format
clear ring-coupling
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.19clear vlan
This command resets VLAN configuration parameters to the factory defaults.
Format
clear vlan
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
304 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.20config-watchdog
If the function is enabled and the connection to the switch is interrupted for
longer than the time specified in “timeout [s]”, the switch then loads the last
configuration saved.
Format
config-watchdog {admin-state {disable|enable}|
timeout <10..600>}
Mode
Global Config
admin-state
Enable or disable the Auto Configuration Undo feature
(default: disabled).
timeout
Configure the Auto Configuration Undo timeout (unit: seconds).
4.11.21copy
This command uploads and downloads to/from the switch. Remote URLs
can be specified using tftp.
copy (without parameters) displays a brief explanation of the most important
copy commands. A list of valid commands is provided below.
The command can be used to the save the running configuration to nvram by
specifying the source as system:running-config and the destination as
nvram:startup-config.
Default
none
Format
copy
copy aca:script <sourcefilename> nvram:script
[targetfilename]
copy aca:capturefilter <sourcefilename>
nvram:capturefilter [targetfilename]
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 305
copy aca:sfp-white-list <sourcefilename>

nvram:sfp-white-list
copy nvram:backup-image system:image
copy nvram:clibanner <url>
copy nvram:capture aca:capture
copy nvram:capture <url>
copy nvram:capturefilter <sourcefilename>
aca:capturefilter <targetfilename>
copy nvram:capturefilter <sourcefilename>
copy nvram:errorlog <url>
copy nvram:script <sourcefilename> aca:script
[targetfilename]
copy nvram:script <sourcefilename> <url>
copy nvram:startup-config <url>
copy nvram:startup-config system:running-config
copy nvram:traplog <url>
copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config
<url>
copy system:running-config <url>
copy <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>
copy tftp://<server_ip>/<path_to_pem>
nvram:httpscert
copy <url> nvram:clibanner
copy <url> nvram:capturefilter <destfilename>
copy aca:capturefilter <sourcefilename>
nvram:capturefilter <destfilename>
copy <url> nvram:script <destfilename>
copy <url> nvram:startup-config
copy <url> system:image
copy <url> system:running-config
copy <url> system:bootcode
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
306 Release 8.0 05/2013
U copy aca:script <sourcefilename>

nvram:script [targetfilename]
Copies the script from the Auto Configuration Adapter.
– sourcefilename: Filename of source configuration Script. File-
name length may be max. 20 characters, including extension '.cli' or
'.CLI'.
– targetfilename: Filename on the switch's NVRAM. Filename
length may be max. 20 characters, including extension '.cli'.
U copy aca:capturefilter <sourcefilename>

nvram:capturefilter [targetfilename]
Copies a capture filter file from the Auto Configuration Adapter.
– sourcefilename: Filename of source capture filter expressions
file.
– targetfilename: Filename on the switch's NVRAM.
U copy aca:sfp-white-list <sourcefilename>

Use this command to load the SFP white list file from a ACA21.
Note: In order to delete the SFP white list file from the flash memory:
use the command clear sfp-white-list.
The clear config factory command deletes the SFP white
list, too.
U copy nvram:backup-image system:image

Use this command to swap current and backup images. The backup
image (backup.bin) and current image (main.bin) will exchange the
file name, after reboot the both OS and configuration files will be
swapped.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 307
U copy <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName> nvram:sfp-white-list

Use this command to load the SFP white list file from a TFTP server.
Note: In order to delete the SFP white list file from the flash memory:
use the command clear sfp-white-list.
The clear config factory command deletes the SFP white
list, too.
U copy tftp://<server_ip>/<path_to_pem> nvram:httpscert

Use this command for uploading a PEM certificate for HTTPS over
TFTP
Note: Reboot the device or re-enable the HTTPS server after
uploading a PEM certificate.
U copy nvram:clibanner <url>

Downloads the CLI banner file via TFTP using
<tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
U copy nvram:capture aca:capture

Save the internal packet capture file to the Auto Configuration
Adapter ACA21 (file name: "capture.cap").
U copy nvram:capture <url>

Save the internal packet capture file to a tftp URL using
CLI L2P
308 Release 8.0 05/2013
U copy nvram:capturefilter <sourcefilename>

aca:capturefilter <targetfilename>
Save a capture filter file from the flash memory to the Auto Configura-
tion Adapter.
– sourcefilename: Filename of source capture filter expressions file.
– targetfilename: Filename of target capture filter expressions file.
U copy nvram:capturefilter <sourcefilename> <url>

Save the internal packet capture filter file from the flash memory to a
tftp URL using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
– sourcefilename: Filename of source capture filter expressions file.
U copy nvram:errorlog <url>

Uploads Errorlog file.
– <url>: Uploads Error log file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
U copy nvram:script <sourcefilename>

aca:script [targetfilename]
Uploads configuration script file. Save the script to the AutoConfigura-
tion Adapter.
– sourcefilename: Filename length may be max. 20 characters,
including extension '.cli' or '.CLI'.
– targetfilename: Filename length may be max. 20 characters,
U copy nvram:script <sourcefilename> <url>

Uploads Configuration Script file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
Filename length may be max. 20 characters, including extension '.cli'.
– sourcefilename: Filename length may be max. 20 characters,
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 309
U copy nvram:startup-config <url>

Uploads config file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
U copy nvram:startup-config system:running-config

Uploads/Copies config file. The target is the currently running
configuration.
U copy nvram:traplog <url>

Uploads Trap log file. Uploads Trap log file using
U copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config

Copies system config file. Save the running configuration to NVRAM.
U copy system:running-config <url>

Copies system config file. Uploads system running-config via tftp
using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
CLI L2P
310 Release 8.0 05/2013
U copy <url> nvram:clibanner

This feature provides a privileged user the capability to change the
CLI default banner:
---------------------------------------------------
Copyright (c) 2004-2010 <Company Name>
All rights reserved
<Product Name> Release L3P-06.0.00
(Build date 2010-05-01 00:30)
System Name: <Product Name>-518280

Mgmt-IP : a.b.c.d
1.Router-IP: 0.0.0.0
Base-MAC : aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
System Time: 2010-01-02 05:51:11
---------------------------------------------------
The command uploads the CLI Banner file by tftp using

After the upload you logout from CLI and the new CLI banner file will
be displayed at the next login.
– url: Upload CLI banner file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
If no cli banner file is defined, the default cli banner is displayed (see
above).
Note: See that the the CLI banner file you created has the following
properties:
- Use ASCII format (character codes 0x20 .. 0x7F, \n and \t
as C-like sequences)
- Do not use regular expressions
- Do not exeed the limit of 2048 byte
- Do not exceed the limit of 20 lines
- Do not exceed the limit of 80 characters per line
- A device can only have one banner file at the moment
- Save the CLI banner file as *.bnr.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 311
U no clibanner
This command deletes an existing CLI banner file.
U copy <url> nvram:capturefilter <destfilename>

Load a Capture Filter file from a tftp URL into the flash memory using
– destfilename: Destination filename of capture filter expressions
file.
U copy aca:capturefilter <sourcefilename>

nvram:capturefilter <targetfilename>
Load a capture filter file from AutoConfiguration Adapter ACA21 into
the flash memory.
– sourcefilename: Filename of source capture filter expressions
file.
– targetfilename: Specify the file name on the switch's NVRAM.
U copy <url> nvram:script <destfilename>

Downloads Configuration Script file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
– destfilename: Filename length may be max. 20 characters,
U copy <url> nvram:sshkey-dsa

Downloads IP secure shell (SSH) DSA key file by tftp using <tftp://ip/
filepath/fileName>.
U copy <url> nvram:sshkey-rsa1

Downloads IP secure shell (SSH) RSA1 key file by tftp using <tftp://ip/
filepath/fileName>.
CLI L2P
312 Release 8.0 05/2013
U copy <url> nvram:sshkey-rsa2

Downloads IP secure shell (SSH) RSA2 key file by tftp using <tftp://ip/
filepath/fileName>.
U copy <url> nvram:startup-config

Downloads Config file by tftp using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
U copy <url> system:image

Downloads code file by tftp using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
U copy <url> system:running-config

Downloads Code/Config file using <tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>.
The target is the currently running configuration.
U copy <url> system:bootcode

Use the "copy <url> system:bootcode" command to load the boot-
code file via tftp into the device. For <url> enter the path of the tftp
server using the following notation: "<tftp://ip/filepath/fileName>", e.g.
"tftp://10.1.112.214/switch/switch01.cfg".
U clear sfp-white-list
Use this command to delete the SFP white list file from the flash
memory.
Note: The clear config factory command deletes the SFP
white list, too.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 313
4.11.22device-status connection-error
This command configures the device status link error monitoring for this port.
Default
ignore
Format
device-status connection-error {ignore|propagate}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
314 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.23device-status monitor
This command configures the device-status.
Format
device-status monitor
{aca-removal | all | connection-error |
hiper-ring |
module-removal | power-supply-1 |
power-supply-2 | power-supply-3-1 |
power-supply-3-2 |power-supply-4-1 |
power-supply-4-2 | ring-coupling | temperature }
{error|ignore}
device-status trap {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
monitor
Determines the monitoring of the selected event or all events.
– error If the given event signals an error, the device state will also
signal error,
– ignore Ignore the given event - even if it signals an error, the
device state will not signal 'error' because of that.
trap
Configure if a trap is sent when the device status changes its state.
– enable enables sending traps,
– disable disables sending traps.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 315
4.11.24logout
This command closes the current telnet connection or resets the current se-
rial connection.
Note: Save configuration changes before logging out.

Format
logout
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.11.25ping
This command checks if another computer is on the network and listens for
connections. To use this command, configure the switch for network (in-
band) connection. The source and target devices must have the ping utility
enabled and running on top of TCP/IP. The switch can be pinged from any IP
workstation with which the switch is connected through the default VLAN
(VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path between the switch and the
workstation. The terminal interface sends, three pings to the target station.
Format
ping <ipaddr>
Mode
CLI L2P
316 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.26signal-contact connection-error
This command configures the signal contact link error monitoring for this port.
Format
signal-contact connection-error {disable|enable}
Mode
Interface Config
disable
A link down event on this port will be not monitored by a signal con-
tact (default).
enable
A link down event on this port will be monitored by a signal contact.
4.11.27signal-contact
This command configures the signal contacts.
Format
signal-contact {1|2|all}
{mode {auto|device-status|manual}
|monitor {aca-removal|
all|
connection-error|hiper-ring|module-removal
|power-supply-1| power-supply-2
|power-supply-3-1|power-supply-3-2
|power-supply-4-1|power-supply-4-2
|ring-coupling|temperature} {disable|enable}
|state {closed|open}
|trap {disable|enable} }
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 317
Contact No.
Selection of the signal contact:
– 1 signal contact 1,
– 2 signal contact 2,
– all signal contact 1 and signal contact 2.
mode
Selection of the operational mode:
– auto function monitoring,
– device-status the device-status determines the signal contact´s
status.
– manual manually setting the signal contact.
monitor
Enables or disables the monitoring of the selected event or all events.
– enable monitoring,
– disable no monitoring.
state
Set the manual setting of the signal contact:
– closed ,
– open.
Only takes immediate effect in manual mode.
trap
Configures the sending of traps concerning the signal contact.
– enable enables sending traps,
– disable disables sending traps.
CLI L2P
318 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.28temperature
Note: The command is available for RS20/RS30/RS40, MS20/MS30,

RSR20/RSR30, MACH100, MACH1000, PowerMICE, MACH4000 and
OCTOPUS devices.
This command configures the lower and upper temperature limit for the
device. If these limits are exceeded, a trap is sent. The unit for the
temperature limit is °C (Celsius), the minimum value is -99, the maximum
value is 99. The default for the lower limit is 0, for the upper limit, it is 70.
Note: To give the temperature in Fahrenheit, use the suffix f.

Format
temperature {lower-limit|upper-limit} <temperature
value> [c|f]
Mode
Global Config
lower-limit
Configure the lower temperature limit.
upper-limit
Configure the upper temperature limit.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 319
4.11.29reboot
This command resets the switch (cold start) after a given time delay, for warm
start See “reload” on page 322. Reset means that all network connections
are terminated and the boot code executes. The switch uses the stored con-
figuration to initialize the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the reset
should proceed. A successful reset is indicated by the LEDs on the switch.
Format
reboot {delay <seconds>}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<seconds>
The number of seconds after which the switch will reboot.
Value range: None (no reboot sceduled), 0 - 2,147,483 sec (= 596 h +
31 min + 23 sec).
U clear reboot
This command cancels a scheduled reboot.
CLI L2P
320 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.30show reboot
This command displays if a reboot is sceduled for the device. If sceduled, the
command displays the number of seconds after which the switch will reboot.
Format
show reboot
Modes
Privileged EXEC
User Exec
<seconds>
The number of seconds after which the switch will reboot.
Value range: None (no reboot sceduled), 0 - 2,147,483 sec (= 596 h +
31 min + 23 sec) .
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 321
4.11.31reload
This command enables you to reset the switch (warm start) after a given time
delay, for cold start See “reboot” on page 320.
Note: First, the device is checking the software in the flash memory and then
it resets. If a warm start is not possible, the device automatically executes a
cold start.
Reset means that all network connections are terminated and the boot code
executes. The switch uses the stored configuration to initialize the switch.
You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed. A successful
reset is indicated by the LEDs on the switch.
Format
reload {delay <seconds>}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<seconds>
The number of seconds after which the switch will reload.
Value range: 0 - 2,147,483 sec.
U clear reload
This command cancels a scheduled reload.
CLI L2P
322 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.11.32show reload
This command displays if a reload is sceduled for the device. If sceduled, the
command displays the number of seconds after which the switch will reload.
Format
show reload
Modes
Privileged EXEC
User Exec
<seconds>
The number of seconds after which the switch will reload.
Possible values: None (no reload sceduled), 0 - 2,147,483 sec.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 323
4.12 LLDP - Link Layer Discovery Protocol
4.12 LLDP - Link Layer Discovery

Protocol
These commands show and configure the LLDP parameters in compliance

with IEEE 802.1 AB.
4.12.1 show lldp

This command shows all LLDP settings.
Format
show lldp
Mode
4.12.2 show lldp config

This command shows all LLDP configuration settings.
Format
show lldp config
Mode
CLI L2P
324 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.3 show lldp config chassis

This command shows all LLDP configuration settings concerning the entire
device.
Format
show lldp config chassis
Mode
4.12.4 show lldp config chassis admin-state

Display the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality on this device. If disabled, the
LLDP protocol is inactive but the LLDP MIBs can still be accessed.
Format
show lldp config chassis admin-state
Mode
4.12.5 show lldp config chassis notification-interval

Display the LLDP minimum notification trap interval (unit: seconds).
Format
show lldp config chassis notification-interval
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 325
4.12.6 show lldp config chassis re-init-delay

Display the LLDP configuration's chassis re-initialization delay
(unit: seconds).
Format
show lldp config chassis re-init-delay
Mode
4.12.7 show lldp config chassis tx-delay

Display the LLDP transmit delay (unit: seconds). It indicates the delay
between successive LLDP frame transmissions.
Format
show lldp config chassis tx-delay
Mode
4.12.8 show lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult

Display the LLDP transmit hold multiplier, a time-to-live value expressed as
a multiple of the LLDP Message Tx Interval (tx-interval).
Format
show lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult
Mode
CLI L2P
326 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.9 show lldp config chassis tx-interval

Display the interval (unit: seconds) at which LLDP frames are transmitted on
behalf of this LLDP agent.
Format
show lldp config chassis tx-interval
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 327
4.12.10show lldp config port

This command shows all LLDP configuration settings and states concerning
one or all ports.
Format
show lldp config port <{slot/port|all}>
admin-state | fdb-mode | hm-mode |
max-neighbors | notification | tlv
Mode
admin-state
Display the port's LLDP admin state (if LLDP/IEEE802.1AB frames
will be transmitted and/or received).
fdb-mode
Display the port's LLDP FDB mode.
hm-mode
Display the port's LLDP Hirschmann mode.
.max-neighbors
Display the port's max. no. of LLDP neighbors.
notification
Display the port's LLDP notification (trap) setting.
tlv
Display the port's LLDP TLV settings (they determine which informa-
tion is included in the LLDP frames that are sent). The command is a
group command and will output several lines of data.
CLI L2P
328 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.11show lldp config port tlv

This command shows all LLDP TLV configuration settings (if the given infor-
mation is included in the sent LLDP frames or not) concerning one or all
ports.
Format
show lldp config port <{slot/port|all}> tlv
Mode
inlinepower
Enable or disable the sending of the port's Power over Ethernet capa-
bilities (PoE, IEEE 802.3af).
Note: This command is available for devices supporting PoE.
link-aggregation
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Link Aggregation.
mac-phy-config-state
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of MAC Phy. Cfg. State.
max-frame-size
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Max. Frame Size.
PROFINET IO Status
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO Status.
PROFINET IO Alias
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO Alias.
PROFINET IO MRP
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO MRP.
mgmt-addr
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Management Address.
port-desc
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Port Description.
port-vlan
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Port VLAN.
protocol
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Protocol.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 329
sys-cap
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Capabilities.
sys-desc
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Description.
sys-name
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Name.
vlan-name
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of VLAN Name.
4.12.12show lldp med

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP MED global
configuration.
Format
show lldp med
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Fast Start Repeat Count
Display the Fast Start Repeat Count, e.g. the number of LLDP PDUs
that will be transmitted when the product is enabled.
The range is 1 to 10.
Device class
Display the Device class.
CLI L2P
330 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.13show lldp med interface

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP MED configu-
ration for a specific interface.
Format
show lldp med interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<unit/slot/port>
all
Indicates all valid LLDP interfaces.
Interface
Link
Displays the link status. Value range: Up, Down.
configMED
Displays if confignotification for the Media Endpoint Devices is
Enabled/Disabled.
operMED
Displays if operation for the Media Endpoint Devices is
Enabled/Disabled.
ConfigNotify
Displays the ConfigNotify. Value range: Enabled, Disabled.
TLVsTx
Displays the TLVsTx.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 331
4.12.14show lldp med local-device detail

Use this command to display detailed information about the LLDP MED data
that a specific interface transmits. <unit/slot/port> indicates a specific
physical interface.
Format
show lldp med local-device detail {<slot/port>}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<slot/port>
Interface
Network Policies
Displays the Network Policies.
CLI L2P
332 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.15show lldp med remote-device

Use this command to display the summary information about remote devices
that transmit current LLDP MED data to the system. You can show informa-
tion about LLDP MED remote data received on all valid LLDP interfaces or
on a specific physical interface.
Format
show lldp med remote-device{<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
<slot/port>
all
Indicates all valid LLDP interfaces.
Local Interface
Displays the local interface.
RemoteID
Displays the RemoteID.
Device Class
Displays the Device Class.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 333
4.12.16show lldp med remote-device detail

Use this command to display detailed information about remote devices that
transmit current LLDP MED data to an interface on the system.
Format
show lldp med remote-device detail <slot/port>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Local Interface
Displays the local interface.
4.12.17show lldp remote-data

This command shows all LLDP remote-data settings and states concerning
one or all ports.
Format
show lldp remote-data <{slot/port|all}>
chassis-id | detailed | ether-port-info |
inlinepower | link-aggregation-info |
mgmt-addr | profinetio-port-info |
port-desc | port-id | summary | sys-desc |
sys-name | vlan-info
Mode
chassis-id
Display the remote data's chassis ID only.
detailed
Display remote data in detailed format (i. e., all available data).
Note: most important data is output first (not in alphabetic order of
command names). This is the default command if no specific
command is given.
CLI L2P
334 Release 8.0 05/2013
ether-port-info
Display the remote data's port Ethernet properties only (group com-
mand, outputs: Port Autoneg. Supported, Port Autoneg. Enabled,
Port Autoneg. Advertized Capabilities and Port Operational MAU
Type).
inlinepower
Displays the remote port's Power over Ethernet capabilities (PoE,
IEEE 802.3af). Included are if the remote device is a PSE (Power
Source Device) or a PD (Powered Device), if PoE is supported and if
the power pairs are selectable.
link-aggregation-info
Display the remote data's link aggregation information only (group
command, outputs: Link Agg. Status and Link Agg. Port ID).
mgmt-addr
Display the remote data's management address only.
profinetio-port-info
Display the remote data's Port ProfinetIO properties only.
port-desc
Display the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Port Description.
port-id
Display the remote data's port ID only.
summary
Display remote data in summary format (table with most important
data only, strings will be truncated if necessary, indicated by an
appended '>' character).
sys-desc
Display the remote data's system description only.
sys-name
Display the remote data's system name only.
vlan-info
Display the remote data's VLAN information only (group command,
outputs: Port VLAN ID, Membership VLAN IDs and their respective
names).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 335
4.12.18lldp
Enable/disable the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality on this device. If dis-
abled, the LLDP protocol will become inactive, but the LLDP MIBs can still be
accessed. This command is a shorthand notation for lldp config chas-
sis admin-state {off|on} (see “lldp config chassis admin-state” on
page 337).
The default setting is on.

Format
lldp
Mode
Global Config
U no lldp
Disable the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality on this device.
Format
no lldp
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
336 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.19lldp config chassis admin-state

Configure the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality on this device. If disabled,
the LLDP protocol will become inactive, but the LLDP MIBs can still be
accessed.
D off: Disable the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality.
D on: Enable the LLDP/IEEE802.1AB functionality.
The default setting is on.

Format
lldp config chassis admin-state {off|on}
Mode
Global Config
4.12.20lldp config chassis notification-interval

Configure the LLDP minimum notification interval (the minimum time after a
notification trap has been sent until a new trap can be sent, unit: seconds,
min.: 5 sec., max.: 3600 sec., default: 5 sec.).
Format
lldp config chassis notification-interval
<notification interval>
Mode
Global Config
Notification interval
Configure the LLDP minimum notification interval (the minimum time
after a notification trap has been sent until a new trap can be sent,
unit: seconds, min.: 5 sec., max.: 3600 sec., default: 5 sec.).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 337
4.12.21lldp config chassis re-init-delay

Configure the LLDP re-initialization delay (unit: seconds, min.: 1 sec., max.:
10 sec., default: 2 sec.).
Format
lldp config chassis re-init-delay <re-init delay>
Mode
Global Config
Re-init-delay
Configure the LLDP re-initialization delay (unit:seconds, min.: 1 sec.,
max.: 10 sec., default: 2 sec.).
4.12.22lldp config chassis tx-delay

Configure the LLDP transmit delay, the delay between successive LLDP
frame transmissions (unit: seconds, min.: 1 sec., max.: 8192 sec.,
default: 2 sec.).
Format
lldp config chassis tx-delay <tx delay>
Mode
Global Config
Tx-delay
Configure the LLDP transmit delay, the delay between successive
LLDP frame transmissions (unit: seconds, min.: 1 sec., max.: 8192
sec., default: 2 sec.).
CLI L2P
338 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.23lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult

Configure the LLDP transmit hold multiplier, a time-to-live value expressed
as a multiple of the LLDP Message Tx Interval (tx-interval), min.: 2, max.: 10,
default: 4.
Format
lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult
<tx hold multiplier>
Mode
Global Config
Tx-hold-mult
Configure the LLDP transmit hold multiplier, a time-to-live value
expressed as a multiple of the LLDP Message Tx Interval (tx-interval),
min.: 2, max.: 10, default: 4.
4.12.24lldp chassis tx-interval

Configure the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted on behalf of this
LLDP agent (unit: seconds, min.: 5 sec., max.: 32768 sec., default: 30 sec.)
Format
lldp chassis tx-interval <tx interval>
Mode
Global Config
Tx-interval
Configure the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted on behalf
of this LLDP agent (unit: seconds, min.: 5 sec., max.: 32768 sec.,
default: 30 sec.).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 339
4.12.25clear lldp config all

Clear the LLDP configuration, i. e., set all configurable parameters to default
values (all chassis- as well as port-specific parameters at once).
Note: LLDP Remote data remains unaffected.
Format
clear lldp config all
Mode
Privileged EXEC
4.12.26lldp admin-state
Configure the port's LLDP admin state (if LLDP/IEEE802.1AB frames will be
transmitted to and/or received from the standard IEEE multicast address
01:80:c2:00:00:0e).
The default setting is tx-and-rx.

Format
lldp admin-state <{tx-only|rx-only|tx-and-rx|off}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
340 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.27lldp fdb-mode
Configure the port's LLDP FDB mode.
The default setting is autodetect.

Format
lldp fdb-mode <{lldp-only|mac-only|lldp-and-
mac|autodetect}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.28lldp hm-mode
Configure the port's LLDP Hirschmann mode (if LLDP/IEEE802.1AB frames
will be transmitted to and/or received from the Hirschmann-specific multicast
address 01:80:63:2f:ff:0b).
The default setting is tx-and-rx.

Format
lldp hm-mode <{tx-only|rx-only|tx-and-rx|off}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 341
4.12.29lldp max-neighbors
Configure the port's LLDP max. no. of neighbors (min.: 1, max.: 50,
default: 10).
Format
lldp max-neighbors <1..50>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
342 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.30lldp med
LLDP for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) is an extension to LLDP that
operates between endpoint devices such as IP phones, Voice / Media Gate-
ways, Media Servers, IP Communications Controllers or other VoIP devices
or servers, and network devices such as switches. It specifically provides
support for voice over IP (VoIP) applications. In this purpose, it provides an
additional set of common advertisement messages (TLVs), for capabilities
discovery, network policy, Power over Ethernet, inventory management and
location information.
Use this command to enable MED. By enabling MED, you will be effectively
enabling the transmit and receive function of LLDP.
Default
Enabled
Format
lldp med
Mode
Interface Config
U no lldp med
Use this command to disable MED.
Format
no lldp med
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 343
4.12.31lldp med all

Use this command to configure LLDP-MED on all the ports.
Default
Enabled
Format
lldp med all
Mode
Global Config
4.12.32lldp med confignotification

Use this command to configure all the ports to send the topology change no-
tification.
Default
Disabled
Format
lldp med confignotification
Mode
Interface Config
U no lldp med confignotification

Use this command to disable notifications.
Format
no lldp med confignotification
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
344 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.33lldp med confignotification all

Use this command to configure all the ports to send the topology change
notification.
Default
Disabled
Format
lldp med confignotification all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 345
4.12.34lldp med faststartrepeatcount

Use this command to set the value of the fast start repeat count.
Default
3
Format
lldp med faststartrepeatcount [count]
Mode
Global Config
[count]
The number of LLDP PDUs that will be transmitted when the product
is enabled. The range is 1 to 10.
U no lldp med faststartrepeatcount

Use this command to return to the factory default value.
Format
no lldp med faststartrepeatcount
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
346 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.35lldp med transmit-tlv

Use this command to specify which optional Type Length Values (TLVs) in
the LLDP-MED set will be transmitted in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Data Units (LLDPDUs).
Default
By default, the capabilities and network policy
TLVs are included.
Format
lldp med transmit-tlv [capabilities]
[network-policy]
Mode
Interface Config
capabilities
Include/Exclude LLDP capabilities TLV.
network-policy
Include/Exclude LLDP network policy TLV.
U no lldp med transmit-tlv

Use this command to remove a TLV.
Format
no lldp med transmit-tlv [capabilities]
[network-policy]
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 347
4.12.36lldp med transmit-tlv all

Use this command to specify which optional Type Length Values (TLVs) in
the LLDP MED set will be transmitted in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Data Units (LLDPDUs).
Default
By default, the capabilities and network policy
TLVs are included.
Format
lldp med transmit-tlv all [capabilities]
[network-policy]
Mode
Global Config
capabilities
Include/Exclude LLDP capabilities TLV.
network-policy
Include/Exclude LLDP network policy TLV.
U no lldp med med transmit-tlv all

Use this command to remove a TLV.
Format
no lldp med transmit-tlv all [capabilities]
[network-policy]
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
348 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.37lldp notification
Configure the port's LLDP notification setting (on or off, default: off).
Format
lldp notification <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.38lldp tlv link-aggregation

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Link Aggregation (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv link-aggregation <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.39lldp tlv mac-phy-config-state

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of MAC Phy. Cfg. State (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv mac-phy-config-state <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 349
4.12.40lldp tlv max-frame-size

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Max. Frame Size (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv max-frame-size <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.41lldp tlv mgmt-addr

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Management Address (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv mgmt-addr <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.42lldp tlv pnio

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO Status (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv pnio <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
350 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.43lldp tlv pnio-alias

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO Alias (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv pnio-alias <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.44lldp tlv pnio-mrp

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PROFINET IO MRP (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv pnio-mrp <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.45lldp tlv port-desc

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Port Description (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv port-desc <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 351
4.12.46lldp tlv port-vlan

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Port VLAN (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv port-vlan <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.47lldp tlv gmrp

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of GMRP (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv gmrp <{off|on (on)}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.48lldp tlv igmp

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of IGMP (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv igmp <{off|on (on)}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
352 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.49lldp tlv portsec

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PortSec (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv portsec <{off|on (on)}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.50lldp tlv ptp

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of PTP (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv ptp <{off|on (on)}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.51lldp tlv protocol

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of Protocol (on or off, default: on).
Format
lldp tlv protocol <{off|on (on)}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 353
4.12.52lldp tlv sys-cap

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Capabilities (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv sys-cap <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.53lldp tlv sys-desc

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Description (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv sys-desc <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.54lldp tlv sys-name

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of System Name (on or off,
default: on).
Format
lldp tlv sys-name <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
354 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.12.55lldp tlv vlan-name

Configure the port's LLDP TLV inclusion of VLAN Name.
Format
lldp tlv vlan-name <{off|on}>
Mode
Interface Config
4.12.56name
Set or remove a descriptive name for the current interface
(physical ports only).
Format
name <descriptive name>
Mode
Interface Config
<descriptive name>
Enter a descriptive name for the current interface (physical ports
only). Max. length is 20 characters.
Note: If it contains blanks or exclamation marks (!), enclose it in quo-
tation marks ("). The description itself must not contain any quotation
marks (' or "), question marks (?) or backslashes (\).
U no name
Delete the descriptive name for the current interface (physical ports
only).
Format
no name
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 355
4.13 SNTP - Simple Network Time Protocol
4.13 SNTP - Simple Network

Time Protocol
These commands show and configure the SNTP parameters.
4.13.1 show sntp

This command shows all SNTP settings.
Format
show sntp
Mode
SNTP Server Anycast Address
Show SNTP Server Anycast Address (a.b.c.d).
SNTP Server Anycast Transmit Interval
Show SNTP Anycast Transmit Interval (in seconds).
SNTP Server Anycast VLAN
Show SNTP Server Anycast VLAN.
SNTP Server Disable if Timesource is local
Show SNTP Server Disable if Timesource is local (Yes/No).
SNTP Client Accepts Broadcasts
Show SNTP Client Accepts Broadcasts (Yes/No).
SNTP Client Disable after Synchronization
Show SNTP Client Disable after Synchronization (Yes/No).
SNTP Client Request Interval
Show SNTP Client Request Interval (in seconds).
CLI L2P
356 Release 8.0 05/2013
SNTP Client Local Time Offset

Show SNTP Client Local Time Offset (in minutes).
SNTP Client Primary Server IP Address
Show SNTP Client Primary Server IP Address (a.b.c.d).
SNTP Client Secondary Server IP Address
Show SNTP Client Secondary Server IP Address (a.b.c.d).
SNTP Client Threshold to Server Time
Show SNTP Client Threshold to Server Time (in milliseconds).
SNTP Operation Global
Show SNTP Operation Global (Disabled or Enabled).
SNTP Operation Server
Show SNTP Operation Server (Disabled or Enabled).
SNTP Operation Client
Show SNTP Operation Client (Disabled or Enabled).
SNTP Status
Show SNTP Status
SNTP Time
Show SNTP Time (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss).
SNTP System Time
Show SNTP system Time (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 357
4.13.2 show sntp anycast

This command shows all SNTP anycast configuration settings.
Format
show sntp anycast [address|transmit-interval|vlan]
Mode
address
Show the SNTP server's anycast destination IP Address.
transmit-interval
Show the SNTP Server's interval for sending Anycast messages
(unit: seconds).
vlan
Show the SNTP server's Anycast VLAN ID (used for sending Anycast
messages).
4.13.3 show sntp client

This command shows all SNTP anycast configuration settings.
Format
show sntp client [accept-broadcast|
disable-after-sync|
offset|
request-interval|
server<primary|secondary>|
threshold]
Mode
accept-broadcast
Show if the SNTP Client accepts SNTP broadcasts.
CLI L2P
358 Release 8.0 05/2013
disable-after-sync
Show if the SNTP client will be disabled once it is synchronized to the
time server.
offset
Show the local time's offset (in minutes) with respect to UTC (positive
values for locations east of Greenwich).
request-interval
Show the SNTP Client's request interval (unit: seconds).
server
Show the SNTP Client's server IP addresses.
server primary
Show the SNTP Client's primary server IP addresses.
server secondary
Show the SNTP Client's redundant server IP addresses.
server threshold
Show the SNTP Client's threshold in milliseconds.
4.13.4 show sntp operation

This command shows if the SNTP function is enabled or disabled.
Format
show sntp operation
Mode
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 359
4.13.5 show sntp server

This command shows the SNTP Server's configuration parameters.
Format
show sntp server [disable-if-local]
Mode
disable-if-local
Show if the server will be disabled if the time is running from the local
clock and not synchronized to an external time source.
4.13.6 show sntp status

This command shows the SNTP state, synchronization and error messages.
Format
show sntp status
Mode
CLI L2P
360 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.13.7 show sntp time

This command shows time and date.
Format
show sntp time [sntp|system]
Mode
sntp
Show the current SNTP date and UTC time.
system
Show the local system's current date and time.
4.13.8 no sntp
This command disables sntp.
Format
no sntp
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 361
4.13.9 sntp anycast address

Set the SNTP server's anycast destination IP Address,
default: 0.0.0.0 (none).
Format
sntp anycast address <IPAddress>
Mode
Global Config
U no sntp anycast address

Set the SNTP server's anycast destination IP Address to 0.0.0.0.
Format
no sntp anycast address
Mode
Global Config
4.13.10sntp anycast transmit-interval

The transmit interval in seconds, default: 120.
Format
sntp anycast transmit-interval <1-3600>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
362 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.13.11sntp anycast vlan

Set the SNTP server's Anycast VLAN ID used for sending Anycast
messages, default: 1.
Format
sntp anycast vlan <1-4042>
Mode
Global Config
4.13.12sntp client accept-broadcast

Enable/Disable that the SNTP Client accepts SNTP broadcasts.
Format
sntp client accept-broadcast <on | off>
Mode
Global Config
U no sntp accept-broadcast
Disable the SNTP Client accepts SNTP broadcasts.
Format
no sntp client accept-broadcast
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 363
4.13.13sntp client disable-after-sync

If this option is activated, the SNTP client disables itself once it is synchro-
nised to a server.
Format
sntp client disable-after-sync <on | off>
Mode
Global Config
off
Do not disable SNTP client when it is synchronised to a time server.
on
Disable SNTP client as soon as it is synchronised to a time server.
4.13.14sntp client offset

The offset between UTC and local time in minutes, default: 60.
Format
sntp client offset <-1000 to 1000>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
364 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.13.15sntp client request-interval

The synchronization interval in seconds, default: 30.
Format
sntp client request-interval <1-3600>
Mode
Global Config
4.13.16no sntp client server

Disable the SNTP client servers.
Format
no sntp client server
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 365
4.13.17sntp client server primary

Set the SNTP Client's primary server IP Address, default: 0.0.0.0 (none).
Format
sntp client server primary <IP-Address>
Mode
Global Config
U no sntp client server primary

Disable the primary SNTP client server.
Format
no sntp client server primary
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
366 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.13.18sntp client server secondary

Set the SNTP Client's secondary server IP Address, default: 0.0.0.0 (none).
Format
sntp client server secondary <IP-Address>
Mode
Global Config
U no sntp client server secondary

Disable the secondary SNTP client server.
Format
no sntp client server secondary
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 367
4.13.19sntp client threshold

With this option you can reduce the frequency of time alterations. Enter this
threshold as a positive integer value in milliseconds. The switch obtains the
server timer as soon as the deviation to the server time is above this
threshold.
Format
sntp client threshold <milliseconds>
Mode
Global Config
Milliseconds
Enter the allowed deviation to the server time as a
positive integer value in milliseconds.
U no sntp client threshold

Disable the sntp client threshold.
Format
no sntp client threshold
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
368 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.13.20sntp operation
Enable/Disable the SNTP function.
Format
sntp operation <on | off> |
client { on | off } |
server { on | off }
Mode
Global Config
client
Enable or disable SNTP Client.
server
Enable or disable SNTP Server.
U no sntp operation
Disable the SNTP Client and Server.
Format
no sntp operation
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 369
4.13.21sntp server disable-if-local

With this option enabled, the switch disables the SNTP Server Function if it
is not synchronized to a time server itself.
Format
sntp server disable-if-local <on | off>
Mode
Global Config
off
Enable the SNTP Server even if it is not synchronized to a time server
itself.
on
Disable the SNTP Server if it is not synchronized to a time server
itself.
4.13.22sntp time system

Set the current sntp time.
Format
sntp time system <YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
370 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14 PTP - Precision Time Protocol
4.14 PTP - Precision Time

Protocol
These commands show and configure the PTP (IEEE 1588) parameters.
Note: The operation parameter is available for all devices.

All other parameters are additionally available for MS20/MS30, MACH1040,
MACH104 and PowerMICE.
4.14.1 show ptp

This command shows all PTP settings.
Format
show ptp
Mode
PTP (Global) Operation
Show the global PTP (IEEE 1588) operation setting. This field shows
if PTP is enabled/disabled on this device.
PTP (Global) Clock Mode

Show which PTP clock mode is currently configured.
Possible values: v1-simple-mode, v2-simple-mode,
v1-boundary-clock, v2-boundary-clock-onestep,
v2-boundary-clock-twostep, v2-transparent-clock}
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 371
PTP (Global) Sync. Upper Bound

Show the upper bound for the PTP clock synchronization status
(unit: nanoseconds).
Possible values: 31..1000000000 nsec
PTP (Global) Sync. Lower Bound
Show the lower bound for the PTP clock synchronization status
Possible values: 0..999999999 nsec
PTP Preferred Master

Show if the local switch shall be regarded as a preferred master clock
or not.
Possible values: False, True
PTP Subdomain Name
Show the PTP subdomain name.
Possible values: Up to 16 characters from ASCII hex value 0x21 (!)
up to and including hex value 0x7e (~).
PTP Sync. Interval
Show the configured Precision Time Protocol sync interval.
The sync interval is the interval (in seconds) between successive
sync messages issued by a master clock.
Possible values: sec-1, sec-2, sec-8, sec-16, sec-64
PTP Status, Is Synchronized

Show if the device is synchronized (true or false).
Possible values: False, True
PTP Status, Offset From Master
Show the device’s offset from the master (unit: nanoseconds), i.e. the
deviation of the local clock from the reference clock.
PTP Status, Max. Offset Absolute
Show the device’s maximum offset absolute (unit: nanoseconds).
PTP Status, Delay To Master
Show the device’s delay to the master (unit: nanoseconds), i.e. the
single signal runtime between the local device and reference clock.
CLI L2P
372 Release 8.0 05/2013
PTP Status, Grandmaster UUID

Show grandmaster Universally Unique IDentifier, i.e. the MAC
address of the grandmaster clock (Unique Universal Identifier).
Possible values: 32 hexadecimal numbers
(hh hh hh hh hh hh hh hh).
PTP Status, Parent UUID
Show parent Universally Unique IDentifier, i.e. the MAC address of
the master clock with which the local time is directly synchronized.
Possible values: 32 hexadecimal numbers
(hh hh hh hh hh hh hh hh).
PTP Status, Clock Stratum
Show the qualification of the local clock.
PTP Status, Clock Identifier
Show the device’s clock properties (e.g. accuracy, epoch, etc.).
PTPv1 Boundary Clock Ports

Show port number, operation status, burst status of the PTPv1
Boundary Clock Ports.
Port
Show the number of the interface (in slot/port notation).
Operation
Show if sending and receiving / processing PTP synchronization
messages is enabled or disabled on the device.
Burst
Show the status of the burst feature for synchronization running
during a synchronization interval.
Status
Show the ports PTP status.
Possible values: Initializing, faulty, disabled, listening,
pre-master, master, passive, uncalibrated, slave.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 373
4.14.2 show ptp configuration

This command shows the configured PTP (IEEE 1588) values depending on
the currently configured clock mode.
Format
show ptp configuration
Mode
PTP (Global) Clock Mode
Show which PTP clock mode is currently configured.
PTP (Global) Sync. Upper Bound
Show the upper bound for the PTP clock synchronization status
PTP (Global) Sync. Lower Bound
Show the lower bound for the PTP clock synchronization status
4.14.3 show ptp operation

Show the global PTP (IEEE 1588) operation setting (the administrative set-
ting).This command shows if PTP is enabled/disabled on this device.
Format
show ptp operation
Mode
CLI L2P
374 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.4 show ptp port

This command shows the PTP (IEEE 1588) port configuration settings
depending on the currently configured clock mode.
Format
show port [<slot/port>|all]
Mode
<slot/port>
Show the port-related PTP (IEEE 1588) settings for the given port.
all
Show the port-related PTP (IEEE 1588) settings for all ports.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 375
4.14.5 show ptp status

This command shows the device´s global PTP (IEEE 1588) status (the oper-
ating states).
Format
show ptp status
Mode
PTP Status, Is Synchronized
Show if the device is synchronized (true or false).
PTP Status, Offset From Master
Show the device’s offset from the master (unit: nanoseconds).
PTP Status, Max. Offset Absolute
Show the device’s maximum offset absolute (unit: nanoseconds).
PTP Status, Delay To Master
Show the device’s delay to the master (unit: nanoseconds).
PTP Status, Grandmaster UUID
Show grandmaster Universally Unique IDentifier
(32 hexadecimal numbers).
PTP Status, Parent UUID
Show parent Universally Unique IDentifier
(32 hexadecimal numbers).
PTP Status, Clock Stratum
Show the device’s clock stratum.
PTP Status, Clock Identifier
Show the device’s clock identifier.
CLI L2P
376 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.6 ptp clock-mode

Configure the Precision Time Protocol (PTP, IEEE 1588) clock mode. If the
clock mode is changed, PTP will be initialized. The default is "disable"
Format
ptp clock-mode {v1-simple-mode
|v2-simple-mode
|v1-boundary-clock
|v2-boundary-clock-onestep
|v2-boundary-clock-twostep
|v2-transparent-clock}
Mode
Global Config
v1-simple-mode
Set the clock mode to 'v1 Simple Mode'. This is a client only mode
without hardware support. The device only accepts PTPv1 sync mes-
sages and sets the time directly. No BMC algorithm will run.
v2-simple-mode
Set the clock mode to 'v2 Simple Mode'. This is a client only mode
without hardware support. The device only accepts PTPv2 sync (or
follow_up) messages and sets the time directly. No BMC algorithm
will run.
v1-boundary-clock
Set the clock mode to 'v1 Boundary Clock'. This specifies the mode
as described in the IEEE1588 standard.
v2-boundary-clock-onestep
Set the clock mode to 'v2 Boundary Clock one-step'. This specifies
the boundary-clock mode as described in the IEEE1588-2008
(PTPv2) standard. The precise timestamp is inserted directly into the
sync-packet (one-step Mode).
v2-boundary-clock-twostep
Set the clock mode to 'v2 Boundary Clock two-step'. This specifies
the boundary-clock mode as described in the IEEE1588-2008
(PTPv2) standard. The precise timestamp is transmitted via a follow-
up packet (two-step Mode).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 377
v2-transparent-clock
Set the clock mode to 'v2 Transparent Clock'. This specifies the trans-
parent-clock mode (one-step) as described in the IEEE1588-2008
(PTPv2) standard.
4.14.7 ptp operation

Enable or disable the Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588).
The default is "disable"
Format
ptp operation {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
disable
Disable the Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588).
enable
Enable the Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588).
4.14.8 ptp sync-lower-bound

Configure the lower bound for the PTP clock synchronization
(unit: nanoseconds, min.: 0, max.: 999999999 (109-1), default: 30).
Note: The lower bound always has to be smaller than the upper bound.
Format
ptp sync-lower-bound <0-999999999>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
378 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.9 ptp sync-upper-bound

Configure the upper bound for the PTP clock synchronization
(unit: nanoseconds, min.: 31, max.: 1000000000 (109), default: 5000).
Note: The upper bound always has to be larger than the lower bound.
Format
ptp sync-upper-bound <31-1000000000>
Mode
Global Config
4.14.10ptp v1 preferred-master
Configure the PTPv1 (IEEE1588-2002) specific settings.
Specify if the local switch shall be regarded as a preferred master clock (i. e.,
if it will remain master in the presence of disconnection or connection of other
clocks).
Format
ptp v1 preferred-master {true|false}
Mode
Global Config
true
The local switch shall be regarded as a preferred master clock.
false
The local switch shall not be regarded as a preferred master clock.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 379
4.14.11ptp v1 re-initialize
Re-initialize the clocks in the local subdomain with the currently configured
settings. Changes in the subdomain name or the sync interval will only take
effect after this command.
Format
ptp v1 re-initialize
Mode
Global Config
4.14.12ptp v1 subdomain-name
Enter a Precision Time Protocol subdomain name. The default is "_DFLT".
Note: Changes are only applied after the 're-initialize' command or after a re-
boot if the configuration was saved.
Format
ptp v1 subdomain-name <subdomain name>
Mode
Global Config
<subdomain name>
Enter a PTP subdomain name (up to 16 characters). Valid characters
range from hex value 0x21 (!) up to and including hex value 0x7e (~).
Enter special characters (\, !, ', ", ?) by preceding them with the
escape character (\), e. g., as \\, \!, \', \", \?. The subdomain name
must not be empty. The default is "_DFLT".
CLI L2P
380 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.13ptp v1 sync-interval
Configure the Precision Time Protocol sync interval. The sync interval is the
interval (in seconds) between successive sync messages issued by a master
clock.
Valid values are: sec-1, sec-2, sec-8, sec-16, and sec-64. Default is sec-2.
Note: Changes are only applied after the 're-initialize' command or after a
reboot if the configuration was saved.
Format
ptp v1 sync-interval {sec-1|sec-2|sec-8|sec-16|
sec-64}
Mode
Global Config
sec-1
Set the PTP sync interval to sec-1 (1 sec).
sec-2
sec-8
sec-16
sec-64
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 381
4.14.14ptp v2bc priority1

Configure the PTPv2 Boundary Clock (IEEE1588-2008) specific settings.
Configure the priority1 value (0..255) for the BMC as described in IEEE1588-
2008.
Format
ptp v2bc priority1 <0-255>
Mode
Global Config
4.14.15ptp v2bc priority2

Configure the priority2 value (0..255) for the BMC as described in IEEE1588-
2008.
Format
ptp v2bc priority2 <0-255>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
382 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.16ptp v2bc domain

Configure the domain number (0..255) as described in IEEE1588-2008.
Format
ptp v2bc domain <0-255>
Mode
Global Config
4.14.17ptp v2bc utc-offset

Configure the current UTC offset in seconds.
Format
ptp v2bc utc-offset <seconds>
Mode
Global Config
4.14.18ptp v2bc utc-offset-valid

Configure the UTC offset valid flag.
Format
ptp v2bc utc-offset-valid {true|false}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 383
4.14.19ptp v2bc vlan

Use this command to configure the VLAN in which PTP packets are send.
With a value of none all packets are send untagged.
Format
ptp v2bc vlan {none | <0-4042>}
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.20ptp v2bc vlan-priority

Use this command to configure the VLAN priority.
Format
ptp v2bc vlan-priority <0-7>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
384 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.21ptp v1 burst
Enable or disable the burst feature for synchronization runs during a
synchronization interval. Default is disable.
Format
ptp v1 burst {enable|disable}
Mode
Interface Config
enable
During a synchronization interval, there are 2 to 8 synchronization
runs. This permits faster synchronization when the network load is
high.
disable
During a synchronization interval, there is only one synchronization
run.
4.14.22ptp v1 operation
Enable or disable the sending and receiving / processing of PTP
synchronization messages. Default is enable.
Format
ptp v1 operation {enable|disable}
Mode
Interface Config
enable
Port sends and receives/ processes PTP synchronization messages.
disable
Port blocks PTP synchronization messages.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 385
4.14.23ptp v2bc operation

Enable or disable the sending and receiving / processing of PTP synchroni-
zation messages.
Format
ptp v2bc operation {disable|enable}
Mode
Interface Config
enable
disable
4.14.24ptp v2bc announce-interval

Configure the Announce Interval in seconds {1|2|4|8|16}.
Format
ptp v2bc announce-interval {1|2|4|8|16}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
386 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.25ptp v2bc announce-timeout

Configure the Announce Receipt Timeout (2..10).
Format
ptp v2bc announce-timeout <2-10>
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.26ptp v2bc sync-interval

Configure the Sync Interval in seconds {0.5|1|2}.
Format
ptp v2bc sync-interval {0.25|0.5|1|2}
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.27ptp v2bc delay-mechanism

Configure the delay mechanism {e2e|p2p|disabled} of the transparent-clock.
Format
ptp v2bc delay-mechanism {e2e|p2p|disabled}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 387
4.14.28ptp v2bc pdelay-interval

Configure the Peer Delay Interval in seconds {1|2|4|8|16|32}.
This interval is used if delay-mechanism is set to p2p.
Format
ptp v2bc pdelay-interval {1|2|4|8|16|32}
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.29ptp v2bc network-protocol

Configure the network-protocol {ieee802_3|udp_ipv4} of the
transparent-clock.
Format
ptp v2bc network-protocol {ieee802_3 | udp_ipv4}
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.30ptp v2bc v1-compatibility-mode

Set the PTPv1 Hardware compatibility mode {auto|on|off}.
Format
ptp v2bc v1-compatibility-mode {auto|on|off}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
388 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.31ptp v2bc asymmetry

Specifies the asymmetrie in nanoseconds of the link connected to this port
{+-1000000000}.
Format
ptp v2bc asymmetry <value in ns>
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.32ptp v2tc asymmetry

Specifies the asymmetrie in nanoseconds of the link connected to this port
{+-1000000000}.
Format
ptp v2tc asymmetry <value in ns>
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.33ptp v2tc delay-mechanism

Configure the PTPv2 Transparent Clock (IEEE1588-2008) specific settings.
Configure the delay mechanism {e2e|p2p|disabled} of the transparent-
clock.
Format
ptp v2tc delay-mechanism {e2e|p2p}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 389
4.14.34ptp v2tc management

Enable or disable the management of the transparent-clock (disable for fast
packet rates).
Format
ptp v2tc management {enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
4.14.35ptp v2tc multi-domain-mode

Enable or disable the transparent-clock for one (primary-domain) or all do-
main numbers.
Format
ptp v2tc multi-domain-mode {enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
390 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.36ptp v2tc network-protocol

Configure the network-protocol {ieee802_3|udp_ipv4} of the transparent-
clock.
Format
ptp v2tc network-protocol {ieee802_3|udp_ipv4}
Mode
Global Config
4.14.37ptp v2tc operation

Enable or disable the sending and receiving/ processing of PTP synchroni-
zation messages.
Format
ptp v2tc operation {disable|enable}
Mode
Interface Config
enable
disable
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 391
4.14.38ptp v2tc pdelay-interval

Configure the Peer Delay Interval in seconds {1|2|4|8|16|32}. This interval is
used if delay-mechanism is set to p2p.
Format
ptp v2tc pdelay-interval {1|2|4|8|16|32}
Mode
Interface Config
4.14.39ptp v2tc primary-domain

Configure the primary-domain {for syntonization} of the transparent-clock.
Format
ptp v2tc primary-domain <0-255>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
392 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.40ptp v2tc profile
Note: This command is available for the devices of the MACH104,

MACH1040, PowerMICE and MS20/MS30 family.
Use this command to configure the PTP v2TC parameters to match the
default of a profile.
Format
ptp v2tc profile
{ power | default-e2e | default-p2p }
Mode
Global Config
default-e2e
Configure the PTP v2TC parameters to match the default of a profile
(end-to-end transparent clock).
default-p2p
(peer-to-peer transparent clock).
power
(power profile C37.238).
4.14.41ptp v2tc syntonization

Enable or disable the syntonization of the transparent-clock.
Format
ptp v2tc syntonization {enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 393
4.14.42ptp v2tc vlan

Use the command to configure the VLAN in which PTP packets are send.
With a value of none all packets are send untagged.
Format
ptp v2tc vlan {none | <0-4042>}
Mode
Global Config
4.14.43ptp v2tc power-tlv-check
Note: This command is available for the devices of the MACH104,

MACH1040, PowerMICE and MS20/MS30 family.
Use the command to configure the Power TLV Check.
Default
Disable
Format
ptp v2tc power-tlv-check {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
enable
Only announce messages including the TLVs specified in the power
profile (C37.238) are accepted for syntonization.
disable
Disable v2tc power-tlv-check.
CLI L2P
394 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.14.44ptp v2tc vlan-priority

Use the command to configure the VLAN priority of tagged ptp packets.
Format
ptp v2tc vlan-priority <0-7>
Mode
Global Config
4.14.45ptp v2tc sync-local-clock

Use the command to enable or disable synchronisation of the local clock
(only valid if syntonization is enabled).
Format
ptp v2tc sync-local-clock {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 395
4.15 PoE - Power over Ethernet
These commands show and configure the Power over Ethernet (IEEE
802.3af) parameters.
4.15.1 show inlinepower

This command shows global Inline Power settings PoE.
Format
show inlinepower
Mode
4.15.2 show inlinepower port

This command shows the configuration settings and states per port.
Format
show inlinepower port [<slot/port> | all]
Mode
CLI L2P
396 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.15.3 inlinepower (Global Config)

Configure the global Inline Power parameters.
Format
inlinepower {admin-mode {disable|enable} |
trap {disable|enable} | threshold <1-99> |
fast-startup {enable|disable} }
Mode
Global Config
admin-mode
Configure the global Inline Power administrative setting (enable or
disable, default: enable).
trap
Configure the Inline Power notification (trap) setting (enable or dis-
able, default: disable).
threshold
Configure the Inline Power notification (trap) threshold (unit: percent
of maximum rated power, valid range: 1-99, default: 90).
fast-startup
Configure the Inline Power to be enabled at the beginning of the start
phase (enable or disable, default: disable).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 397
4.15.4 inlinepower (Interface Config)

Configure the portrelated Inline Power parameters.
Note: The interface name you enter in the name-command.
Format
inlinepower {admin-mode {disable|enable} |
priority {critical|high|low} }
Mode
Interface Config
admin-mode
Configure the port-related Inline Power administrative setting (enable
or disable, default: enable).
priority
Configure the Inline Power priority for this port. In case of power scar-
city, inline power on ports configured with the lowest priority is
dropped first. Possible values are: critical, high or low, default: low.
The highest priority is critical.
Note: This parameter is available for MACH1000, MACH4000 and
devices which support Power over Ethernet Plus (MACH104-16TX-
PoEP devices and MACH102 devices with media module M1-8TP-
RJ45 PoE).
4.15.5 clear inlinepower

Reset the Inline Power parameters to default settings.
Format
clear inlinepower
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
398 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.16 PoE+ - Power over Ethernet Plus
4.16 PoE+ - Power over Ethernet

Plus
Additionally to the PoE (Power over Ethernet) commands, these commands

show and configure the Power over Ethernet Plus (IEEE 802.3at)
parameters.
Note: PoE+ is available for:

- MACH104-16TX-PoEP devices
- MACH 102 devices with media module M1-8TP-RJ45 PoEP
4.16.1 show inlinepower slot

This command shows the PoE+ configuration settings and states per slot.
Format
show inlinepower slot [<slot> | all]
Mode
Slot
For MACH102 devices with M1-8TP-RJ45 PoEP media modules:
Slot = Slot number of the PoE+ module (valid range: 1 - 2)
For MACH104-16TX-PoEP devices: Slot = 1
Nominal Power
Shows the configured nominal power budget which the device
provides for the PoE+ ports of the PoE+ module.
Maximum Power
Shows the nominal power which the device provides for the PoE+
ports of the PoE+ module (valid range: 0 - 248 W).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 399
Reserved Power
Shows the maximum power which the device provides for all PoE+
devices together which are connected to the PoE+ module, based on
their classification.
Delivered Power
Shows the current demand for power on all PoE+ ports of the module
(valid range: 0 - 248 W).
Send Traps
Shows, if the function is enabled/disabled. If send traps is enabled,
the device will send a trap if the power threshold exceeds or falls
below the power limit or if the PoE+ power supply is switched on/off
on one or more ports.
Power Threshold
Power threshold in per cent of the nominal power. If the power is
exceeding/falling below this threshold, the device will send a trap.
4.16.2 inlinepower budget slot

Configure the available power budget per slot in Watts.
Format
inlinepower budget slot <slot> <0..1000>
Mode
Global Config
Slot
CLI L2P
400 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.16.3 inlinepower threshold slot

Configure the usage power threshold expressed in per cents for comparing
the measured power for this slot and initiating an alarm if the threshold is
exceeded.
Format
inlinepower threshold slot <slot> <0..99>
Mode
Global Config
Slot
4.16.4 inlinepower trap slot

Configure the alarm that is send if the configured threshold for this slot is ex-
ceeded.
Format
inlinepower trap slot <slot> {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
Slot
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 401
4.17 Port monitor
4.17 Port monitor
These commands show and configure the port monitor parameters.
The port monitor feature monitors certain port (or global) states or changes
and performs a certain action, when the specified condition occurs.
Using this commands, you can disable a port and send a trap (see "port ad-
min shutdown").
Disabling a port by condition will not modify the configuration and therefore
not keep the port in disabled state after reload/reboot.
To enable the action if a port state occurs

D enable the port monitor globally,
D enable the port monitor on the port,
D configure condition(s) that is (are) performed in port state on a port and
D an action that is performed on that port, when the condition complies.
The condition can be link flapping or CRC/Fragments error, an action can be
sending a trap or disabling that port (and send a trap).
If a port was disabled by the Port-Monitor the port can be enabled again with
a port monitor reset command (see “port-monitor reset”).
CLI L2P
402 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.1 show port-monitor

Use this command to display the global Port Monitor settings.
Format
show port-monitor
Mode
Global Config
Port Monitor
Display if Port Monitor function is enabled or disabled.
Condition crc-fragment interval (seconds)
Display the condition of the CRC fragment interval in seconds.
Condition crc-fragment count
Display the condition of the CRC fragment count.
Condition link flap interval (seconds)
Display the condition of the link flap interval in seconds.
Condition link flap count
Display the condition of the link flap count.
Condition overload-detect interval (seconds)
Note: This command is available for the MACH1040 and MACH104
devices.
Display the condition of the overload-detect interval in seconds.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 403
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.2 show port-monitor <slot/port>

Use this command to display the Port Monitor details for the port.
Format
show port-monitor <slot/port>
Mode
Global Config
Port Monitor
Display if Port Monitor is enabled or disabled.
Link Flap
Display if Link Flap is enabled or disabled.
Crc-Fragment
Display if CRC Fragment is enabled or disabled.
Overload detection
devices.
Display the condition of the overload-detection state.
Possible values: Enabled, Disabled.
Active Condition
Display the active condition for the port.
Possible values: Link-Flap, None.
Action
Display the action (disable port or send trap) to be triggered on the
port. Possible values: Disable-Port, Trap-Only.
Port Oper State
Display the link state of the port. Possible values: Up, Down.
CLI L2P
404 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.3 show port-monitor brief

Use this command to display the Port Monitor brief summary.
Format
show port-monitor brief
Mode
Global Config
Intf
Display the number of the interface (slot/port).
Admin Mode
Display if Port Monitor is enabled or disabled.
Link Flap
Display if Link Flap is enabled or disabled.
Crc Fragment
Display if CRC Fragment is enabled or disabled.
Overload detection
devices.
Display the condition of the overload-detection state.
Possible values: Enabled, Disabled.
Active Condition
Display the active condition for the port.
Possible values: Link-Flap, None.
Action
Display the action (disable port or send trap) to be triggered on the
port. Possible values: Disable-Port, Trap-Only.
Port Oper State
Display the link state of the port. Possible values: Up, Down.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 405
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.4 show port-monitor crc-fragment

Use this command to display the CRC fragment counter.
Format
show port-monitor crc-fragment <slot/port>
Mode
Global Config
<slot/port>
Display the Port Monitor interface details.
Crc_fragments in last interval
Display the CRC fragments in last interval.
Crc_fragments total
Display the CRC fragments total.
4.17.5 show port-monitor link-flap

Use this command to display the Link Flap counter for the port.
Format
show port-monitor link-flap <slot/port>
Mode
Global Config
<slot/port>
Display the Port Monitor interface details.
Link flaps in last interval
Display the Link flaps in last interval.
Link flaps total
Display the Link flaps total.
CLI L2P
406 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.6 port-monitor (Global Config)

Use this command to enable or disable the Port Monitor globally.
Note: This command does not reset the port disable states.
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor {enable | disable}
Mode
Global Config
4.17.7 port-monitor (Interface Config)

Use this command to enable or disable the Port Monitor on the port.
Note: This command does not reset the port disable states.
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor {enable | disable}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 407
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.8 port-monitor action

Use this command to configure the Port Monitor action (disable a port or send
a trap).
Note: Disable the Port Monitor action will reset the port from port-state.
Default
Enable
Format
port-monitor action {port-disable | trap-only}
Mode
Interface Config
port-disable
Disable the port when the configured Port Monitor condition triggers.
trap-only
Send a trap when the configured Port Monitor condition triggers.
CLI L2P
408 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.9 port-monitor condition overload-detection

polling-interval (Global Config)
Note: This command is available for the MACH104 and MACH1040 devices.
Use this command to configure the polling-interval in seconds for overload-
detection condition.
Default
1
Format
port-monitor condition overload-detection
polling-interval <interval value>
Mode
Global Config
<interval value>
Enter a polling-interval value for overload-detection.
Possible values: 1..20. Default: 1.
4.17.10port-monitor condition overload-detection

(Interface Config)
Use this command to configure the Port Monitor overload-detection settings.
Format
port-monitor condition overload-detection
{ [traffic-type bc | bc+mc | all] |
[threshold-type pps | kbps | link-capacity ] |
[lower-threshold <threshold value>] |
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 409
4.17 Port monitor
[upper-threshold <threshold value>] |

{enable | disable}
Mode
Interface Config
traffic-type bc
Define traffic class for overload-detection: Broadcast traffic (bc).
traffic-type bc+mc
Define traffic class for overload-detection:
Broadcast and multicast traffic (bc+mc).
traffic-type all
Define traffic class for overload-detection: All traffic types (all).
threshold-type pps
Define threshold type for overload-detection condition:
Packets per second (pps).
threshold-type kbps
Kilobits per second (kbps).
threshold-type link-capacity
Link capacity percentage (% of the link capacity).
lower-threshold
Define the lower threshold value for overload-condition (packets per
second, kbits or % of the link capacity) for different types of traffic.
<threshold value> Enter a lower-threshold value.
upper-threshold
Define the upper threshold value for overload-condition (packets per
second, kbits or % of the link capacity) for different types of traffic.
<threshold value> Enter a upper-threshold value.
enable
Enable the overload-detection.
disable
Disable the overload-detection.
CLI L2P
410 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.11show port-monitor overload-detection
Use this command to display information about port-monitor overload-detec-
tion for a specific interface.
Default
1
Format
show port-monitor overload-detection <slot/port>
Mode
User EXEC and Privileged EXEC
<slot/port>
Overload-detection traffic type
Display the traffic type for the port monitor overload detection.
Possible values:
bc (broadcast traffic),
bc+mc (broadcast and multicast),
all (all traffic types).
Overload-detection threshold type
Display the threshold type for the port monitor overload detection.
Possible values:
pps (packets per second),
kbps (kilobits per second),
link-capacity (% of the link capacity).
Overload-detection lower threshold
Display the lower threshold for the port monitor overload detection.
Possible values: 0..10000000
Overload-detection upper threshold
Display the upper threshold for the port monitor overload detection.
Possible values: 0..10000000
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 411
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.12port-monitor condition link-flap (Global

Config)
Use this command to configure the Link Flap settings (Link Flap counter and
interval for Link Flap detection).
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor condition link-flap
{count <1-100>| interval <1-180>}
Mode
Global Config
count
Configure the Link Flap counter.
Default: 5. Value range: 1 - 100.
interval
Configure the measure interval in seconds for Link Flap detection.
Default: 10 seconds. Value range: 1 - 180 seconds.
4.17.13port-monitor condition link-flap (Interface

Config)
Use this command to enable or disable Link Flap condition on a port to trigger
an action.
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor condition link-flap {enable | disable}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
412 Release 8.0 05/2013
4.17 Port monitor
4.17.14port-monitor condition crc-fragment (Global

Config)
Use this command to configure the crc-fragment settings (crc-fragment
counter and interval for crc-fragment detection).
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor condition crc-fragment
{count <1-1000000> | interval <5-180>}
Mode
Global Config
count
Configure the crc-fragment counter.
Default: 1,000. Value range: 1 - 1,000,000.
interval
Configure the measure interval in seconds for crc-fragment detection.
Default: 10 seconds. Value range: 5 - 180 seconds.
4.17.15port-monitor condition crc-fragment

(Interface Config)
Use this command to enable or disable crc-fragment settings on a port to
trigger an action.
Default
Disable
Format
port-monitor condition crc-fragment
{enable | disable}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 413
4.17 Port monitor
CLI L2P
414 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching
5 CLI Commands: Switching
This section provides detailed explanation of the Switching commands. The

commands are divided into two functional groups:
D Show commands display spanning tree settings, statistics, and other
information.
D Configuration Commands configure features and options of the switch.
For every configuration command there is a show command that displays
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 415
CLI Commands: Switching
CLI L2P
416 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.1 Spanning Tree Commands
5.1 Spanning Tree Commands
5.1.1 show spanning-tree

This command displays spanning tree settings for the common and internal
spanning tree, when the optional parameter “brief” is not included in the com-
mand. The following details are displayed.
Format
show spanning-tree [brief]
Mode
Spanning Tree Adminmode
Enabled or Disabled
Bridge Priority
Configured value.
Bridge Identifier
The bridge identifier for the CST (CST = Classical Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1d). It is made up using the bridge priority and the base
MAC address of the bridge.
Time Since Topology Change
in seconds
Topology Change Count
Number of times changed.
Topology Change
Boolean value of the Topology Change parameter for the switch indi-
cating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the
common and internal spanning tree.
Designated Root
The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge
priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Root Path Cost
Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and internal
spanning tree.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 417
Root Port Identifier

Identifier of the port to access the Designated Root for the CST.
Root Port Max Age
Derived value
Root Port Bridge Forward Delay
Derived value
Hello Time
Configured value
Bridge Hold Time
Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol
Data Units (BPDUs)
CST Regional Root
Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root. It is made up using the
bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Regional Root Path Cost
Path Cost to the CST Regional Root.
Associated FIDs
List of forwarding database identifiers currently associated with this instance.
Associated VLANs
List of VLAN IDs currently associated with this instance.
CLI L2P
418 Release 8.0 05/2013
U show spanning-tree brief
When the “brief” optional parameter is included, this command displays a

brief overview of the spanning tree settings for the bridge. In this case, the
following details are displayed.
Bridge Priority
Configured value.
Bridge Identifier
The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up
using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Bridge Max Age
Configured value.
Bridge Hello Time
Configured value.
Bridge Forward Delay
Configured value.
Bridge Hold Time
Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol
Data Units (BPDUs)
Rstp Mrp Mode
Rapid spanning tree mrp (Media Redundancy Protocol) mode
(Enabled/Disabled)
Rstp Mrp configuration error
Configuration error in Rapid spanning tree mrp (Media Redundancy
Protocol) (No/Yes)
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 419
5.1.2 show spanning-tree interface

This command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port
within the common and internal spanning tree. The <slot/port> is the desired
switch port. The following details are displayed on execution of the com-
mand.
Format
show spanning-tree interface <slot/port>
Mode
Port mode
Enabled or disabled.
Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared
Time since port was reset, displayed in days, hours, minutes, and
seconds.
STP BPDUs Transmitted
Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent
STP BPDUs Received
Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.
RST BPDUs Transmitted
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent
RST BPDUs Received
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent
MSTP BPDUs Received
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.
CLI L2P
420 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.3 show spanning-tree mst detailed

This command displays settings and parameters for the specified multiple
spanning tree instance. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds
to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance ID. The following de-
tails are displayed.
Format
show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid>
Mode
mstid
Enter a multiple spanning tree instance identifier.
Valid values: 0 - 4094.
MST Instance ID
Valid value: 0
MST Bridge Priority
Valid values: 0-61440 in increments of 4096.
Time Since Topology Change
in seconds
Topology Change Count
Number of times the topology has changed for this multiple spanning
tree instance.
Topology Change in Progress
Value of the Topology Change parameter for the multiple spanning
tree instance.
Designated Root
Identifier of the Regional Root for this multiple spanning tree
instance.
Root Path Cost
Path Cost to the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree
instance
Root Port Identifier
Port to access the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree
instance
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 421
Associated FIDs
List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.
Associated VLANs
List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.
5.1.4 show spanning-tree mst port detailed

This command displays the detailed settings and parameters for a specific
switch port within a particular multiple spanning tree instance. The instance
<mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple span-
ning tree instance. The <slot/port> is the desired switch port.
Format
show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/
port>
Mode
MST Instance ID
Valid value: 0
Port Identifier
Port priority as a two digit hex number followed by the port number as
a two digit hex number.
Port Priority
Decimal number.
Port Forwarding State
Current spanning tree state of this port
Port Role
The port´s current RSTP port role.
Port Path Cost
Configured value of the Internal Port Path Cost parameter
CLI L2P
422 Release 8.0 05/2013
Designated Root
The Identifier of the designated root for this port.
Designated Port Cost
Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port
Designated Bridge
Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port.
Designated Port Identifier
Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this com-
mand displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within
the common and internal spanning tree. The <slot/port> is the desired switch
port. In this case, the following are displayed.
Port Identifier
The port identifier for this port within the CST.
Port Priority
The priority of the port within the CST.
The forwarding state of the port within the CST.
Port Role
The role of the specified interface within the CST.
Port Path Cost
The configured path cost for the specified interface.
Designated Root
Identifier of the designated root for this port within the CST.
Designated Port Cost
Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.
Designated Bridge
The bridge containing the designated port
Designated Port Identifier
Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 423
Topology Change Acknowledgement

Value of flag in next Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU)
transmission indicating if a topology change is in progress for this
port.
Hello Time
The hello time in use for this port.
Edge Port
The configured value indicating if this port is an edge port.
Edge Port Status
The derived value of the edge port status. True if operating as an
edge port; false otherwise.
Point To Point MAC Status
Derived value indicating if this port is part of a point to point link.
CST Regional Root
The regional root identifier in use for this port.
CST Port Cost
The configured path cost for this port.
CLI L2P
424 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.5 show spanning-tree mst port summary

This command displays the settings of one or all ports within the specified
multiple spanning tree instance. The parameter <mstid> indicates a particu-
lar MST instance. The parameter {<slot/port> | all} indicates the desired
switch port or all ports.
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the status
summary is displayed for one or all ports within the common and internal
spanning tree.
Format
show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/
port> | all}
Mode
MST Instance ID
The MST instance associated with this port. Valid value: 0.
Interface
STP Mode
Current STP mode of this port in the specified spanning tree instance.
Type
Currently not used.
The forwarding state of the port in the specified spanning tree
instance
Port Role
The role of the specified port within the spanning tree.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 425
5.1.6 show spanning-tree mst summary

This command displays settings and parameters for the specified multiple
spanning tree instance. The following details are displayed.
Format
show spanning-tree mst summary
Mode
MST Instance ID
Valid value: 0
Associated FIDs
List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.
Associated VLANs
List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.
CLI L2P
426 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.7 show spanning-tree summary

This command displays spanning tree settings and parameters for the
switch. The following details are displayed on execution of the command.
Format
show spanning-tree summary
Mode
Spanning Tree Adminmode
Enabled or disabled.
Spanning Tree Version
Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1Q-2005,
IEEE 802.1D-2004) based upon the Force Protocol Version
parameter
Configuration Name
Configured name.
Configuration Revision Level
Configured value.
Configuration Digest Key
Calculated value.
Configuration Format Selector
Configured value.
MST Instances
List of all multiple spanning tree instances configured on the switch
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 427
5.1.8 show spanning-tree vlan

This command displays the association between a VLAN and a multiple
spanning tree instance. The <vlanid> corresponds to an existing
VLAN ID (1-4042).
Format
show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>
Mode
vlanid
Enter a VLAN identifier (1 - 4042).
VLAN Identifier
The VLANs associated with the selected MST instance.
Associated Instance
Identifier for the associated multiple spanning tree instance or "CST"
if associated with the common and internal spanning tree
CLI L2P
428 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.9 spanning-tree
This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree
This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to disabled.
While disabled, the spanning-tree configuration is retained and can be
changed, but is not activated.
Format
no spanning-tree
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 429
5.1.10 spanning-tree auto-edgeport

This command specifies that this port is an Edge Port within the common and
internal spanning tree. This will allow this port to transition to Forwarding
State without delay.
Format
spanning-tree auto-edgeport
Mode
Interface Config
U no spanning-tree auto-edgeport
This command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the com-
mon and internal spanning tree.
Format
no spanning-tree auto-edgeport
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
430 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.11 spanning-tree bpduguard

This command sets the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) Guard on the
switch to enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree bpduguard
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree bpduguard
This command sets the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) Guard to
disabled.
Format
no spanning-tree bpduguard
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 431
5.1.12 spanning-tree configuration name

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Name for use in identifying
the configuration that this switch is currently using. The <name> is a string of
at most 32 characters.
Default
The base MAC address displayed using hexadecimal notation as
specified in IEEE 802 standard.
Format
spanning-tree configuration name <name>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree configuration name

This command resets the Configuration Identifier Name to its default.
Format
no spanning-tree configuration name
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
432 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.13 spanning-tree configuration revision

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in
identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using. The Configu-
ration Identifier Revision Level is a number in the range of 0 to 65535.
Default
0
Format
spanning-tree configuration revision <0-65535>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree configuration revision

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in
identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using to the
default value, i.e. 0.
Format
no spanning-tree configuration revision
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 433
5.1.14 spanning-tree edgeport

This command specifies that this port is an Edge Port within the common and
internal spanning tree. This will allow this port to transition to Forwarding
State without delay.
Format
spanning-tree edgeport
Mode
Interface Config
U no spanning-tree edgeport
This command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the com-
mon and internal spanning tree.
Format
no spanning-tree edgeport
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
434 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.15 spanning-tree forceversion

This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to a new value.
The Force Protocol Version can be one of the following:
D 802.1d - ST BPDUs are transmitted
(802.1Q-2005 functionality supported)
D 802.1s - ST BPDUs are transmitted
D 802.1w - RST BPDUs are transmitted
Default
802.1w
Format
spanning-tree forceversion
<802.1d | 802.1s | 802.1w>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree forceversion
This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to the default
value, i.e. 802.1w.
Format
no spanning-tree forceversion
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 435
5.1.16 spanning-tree forward-time

This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter to a new value for
the common and internal spanning tree. The forward-time value is in seconds
within a range of 4 to 30, with the value being greater than or equal to
"(Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1".
Default
15
Format
spanning-tree forward-time <4-30>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree forward-time
This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter for the com-
mon and internal spanning tree to the default value, i.e. 15.
Format
no spanning-tree forward-time
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
436 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.17 spanning-tree guard loop

This command enables loop guard and disables root guard guard on an
interface.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree guard loop
Mode
Interface Config
U no spanning-tree guard
This command disables the guard for this port.
Format
no spanning-tree guard
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 437
5.1.18 spanning-tree guard none

This command disables root guard and disables loop guard guard on an
interface.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree guard none
Mode
Interface Config
Format
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
438 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.19 spanning-tree guard root

This command enables root guard and disables loop guard on an interface.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree guard root
Mode
Interface Config
Format
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 439
5.1.20 spanning-tree hello-time

This command sets the Hello Time parameter to a new value for the common
and internal spanning tree. The hellotime <value> is in whole seconds within
a range of 1 to 2 with the value being less than or equal to
"(Bridge Max Age / 2) - 1".
Default
2
Format
spanning-tree hello-time <1-2>
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
U no spanning-tree hello-time
This command sets the Hello Time parameter for the common and
internal spanning tree to the default value, i.e. 2.
Format
no spanning-tree hello-time
Mode
Interface Config
Global Config
CLI L2P
440 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.21 spanning-tree hold-count

This command sets the bridge hold count parameter.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree hold-count <1-40>
Mode
Global Config
<1-40>
Enter the bridge parameter for hold count as an integer in the range
1 - 40.
U no spanning-tree hold-count
This command sets bridge hold count to disabled.
Format
no spanning-tree hold-count
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 441
5.1.22 spanning-tree max-age

This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter to a new value for the
common and internal spanning tree. The max-age value is in seconds within
a range of 6 to 40, with the value being less than or equal to
"2 times (Bridge Forward Delay - 1)".
Default
20
Format
spanning-tree max-age <6-40>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree max-age
This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter for the common and
Format
no spanning-tree max-age
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
442 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.23 spanning-tree max-hops

This command sets the Bridge Max Hops parameter to a new value for the
common and internal spanning tree. The max-hops value is an integer within
a range of 1 to127.
Format
spanning-tree max-hops <1-127>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree max-hops
This command sets the Bridge Max Hops parameter for the common and
Format
no spanning-tree max-age
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 443
5.1.24 spanning-tree mst

This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the mul-
tiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree. If
the <mstid> parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree in-
stance, then the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree in-
stance. If however 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the
<mstid>, then the configurations are performed for the common and internal
spanning tree instance.
This command accepts the value 0 for the mstid, meaning the common and
internal spanning tree.
If the ‘cost’ token is specified, this command sets the path cost for this port
within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal span-
ning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter. The pathcost can
be specified as a number in the range of 1 to 200000000 or auto. If "auto" is
specified, the pathcost value will be set based on Link Speed.
If the ‘port-priority’ token is specified, this command sets the priority for this
port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common and in-
ternal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter. The
port-priority value is a number in the range of 0 to 240 in increments of 16.
Default
cost : auto; external-cost : auto;
port-priority : 128
Format
spanning-tree mst <mstid>
{{cost <1-200000000> | auto } |
{external-cost <1-200000000> | auto } |
port-priority <0-240>}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
444 Release 8.0 05/2013
U no spanning-tree mst
This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the
multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning
tree to the respective default values. If the <mstid> parameter corre-
sponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance, then the configura-
tions are done for that multiple spanning tree instance. If however 0
(defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the con-
figurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree
instance.
This command accepts the value 0 for the mstid, meaning the common
and internal spanning tree.
If the ‘cost’ token is specified, this command sets the path cost for this
port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal
spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter, to the
default value, i.e. a pathcost value based on the Link Speed.
If the ‘port-priority’ token is specified, this command sets the priority for
this port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common
and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parame-
ter, to the default value, i.e. 128.
Format
no spanning-tree mst <mstid> <cost | port-priority>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 445
5.1.25 spanning-tree mst priority

This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree in-
stance. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired ex-
isting multiple spanning tree instance. The priority value is a number within a
range of 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096.
This command accepts the value 0 for the mstid.
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this
command sets the Bridge Priority parameter to a new value for the common
and internal spanning tree. The bridge priority value again is a number within
a range of 0 to 61440. The twelve least significant bits will be masked
according to the 802.1s specification. This will cause the priority to be
rounded down to the next lower valid priority.
Default
32768
Format
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <0-61440>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree mst priority

This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning
tree instance to the default value, i.e. 32768. The instance <mstid> is a
number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree
instance.
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this
command sets the Bridge Priority parameter for the common and internal
spanning tree to the default value, i.e. 32768.
Format
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
446 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.26 spanning-tree mst vlan

This command adds an association between a multiple spanning tree
instance and a VLAN. The VLAN will no longer be associated with the
common and internal spanning tree. The instance <mstid> is a number
that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance.
The <vlanid> corresponds to an existing VLAN ID (1-4042).
Format
spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree mst vlan

This command removes an association between a multiple spanning tree
instance and a VLAN. The VLAN will again be associated with the com-
mon and internal spanning tree. The instance <mstid> is a number that
corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance. The
<vlanid> corresponds to an existing VLAN ID.
Format
no spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 447
5.1.27 spanning-tree mst instance

This command creates a MST instance.
Format
spanning-tree mst instance <1-4094>
Mode
Global Config
<1-4094>
U no spanning-tree mst instance

This command removes a MST instance.
Format
no spanning-tree mst instance <1-4094>
Mode
Global Config
<1-4094>
CLI L2P
448 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.28 spanning-tree port mode

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to
enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree port mode
Mode
Interface Config
U no spanning-tree port mode

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to
disabled.
Format
no spanning-tree port mode
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 449
5.1.29 spanning-tree port mode all

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to
enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree port mode all
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree port mode all

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to
disabled.
Format
no spanning-tree port mode all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
450 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.1.30 spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode

This command sets the spanning tree mrp (Media Redundancy
Protocol) mode to enabled.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode
Mode
Global Config
U no spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode
This command sets the spanning tree mrp (Medium Redundancy
Protocol) mode to disabled.
Format
no spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 451
5.1.31 spanning-tree tcnguard

This command enables tcn guard on an interface.
Default
disabled
Format
spanning-tree guard tcnguard
Mode
Interface Config
U no spanning-tree tcnguard
This command disables tcn guard for this port.
Format
no spanning-tree tcnguard
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
452 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.2 MRP
5.2 MRP
The concept of the MRP-Ring enables the construction of high-availability,

ring-shaped network structures.
The two ends of a backbone in a line-type configuration can be closed to form

a redundant ring - the MRP-Ring - by using the RM function (Redundancy
Manager) of the Switch.
It is possible to mix the devices that support this function in any combination
within the MRP ring.
If a line section becomes inoperable, the ring structure of up to 50 switches

typically transforms back to a line-type configuration within 150 ms (maxi-
mum 500 ms).
5.2.1 show mrp

This command displays the settings and states of the MRP-Ring. The follow-
ing details are displayed on execution of the command.
Format
show mrp [current-domain]
Mode
current-domain
Specify the optional keyword "current-domain" to show the current
MRP domain's settings. If you omit the keyword "current-domain", the
show command will display the settings of all existing MRP domains.
Note: Currently, it is only possible to configure one MRP domain, so
the keyword keyword "current-domain" can be omitted (it exists for
future compatibility reasons).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 453
5.2.2 show mrp current-domain

This command displays the settings and states of the MRP-Ring´s current
domain. The following details are displayed on execution of the command. If
you omit the optional keywords (e. g., advanced-mode), all settings will be
displayed.
Format
show mrp current-domain [advanced-mode |
domain-id | info | manager-priority | mode |
name | recovery-delay | operation |
port [primary | secondary] | summary | vlan]
Mode
advanced mode
Show the switch's advanced mode setting for the given MRP domain.
domain-id
Show the given MRP domain's ID.
info
Show status information for the given MRP domain.
Note: The information displayed depends on the switch's mode (Cli-
ent or Manager) because only a subset of them are useful for each
mode.
manager-priority
Show the switch's manager priority for the given MRP domain.
mode
Show the switch's mode for the given MRP domain.
name
Show the given MRP domain's name.
recovery-delay
Show the given MRP domain's recovery delay.
operation
Show the switch's administrative setting for the given MRP domain
(enabled or disabled).
CLI L2P
454 Release 8.0 05/2013
port
Show the ports for the given MRP domain
port primary
Show the primary port for the given MRP domain.
port secondary
Show the secondary port for the given MRP domain.
summary
Show a summary for the given MRP domain.
vlan
Show the VLAN ID for the given MRP domain.
5.2.3 mrp current-domain

Specify that you want to configure the current MRP domain's settings.
Default
none
Format
mrp current-domain {advanced-mode {disable|enable}
| manager-priority <0-65535>
| mode {client|manager} | name <domain-name>
| recovery-delay {500ms|200ms}
| operation {disable|enable}
| port {primary|secondary} <slot/port>
| vlan <0-4042>}
Mode
Global Config
advanced-mode
Enable or disable the switch's advanced mode for the given MRP
domain.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 455
manager-priority
Configure the given MRP domain's manager priority (0-65535).
mode
Configure the switch's MRP mode for the given domain (client or
manager).
client: Switch is client for the given MRP domain.
manager: Switch is manager for the given MRP domain.
name
Set a name for the given MRP domain.
recovery-delay
Configure the MRP recovery delay for the given domain.
500ms: Recovery delay is 500 ms for the given MRP domain.
200ms: Recovery delay is 200 ms for the given MRP domain.
operation
Enable or disable the switch for the given MRP domain.
port
Specify the switch's ports for the given MRP domain (in slot/port nota-
tion).
primary: Specify the switch's primary port for the given MRP
domain.
secondary: Specify the switch's secondary port for the given MRP
domain.
vlan
Enter the VLAN for the given MRP domain (0 - 4042, default: 0).
CLI L2P
456 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.2.4 mrp delete-domain

Delete current MRP domain.
Format
mrp delete-domain current-domain
Mode
Global Config
5.2.5 mrp new-domain

Create a new MRP domain. The configuration will consist of default parame-
ters and its operation will be disabled.
Default
n/a not set
Format
mrp new-domain (<domain-id> | default-domain)
Mode
Global Config
domain-id
Enter a new MRP domain id. Format: 16 bytes in decimal notation,
example: 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16
The MRP domain id 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 is invalid.
default-domain
Create a default MRP domain (ID: 255.255.255.255.255.255.255.
255.255.255.255.255.255.255.255.255).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 457
5.2.6 arc
Use this command to configure ARC (Automatic Ring Configuration).
ARC supports MRP.
The ARC protocol is a simple protocol that checks a ring configuration and,
if suitable, configures all clients of this ring automatically.
The check cycle includes an analysis of the ARC devices for an already
active ring configuration and wrong ring configuration values. The ARC
devices can detect loop situations and other ARC Managers in the ring.
Errors are reported to the ARC Manager. With this information the ARC Man-
ager can decide whether a configuration of the ring clients is possible or not.
Format
arc { manager {enable | disable} |
client {enable | disable | checkOnly} |
check |
configure}
Mode
Global Config
client
Configure the ARC client.
- enable: Enable the ARC client for configuring and checking.
- disable: Disable the ARC client for configuring and checking.
- checkOnly: The device can only be checked but not configured
by ARC.
manager
Configure the ARC manager.
- enable: Enable the ARC manager for configuring and checking.
- disable: Disable the ARC manager for configuring and
checking.
check
Check the topology. All important values will be taken from the current
ring configuration on the devices.
configure
Configure the topology. All important values will be taken from the
current ring configuration of the ARC manager.
CLI L2P
458 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.2.7 show arc

This command displays the current ARC configuration and the result of the
last action.
Format
show arc
Mode
Global Config
Client Settings:
Display the Client Settings for the current ARC configuration.
Admin Status
Display if the ARC client is enabled or disabled.
MAC address of the ARC Manager
Display the MAC address of the ARC Client.
IP address of the ARC Manager
Display the IP address of the ARC Client.
Port 1
Display the number of Ring Port 1 for the client (slot/port).
Port 2
Display the number of Ring Port 2 for the client (slot/port).
Manager Settings:
Display the Manager Settings for the current ARC configuration.
Admin Status
Display the ARC manager is enabled or disabled
Protocol
Display the Protocol. Possible values: mrp, ....
Port 1
Display the number of Ring Port 1 for the manager (slot/port).
Port 2
Display the number of Ring Port 2 for the manager (slot/port).
VLAN ID
Display the VLAN ID. Possible values: 0 - ....
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 459
Last Action Result

Display the Result of the Last Action.
Possible values: Ring is open, Already Configured, Loop Source,
Multiple RM, Configuration failed, Port not in full duplex mode, ARC
not supported by the ring devices.
Last Check result:
Display the Result of the last check.
- Nr: Display the number of the check result.
- Mac Address: Display the concerned MAC address.
- IP Address: Display the concerned IP address.
- Type: Display the type of the result. Possible values: Error,
Warning.
Possible check results (examples):
Error - Ring is open
Warning - Already Configured – HIPER Ring - Port1:
1.1 - Port2: 1.2
Warning - Already Configured - MRP - Port1: 1.9 -
Port2: 1.10 – VLAN ID: 0
Warning - Already Configured – Fast HIPER Ring -
Port1: 1.3 - Port2: 1.4
Error - Loop Source – Hop count: 1 - Port1: 1.1 -
Port2: 1.4 – Port3: 1.15
Error - Multiple RM – MRP
Error - Configuration failed – MRP
Warning - Port not in full duplex mode – Port1: 1.1
Half – Port2: 1.2 Full
Warning - ARC not supported by the ring devices
CLI L2P
460 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.3 HIPER-Ring
5.3 HIPER-Ring
The concept of the HIPER-Ring enables the construction of high-availability,

ring-shaped network structures. Within such a ring topology, network compo-
nents supporting the HIPER-Ring are connected with each other via their ring
ports. Exactly one redundancy manager assumes control of the ring.
These commands are for configuring the Hirschmann High Performance
Redundancy Ring.
Further information concerning this function you will find in the User Manual
”Redundancy Configuration”.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 461
5.3.1 show hiper-ring

This command displays the settings and states of the HIPER-Ring. The fol-
lowing details are displayed on execution of the command.
Format
show hiper-ring
{info | mode | port [primary | secondary] |
redundancy-state | rm-state | recovery-delay}
Mode
info
Display the information about the HIPER-Ring configuration (cabling).
mode
Display the HIPER-Ring mode settings.
port
Display the HIPER-Ring's primary and secondary port properties.
port primary
Display the HIPER Ring's primary port properties.
port secondary
Display the HIPER Ring's secondary port properties.
redundancy-state
Display the actual state of the HIPER-Ring redundancy.
rm-state
Display the state of the HIPER Ring redundancy manager.
recovery-delay
Display the value of the recovery delay.
CLI L2P
462 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.3.2 hiper-ring
Configure the HIPER-Ring.
Press Enter for a list of valid commands and their recommended order.
Format
hiper-ring
Mode
Global Config
U no hiper-ring
Clear the HIPER Ring configuration (delete it).
Format
no hiper-ring
Mode
Global Config
5.3.3 hiper-ring mode

This command sets the HIPER-Ring mode. Possible values are:
D ring-manager Set the switch's HIPER Ring mode to Ring Manager.
D rm Abbreviation of Ring Manager.
D ring-switch Set the switch's HIPER Ring mode to Ring Switch.
D rs Abbreviation of Ring Switch.
Default
none
Format
hiper-ring mode <{ring-manager|ring-switch|rm|rs}>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 463
5.3.4 hiper-ring port primary

Enter the switch's primary HIPER Ring port.
Default
n/a (not set)
Format
hiper-ring port primary <primary ring port>
Mode
Global Config
primary ring port
Enter the switch's primary HIPER Ring port (<slot/port>).
5.3.5 hiper-ring port secondary

Enter the switch's secondary HIPER Ring port.
Default
n/a not set
Format
hiper-ring port secondary <secondary ring port>
Mode
Global Config
secondary ring port
Enter the switch's secondary HIPER Ring port (<slot/port>).
CLI L2P
464 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.3.6 hiper-ring recovery-delay

Defines the maximum recovery delay of ring recovery in the HIPER Ring
(500 or 300 ms).
Default
n/a not set
Format
hiper-ring recovery-delay (<500/300>)
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 465
CLI Commands: Switching 5.4 Fast-HIPER-Ring
5.4 Fast-HIPER-Ring
The concept of the Fast-HIPER-Ring enables the construction of high-avail-

ability, ring-shaped network structures. Within such a ring topology, network
components supporting the Fast-HIPER-Ring are connected with each other
via their ring ports. Exactly one redundancy manager assumes control of the
ring.
These commands are for configuring the Hirschmann Fast High Perfor-
mance Redundancy Ring.
CLI L2P
466 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.4.1 show fast-hiper-ring (MACH1000, RSR20/

RSR30)
This command displays the settings and states of the HIPER-Ring. The fol-
lowing details are displayed on execution of the command.
Format
show fast-hiper-ring
Mode
Ring ID
Display the Ring ID.
Mode of Switch (administrative setting)
Display the HIPER-Ring mode administrative settings.
Mode of Switch (real operating state)
Display the HIPER-Ring operation mode.
Ring Name
Display theFast-HIPER-Ring's name.
Number of nodes in the ring
Display the number of nodes in the ring.
Port Number, Primary
Display the HIPER-Ring's primary port number and its properties.
Port Number, Secondary
Display the HIPER-Ring's secondary port number and its properties.
Operation
Display the admin state of the HIPER-Ring configuration.
General Operating States
Display general information concerning the fast-hiper-ring state.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 467
5.4.2 show fast-hiper-ring current-id (MACH1000,

RSR20/RSR30)
Specify that you want to show the current Fast HIPER-Ring ID's settings.
Format
show fast-hiper-ring current-id
{id | info | mode | operation | port |
port [primary |secondary] | summary |
ring-name | nodes | vlan}
Mode
id
Display the given Fast HIPER-Ring's ID.
info
Display status information for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
mode
Display the switch's mode for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
operation
Display the switch's operative setting for the given Fast HIPER-Ring
ID.
Note: In case of configuration problems, this value may differ from
the administrative setting (may become 'Disabled').
port
Display the ports for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
port primary
Display the primary port for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
port secondary
Display the secondary port for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
summary
Display a summary for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
ring-name
Display the ring name for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
CLI L2P
468 Release 8.0 05/2013
nodes
Display the number of nodes in the ring for the given Fast HIPER-
Ring ID.
vlan
Display the VLAN ID for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
5.4.3 fast-hiper-ring
Configure the Fast-HIPER-Ring.
Format
fast-hiper-ring {current-id
{mode {ring-manager|ring-switch|rm|rs} |
operation {disable|enable} |
port {primary|secondary} <slot/port> |
ring-name <ring-name> |
nodes <1-n> |
vlan <0-4042>} |
delete-id current-id |
new-id {<id>|default-id}}
Mode
Global Config
current-id
Specify that you want to configure the current Fast-HIPER-Ring ID's
settings.
mode
Configure the switch's Fast HIPER-Ring mode for the given ID (ring-
manager or ring-switch).
rm: Abbreviation for 'ring-manager'.
rs: Abbreviation for 'ring-switch'.
mode ring-manager
Switch is ring-manager for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 469
mode ring-switch
Switch is ring-switch for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
mode rm
Abbreviation for 'ring-manager'.
mode rs
Abbreviation for 'ring-switch'.
operation
Enable or disable the switch for the given Fast-HIPER-Ring ID.
port
Specify the switch's ports for the given Fast-HIPER-Ring ID.
ring-name
Set a ring name for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
nodes
Specify the number of nodes in the ring for the given Fast HIPER-
Ring ID.
vlan
Specify the VLAN for the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
delete-id
Delete the given Fast HIPER-Ring ID.
new-id
Create a new Fast HIPER-Ring ID. The configuration will consist of
default parameters and its operation will be disabled.
<id>
Enter a new Fast HIPER-Ring ID. Format: a number in the range 1-
2147483647 (2^31 - 1). An ID of 0 is invalid.
default-id
Create a default Fast HIPER-Ring ID (1).
CLI L2P
470 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.5 Redundant Coupling
5.5 Redundant Coupling
The control intelligence built into the switch allows the redundant coupling of
HIPER-Rings and network segments. Two network segments can be
connected via two separate paths with one of the following switches:
D RS2-16M
D RS20/RS30/RS40
D RSR20/RSR30
D MICE (Rel. 3.0 or higher)
D MS20/MS30
D PowerMICE
D MACH1000
D MACH3000 (Rel. 3.3 or higher)
D MACH4000
The switch in the redundant line and the switch in the main line inform each
other about their operating states by using control frames via the ethernet or
via the control line.
Note: For redundancy security reasons, the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol
and redundant network/ring coupling may not be enabled simultaneously.
Note: The network that connects the master and the slave must always be a
HiPER-Ring. The coupling switch in single mode also must have a HiPER-
Ring Configured.
These commands allow you to configure the redundant coupling of network

segments.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 471
5.5.1 show ring-coupling

This command displays the settings and states of the network coupling / ring
coupling.
To set up a new Ring Coupling configuration when no configuration is cur-
rently present (e. g., after a clear command), always set the local port first.
Please refer to: ring-coupling port local <slot/port>.
The following details are displayed on execution of the command.
Format
show ring-coupling <config | info |
net-coupling | operation | partner-ip |
port [ all | control | local | partner] |
redundancy-mode>
Mode
config
Display the Ring Coupling's configuration
– single
– dual-master-inband
– dual-master-outband
– dual-slave-inband
– dual-slave-outband.
info
Display information about the Ring Coupling's states:
– configuration failure,
– Extended diagnosis,
– redundancy guaranteed.
net-coupling
Display the Ring Coupling's ring/network coupling setting (network/
ring-only).
operation
Display the Ring Coupling's operation setting
– on
– off
CLI L2P
472 Release 8.0 05/2013
partner IP
Display the switch's Ring Coupling partner IP address (only valid for
remote configurations).
port
Display the switch's Ring Coupling ports
– all
– local
– partner (only takes effect in dual configurations)
– control (only takes effect in outband configurations).
redundancy-mode
Display the Ring Coupling's redundancy mode
– normal
– extended.
Ring/Network Coupling Mode
Display the Ring/Network Coupling mode
– ring-only if you wish to couple a HIPER-Ring.
– network if you wish to couple a line-type configuration.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 473
5.5.2 ring-coupling
Configure the redundant coupling of HIPER-Rings / network segments. This
command, if called without arguments, lists the available subcommands,
their recommended order and tips how to set up a new configuration.
Format
ring-coupling
Mode
Global Config
U no ring-coupling
Clear the ring-coupling configuration (delete it).
Format
no ring-coupling
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
474 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.5.3 ring-coupling config

This command sets the Ring Coupling configuration.
Possible values are:
D single Configure the Ring Coupling's basic setting to single (both cou-
pling ports are local to the switch, switch performs master and slave func-
tions).
D dual-master-inband Configure the Ring Coupling's basic setting to
dual-master-inband (2nd coupling port is on a remote switch, local switch
is master, communication over network).
D dual-master-outband Configure the Ring Coupling's basic setting to
dual-master-outband (2nd coupling port is on a remote switch, local
switch is master, communication over dedicated control port).
D dual-slave-inband Configure the Ring Coupling's basic setting to
dual-slave-inband (2nd coupling port is on a remote switch, local switch is
slave, communication over network).
D dual-slave-outband Configure the Ring Coupling's basic setting to
dual-slave-outband (2nd coupling port is on a remote switch, local switch
is slave, communication over dedicated control port).
D dmi Abbreviation for dual-master-inband.
D dmo Abbreviation for dual-master-outband.
D dsi Abbreviation for dual-slave-inband.
D dso Abbreviation for dual-slave-outband.
Default
none
Format
ring-coupling config <{ single |
dual-master-inband | dual-master-outband |
dual-slave-inband | dual-slave-outband |
dmi | dmo | dsi | dso }>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 475
5.5.4 ring-coupling net-coupling

Coupling mode refers to the type of coupled network.
Possible values are:
D network ,if you wish to couple a line-type configuration.
D ring-only ,if you wish to couple a HIPER-Ring.
Default
none
Format
ring-coupling net-coupling <{network|ring-only}>
Mode
Global Config
5.5.5 ring-coupling operation

Configure the Ring Coupling's operation setting. Possible values are:
D on Enable the current Ring Coupling configuration.
D off Disable the current Ring Coupling configuration.
Default
off
Format
ring-coupling operation <{off|on}>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
476 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.5.6 ring-coupling port

Configure the Ring Coupling's ports. Possible values are:
D control Enter the Ring Coupling's control coupling port in outband
configurations.
D local Enter the Ring Coupling's local coupling port.
D partner Enter the Ring Coupling's partner coupling port in single mode
configuration.
Default
none
Format
ring-coupling port <{control|local|partner}> <slot/
port>
Mode
Global Config
5.5.7 ring-coupling redundancy-mode

Configure the Ring Coupling's redundancy mode. Possible values are:
D extended Slave responds to a failure in the remote ring or network.
D normal Slave does not respond to a failure in the remote ring or network.
Default
extended
Format
ring-coupling redundancy-mode <{extended|normal}>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 477
CLI Commands: Switching 5.6 Port Security
5.6 Port Security
With the Port Securitiy function you can specify for each port from which
terminal devices data can be received and sent to other ports. This function
helps to protect the network from unauthorized access.
5.6.1 show port-sec mode

Display the MAC/IP Based Port Security global setting for all ports.
Format
show port-sec mode
Mode
5.6.2 show port-sec port

Display the MAC/IP Based Port Security port-related settings (allowed MAC
address, current MAC address, allowed IP address, current action and
current port state).
Format
show port-sec port <{all|<slot/port>}>
Mode
CLI L2P
478 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.6.3 port-sec mode

Configure the global MAC/IP Based Port Security mode:
D ip-based Port security is based on a given, allowed source IP address.
D mac-based Port security is based on a given, allowed source MAC
address.
Format
port-sec mode <{ip-based|mac-based}>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 479
5.6.4 port-sec action

Configure the action to be taken if port security is violated at this port.
D none No action is taken if port security is violated at this port.
D port-disable The port is disabled for traffic if port security is violated.
D trap-only A trap is sent if port security is violated at this port (this port
remains open for traffic).
Configure the allowed IP source address for this port.

Configure the allowed MAC source address for this port.
Format
port-sec {action {none|port-disable|trap-only}
|allowed-ip <IP1> [IP2 [IP3 [IP4 [IP5
[IP6 [IP7 [IP8 [IP9 [IP10]]]]]]]]]
|allowed-mac <MAC1> [MAC2 [MAC3 [MAC4
[MAC5 [MAC6 [MAC7 [MAC8 [MAC9
[MAC10]]]]]]]]] }
Mode
Interface Config
U no port-sec
No action is taken if port security is violated at this port.
Format
no port-sec
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
480 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.6.5 port-sec allowed-ip

Enter the allowed IP source address for this port, format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
(nnn: decimal number 0..255) (up to 10).
Format
port-sec allowed-ip <IP Address 1> <IP Address 2>
... <IP Address 10>
Mode
Interface Config
5.6.6 port-sec allowed-ip add

Format
port-sec allowed-ip add <IP Address 1>
<IP Address 2> ... <IP Address 50>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 481
5.6.7 port-sec allowed-ip remove

Format
port-sec allowed-ip remove <IP Address 1>
<IP Address 2> ... <IP Address 50>
Mode
Interface Config
5.6.8 port-sec allowed-mac

Enter the allowed MAC source address for this port, format:
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn (n: hexadecimal digit) or format: nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn/m
(n: hexadecimal digit) (m: decimal digit (1..48)) (up to 10).
Format
port-sec allowed-mac <MAC Address 1>
<MAC Address 2> ... <MAC Address 10>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
482 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.6.9 port-sec allowed-mac add

Enter the allowed MAC source address for this port,
format: nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn (n: hexadecimal digit) or
format: nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn/m
n: hexadecimal digit, m: decimal digit (1..48)
(up to 50).
Format
port-sec allowed-mac add <MAC Address 1>
Mode
Interface Config
5.6.10 port-sec allowed-mac remove

Enter the allowed MAC source address for this port,
format: nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn (n: hexadecimal digit) or
format: nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn/m
n: hexadecimal digit, m: decimal digit (1..48)
(up to 50).
Format
port-sec allowed-mac remove <MAC Address 1>
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 483
5.6.11 clear port-sec

Clear the MAC/IP Based Port Security by setting each port's security action
(applied when port security is violated) to None. Additionally, the global
mode is set to MAC Based.
Note: This does not clear the 802.1X Port Security.
Format
clear port-sec
Mode
User EXEC and Global Config
CLI L2P
484 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.7 DHCP Relay Commands
5.7 DHCP Relay Commands
These commands configure the DHCP Relay parameters. The commands

are divided by functionality into these different groups:
D Show commands are used to display switch settings, statistics and other
information.
D Commands that start with the keyword ’no’ (so-called ’no commands’) are
used to clear some or all of the settings to factory defaults.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 485
5.7.1 dhcp-relay
Set different options for BOOTP/DHCP relay and option 82 inclusion.
Format
dhcp-relay
{opt82
{operation {disable|enable}|
man-id <Manual Remote ID>|
remote-id-type {client-id|ip|mac|other}}|
server-address <Server-ID (1..4)> <Server IP
Address>}
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-relay opt82 operation {disable|enable}
Enable/Disable option 82 globally. Default: enable.
dhcp-relay opt82 man-id <Manual Remote ID>
Configure the DCHP Relay's Option 82 Manual Value for the Remote
ID Type (only effective, if Remote ID is set to ”other“). Default: no ID.
dhcp-relay opt82 remote-id-type {client-id|ip|mac|other}
Configure the DCHP Relay's Option 82 Remote ID Type.
Default: mac
dhcp-relay server-address <Server ID (1..4)> <Server IP Address>
Set the server IP address for one of the 4 possible server IDs.
Default: 0.0.0.0
U no dhcp-relay
Clear the DCHP Relay configuration (set all server addresses to 0.0.0.0).
Format
no dhcp-relay
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
486 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.7.2 dhcp-relay
Set different port specific options for option 82 inclusion.
Format
dhcp-relay {admin-state {disable|enable} |
operation {disable|enable} |
hirschmann-device {disable|enable} |
hirschmann-agent {disable|enable}}
Mode
Interface Config
dhcp-relay admin-state {disable|enable}
Enable or disable the DHCP Realy's Admin State on this port.
Default: enable.
Note: Make sure that "Active Protocol" is "Relay" for both ports
involved in DHCP Relaying (the one connected to DHCP client and
the one connected to DHCP server).
dhcp-relay operation {disable|enable}
Enable or disable the DHCP Relay's Option 82 on this port. Default:
enable.
dhcp-relay hirschmann-device {disable|enable}
Enable this parameter if a Hirschmann DHCP client is connected to
this port.
- It disables the forwarding of DHCP multicast requests that are
received on this port.
- It will send its own DHCP multicast requests to be relayed by the
DHCP relay; this will reduce the load in your network.
Disable this parameter if a Non-Hirschmann DHCP client is con-
nected to this port (these devices send normal broadcast DHCP
requests; this enables the relaying of DHCP broadcast requests that
are received on this port).
dhcp-relay hirschmann-agent {disable|enable}
Enable or disable the forwarding of DHCP requests that are received
on this port. Enable this parameter if a Hirschmann DHCP client is
connected to this port. Default: disable.
Disable this parameter if a Non-Hirschmann DHCP client is con-
nected to this port (these devices send normal broadcast DHCP
requests; this enables the relaying of DHCP broadcast requests that
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 487
are received on this port)

Enable this parameter if a Hirschmann DHCP client is connected to
this port (it will send its own DHCP multicast requests to be relayed
by the DHCP relay; this will reduce the load in your network).
5.7.3 show dhcp-relay

Display the settings of the BOOTP/DHCP relay.
Format
show dhcp-relay [opt82 | port {<slot/port>|all} |
server-address]
Mode
opt82
Show the DHCP Relay's Option 82 settings exclusively.
port
Display the DHCP Relay's port-related settings for the specified port
exclusively.
<slot/port>
Show the DHCP Relay's port-related settings for the specified port
exclusively.
all
Show the DHCP Relay's port-related settings for all ports.
server-address
Display the DHCP Relay's server address settings exclusively.
Port
Display the port number in <slot/port> notation.
CLI L2P
488 Release 8.0 05/2013
Admin State
Display the DHCP Relay's admin state settings.
Possible values: Disabled, Enabled
Active Protocol
Display the DHCP Relay's active protocol settings.
Possible values: Relay, Disabled, Server, Inaccessible
Option 82
Display the DHCP Relay's option 82 settings.
Hirschmann Device
Display the DHCP Relay's Hirschmann device settings.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 489
CLI Commands: Switching 5.8 DHCP Server Commands
5.8 DHCP Server Commands
These commands configure the DHCP server parameters. The commands

are divided by functionality into these different groups:
information.
D Commands that start with the keyword ’no’ (so-called ’no commands’)
clear some or all of the settings to factory defaults.
5.8.1 DHCP server configuration example

The example shown below has the following task: The IP address is only to
be served, if a request is coming via interface 1/1 with specified Mac address.
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> >enable
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> #configure
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <Config>#dhcp-server operation
enable
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <Config>#dhcp-server pool add 1
static 192.168.0.10
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <Config>#dhcp-server pool modify
1 mode interface 1/1
1 mode mac 00:80:63:12:34:56
1 option gateway 192.168.0.1
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <Config>#dhcp-server pool enable
1
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <Config>#interface 1/1
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <interface 1/1>#dhcp-server oper-
ation enable
CLI L2P
490 Release 8.0 05/2013
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> <config>#dhcp-server pool modify

1 option vendor-specific <f1 08 0a 7e 7e 02 0a 7f 7f 02>
This configuration leads to the following result:
<Hirschmann PowerMICE> #show dhcp-server pool 1
ID................................ 1
Status............................ Enabled
Start Address..................... 192.168.0.10
End Address....................... 192.168.0.10
Leasetime......................... 86400
Hirschmann Device................. Disabled
Mode.............................. Interface(1/1)
MAC............................... 00:80:63:12:34:56
Options:
Configpath........................
Gateway........................... 192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask....................... 255.255.255.0
WINS.............................. 0.0.0.0
DNS............................... 0.0.0.0
Hostname..........................
Vendor Specific Information....... "f1 08 0a 7e 7e 02 0a
7f 7f 02"
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 491
5.8.2 show dhcp-server

Display DHCP Server global and interface information.
Format
show dhcp-server
Mode
DHCP Server
Display the DCHP server operation setting.
DHCP Address Probe
Display the DCHP server address probe setting.
DHCP, Port-Related Settings:

Port
Display the port number in <slot/port> notation.
Mode
Display the DCHP server interface information.
Possible values: enable, disable
DHCP, Pools:
Display the DCHP server pool related information.
CLI L2P
492 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.8.3 show dhcp-server operation

Display DHCP Server global information.
Format
show dhcp-server operation
Mode
DHCP Server
Display the DCHP server operation setting.
DHCP Address Probe
Display the DCHP server address probe setting.
5.8.4 show dhcp-server port

Display the DCHP port-related settings for all ports or specific port only.
Format
show dhcp-server port {all | <slot/port>}
Mode
show dhcp-server port all
Display the DCHP port-related settings for all ports.
show dhcp-server port <slot/port>
Display the DCHP port-related settings for the specified port only.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 493
5.8.5 show dhcp-server pool

Display DHCP server pool information for all pool or detailed information for
a specific pool.
Format
show dhcp-server pool {all | <id>}
Mode
show dhcp-server pool all
Display the DCHP server pool information for all IDs.
show dhcp-server pool <id>
Display the DCHP server pool information for the specified ID only.
5.8.6 dhcp-server addr-probe

Use this command tio enable or disable the probing of allocated addresses
with an ICMP Echo request.
Format
dhcp-server addr-probe {disable|enable}
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-server addr-probe enable
Enable the DHCP server address probe. This is the default.
The DHCP server will send ICMP echo request before offering an IP.
dhcp-server addr-probe disable
Disable the DHCP server address probe.
The DHCP server will offer an IP without checking if already in use.
CLI L2P
494 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.8.7 dhcp-server operation

Enable or disable the DHCP server globally. Default: disable.
Format
dhcp-server operation {disable|enable}
Mode
Interface Config
dhcp-server operation disable
Disable the DHCP server. This is the default.
dhcp-server operation enable
Enable the DHCP server.
5.8.8 dhcp-server pool add <id>

Add a pool with a single IP address (static) or with an IP range (dynamic)
Format
dhcp-server pool {add <id> {static <ipaddr>
|dynamic <start ipaddr> <end ipaddr>}
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-server pool add <id> {static <ipaddr>}
Add a pool with a single IP address (static).
dhcp-server pool add <id> {dynamic <start ipaddr> <end ipaddr>}
Add a pool with an IP range (dynamic).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 495
5.8.9 dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode

Add or delete one or more pool modes.
Format
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode
{interface {all | <slot/port>} 1)
|mac {none | <macaddr>} 1)
|clientid {none | <clientid>} 1)
|relay {none | <ipaddr>}
|remoteid {none | <remoteid>} 1)
|circuitid {none | < circuitid >} 1)
|vlan {none | < vlan id >} }
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode interface all 1)
Set pool to all interfaces.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode interface <slot/port> 1)
Set pool to a specific interface.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode mac none 1)

Use none to remove the mode.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode mac <macaddr> 1)
Enter macaddr in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode clientid none 1)

dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode clientid <clientid> 1)
Enter clientid in xx:xx:...:xx format.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode relay none

dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode relay <ipaddr>
Enter IP address of the relay.
CLI L2P
496 Release 8.0 05/2013
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode remoteid none 1)

dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode remoteid <remoteid> 1)
Enter remoteid in xx:xx:...:xx format.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode circuitid none 1)

dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode circuitid <circuitid> 1)
Enter circuitid in xx:xx:...:xx format.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> mode vlan <vlan id> 1)
Enter valid VLAN ID.
1) Available for pools with single IP address only.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 497
5.8.10 dhcp-server pool modify <id> option

Modify pool options.
Format
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option
{configpath <url> |
gateway <ipaddr> |
netmask <netmask> |
wins <ipaddr> |
dns <ipaddr> |
hostname <name>}
vendor-specific <string>}
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option configpath <url>
Option configpath. Enter the configpath URL in ’tftp://<servername-or-
ip>/<file>’ format.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option gateway <ipaddr>
Option default gateway. Enter the gateway IP address.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option netmask <netmask>
Option netmask. Enter the netmask.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option wins <ipaddr>
Option wins. Enter WINS IP address.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option dns <ipaddr>
Option DNS. Enter the DNS IP address.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option hostname <name>
Option hostname. Enter the host name.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> option vendor-specific <string>
Option vendor-specific information. Enter vendor specific information
as hex in xx:xx:...:xx format..
CLI L2P
498 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.8.11 dhcp-server pool modify leasetime

Modify pool leasetime. Enter the leasetime in seconds.
Format
dhcp-server pool modify leasetime <seconds>
Mode
Global Config
5.8.12 dhcp-server pool modify <id> hirschmann-de-

vice
Set this pool to Hirschmann devices only or to all devices.
Format
dhcp-server pool modify <id> hirschmann-device
{enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
dhcp-server pool modify <id> hirschmann-device disable
Use pool for all devices.
dhcp-server pool modify <id> hirschmann-device enable
Use pool for Hirschmann devices only.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 499
5.8.13 dhcp-server pool enable

Enable a specific pool.
Format
dhcp-server pool enable <id>
Mode
Global Config
5.8.14 dhcp-server pool disable

Disable a specific pool.
Format
dhcp-server pool disable <id>
Mode
Global Config
5.8.15 dhcp-server pool delete

Delete a specific pool.
Format
dhcp-server pool delete <id>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
500 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Switching 5.9 Sub-Ring Commands
5.9 Sub-Ring Commands
These commands configure the sub-ring parameters.

The commands are divided by functionality into these different groups:
D Configuration commands are used to configure features and options of
information.
5.9.1 show sub-ring

Display sub-ring information for all sub-rings or detailed information for a
specific sub-ring.
Format
show sub-ring {all-ids | <id>}
{id | info | mode | operation | protocol | port |
summary | ring-name | vlan | mrp-domainID |
partner-mac}
Mode
show sub-ring
Display the sub-ring information.
show sub-ring all-ids
Display the sub-ring information for all existing Sub-Ring IDs.
show sub-ring <id>
Display the sub-ring information for the specified ID.
id
Display the given Sub-Ring's ID.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 501
info
Display status information for the given Sub-Ring ID.
mode
Display the switch's mode for the given Sub-Ring ID.
operation
Display the switch's operative setting for the given Sub-Ring ID.
protocol
Display the switch's protocol setting for the given Sub-Ring ID.
port
Display the ports for the given Sub-Ring ID.
summary
Display a summary for the given Sub-Ring ID.
ring-name
Display ring name for the given Sub-Ring ID.
vlan
Display the VLAN ID for the given Sub-Ring ID.
mrp-domainID
Display the MRP domain ID for the given Sub-Ring ID.
partner-mac
Display the partner MAC for the given Sub-Ring ID.
CLI L2P
502 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.9.2 sub-ring <id> mode

Configure the switch's Sub-Ring mode for the given ID (manager or
redundant-manager).
Format
sub-ring <id> mode {manager |
redundant-manager |
single-manager}
Mode
Global Config
<id>
Specify the Sub-Ring ID whose settings you want to configure.
manager
Switch is manager for the given Sub-Ring ID.
redundant-manager
Switch is redundant-manager for the given Sub-Ring ID.
single-manager
Switch is single-manager for the given Sub-Ring ID.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 503
5.9.3 sub-ring <id> operation

Enable or disable the switch for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> operation {enable|disable}
Mode
Global Config
<id>
enable
Enable the switch for the given Sub-Ring ID.
disable
Disable the switch for the given Sub-Ring ID.
5.9.4 sub-ring <id> protocol

Set MRP or FHR as sub-ring protocol for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> protocol standard_mrp
Mode
Global Config
<id>
standard_mrp
Set MRP as sub-ring protocol for the given Sub-Ring ID.
CLI L2P
504 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.9.5 sub-ring <id> port

Specify the switch's ports for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> port <slot/port>
Mode
Global Config
<id>
<slot/port>
Specify the port (in slot/port notation).
5.9.6 sub-ring <id> ring-name

Set a ring name for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> ring-name <ring-name>
Mode
Global Config
<id>
<ring-name>
Enter a name for the given Sub-Ring ID. The name may be up to 254
characters long and contain only printable characters. If you do not
give a name, the current name will be set to an empty string ("").
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 505
5.9.7 sub-ring <id> vlan

Specify the VLAN for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> vlan <0-4042>
Mode
Global Config
<id>
<0-4042>
Enter the VLAN for the given Sub-Ring ID
(min.: 0, max.: 4042, default: 0).
CLI L2P
506 Release 8.0 05/2013
5.9.8 sub-ring <id> mrp-domainID

Set an MRP domain ID for the given Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring <id> mrp-domainID {<id> |
default-domainID}
Mode
Global Config
<id>
sub-ring <id>: Specify the Sub-Ring ID whose settings you want to
configure.
<id>
Enter an MRP domainID for the given Sub-Ring ID.
The ID has to be 16 bytes long and contain only printable characters.
default-domainID
Enter the default MRP domainID for the given Sub-Ring ID.
The MRP domainID will be set to 255.255.255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255.255.255.255.255.255.255
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 507
5.9.9 sub-ring delete-ring

Delete all existing Sub-Rings IDs or a specific Sub-Ring ID.
Format
sub-ring delete-ring {all-ids | <id>}
Mode
Global Config
all-ids
Delete all existing Sub-Ring IDs.
<id>
Delete the given Sub-Ring ID. Format: a number in the range
1-2147483647 (231 - 1). An ID of 0 is invalid.
5.9.10 sub-ring new-ring

Create a new Sub-Ring ID. The configuration will consist of default
parameters and its operation will be disabled.
Format
sub-ring new-ring <id>
Mode
Global Config
<id>
Enter a new Sub-Ring ID. Format: a number in the range
1-2147483647 (231 - 1). An ID of 0 is invalid.
CLI L2P
508 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Security
6 CLI Commands: Security
This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Security commands. The

following Security CLI commands are available in the software Switching
Package. Use the security commands to configure security settings for login
users and port users.
The commands are divided into these different groups:
D Show commands are used to display device settings, statistics and other
information.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 509
CLI Commands: Security
CLI L2P
510 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Security 6.1 Security Commands
6.1 Security Commands
6.1.1 authentication login

This command creates an authentication login list. The <listname> is up
to 15 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive. Up to 10 authenti-
cation login lists can be configured on the switch. When a list is created, the
authentication method “local” is set as the first method.
When the optional parameters “Option1”, “Option2” and/or “Option3” are
used, an ordered list of methods are set in the authentication login list. If the
authentication login list does not exist, a new authentication login list is first
created and then the authentication methods are set in the authentication
login list. The maximum number of authentication login methods is three. The
possible method values are local, radius and reject.
The value of local indicates that the user’s locally stored ID and password
are used for authentication. The value of radius indicates that the user’s ID
and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server. The value of
reject indicates the user is never authenticated.
To authenticate a user, the authentication methods in the user’s login will be
attempted in order until an authentication attempt succeeds or fails.
Note: The default login list included with the default configuration can not be
changed.
Note: When assigning a list to the 'admin' account, include an authentication

method that allows administrative access even when remote authentication
is unavailable.
Format
authentication login <listname> [method1 [method2
[method3]]]
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 511
U no authentication login
This command deletes the specified authentication login list.
You will be unable to delete if any of the following conditions are true:
D The login list name is invalid or does not match an existing
authentication login list
D The specified authentication login list is assigned to any user or to the
non configured user for any component
D The login list is the default login list included with the default
configuration and was not created using ‘authentication login’.
The default login list cannot be deleted.
Format
no authentication login <listname>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
512 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.2 authorization network radius

Use this command to enable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the
RADIUS server.
Format
authorization network radius
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no authorization network radius

Use this command to disable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the
RADIUS server.
Format
no authorization network radius
Mode
Global Config
6.1.3 clear dot1x statistics

This command resets the 802.1X statistics for the specified port or for all
ports.
Format
clear dot1x statistics {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 513
6.1.4 clear radius statistics

This command is used to clear all RADIUS statistics.
Format
clear radius statistics
Mode
Privileged EXEC
6.1.5 dot1x defaultlogin

This command assigns the authentication login list to use for non-configured users for
802.1X port security. This setting is over-ridden by the authentication login list as-
signed to a specific user if the user is configured locally. If this value is not configured,
users will be authenticated using local authentication only.
Format
dot1x defaultlogin <listname>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
514 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.6 dot1x dynamic-vlan enable

Use this command to enable the switch to create VLANs dynamically when
a RADIUS-assigned VLAN does not exist in the switch.
Default
disabled
Format
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable
Mode
Global Config
U no dot1x dynamic-vlan enable

Use this command to disable the switch to create VLANs dynamically when
a RADIUS-assigned VLAN does not exist in the switch.
Default
disabled
Format
no dot1x dynamic-vlan enable
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 515
6.1.7 dot1x guest-vlan

This command configures VLAN as guest vlan on an interface. The
command specifies an active VLAN as an IEEE 802.1x guest VLAN.
The range is 1 to the maximum VLAN ID supported by the platform.
Format
dot1x guest-vlan <vlan-id>
Mode
Interface Config
<vlan-id>
Enter an existing VLAN ID.
U no dot1x guest-vlan
This command is used to disable Guest VLAN for the port.
Format
no dot1x guest-vlan
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
516 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.8 dot1x initialize

This command begins the initialization sequence on the specified port. This
command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is 'auto'. If the
control mode is not 'auto' an error will be returned.
Format
dot1x initialize <slot/port>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
6.1.9 dot1x login

This command assigns the specified authentication login list to the specified user for
802.1X port security. The <user> parameter must be a configured user and the <list-
name> parameter must be a configured authentication login list.
Format
dot1x login <user> <listname>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 517
6.1.10 dot1x mac-auth-bypass

This command enables the MAC-authorized-bypass on that interface.
Default
disabled
Format
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x mac-auth-bypass
This command disables the MAC-authorized-bypass on that interface.
Default
disabled
Format
no dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
518 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.11 dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state
machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame be-
fore timing out the supplicant. The <count> value must be in the range 1 - 10.
Default
2
Format
dot1x max-req <count>
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x max-req
This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state
machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame be-
fore timing out the supplicant.
Format
no dot1x max-req
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 519
6.1.12 dot1x max-users

Use this command to set the maximum number of clients supported on an
interface when MAC-based 802.1X authentication is enabled on the port.
The count value is in the range 1-16 and the default value is 16.
Default
16
Format
dot1x max-users <count>
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x max-users
The ‘no’ form of this command resets the maximum number of clients allowed
to its default value of 16.
Format
no dot1x max-users
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
520 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.13 dot1x port-control

This command sets the authentication mode to be used on the specified port.
The control mode may be one of the following.
D force-unauthorized: The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the
controlled port to unauthorized. Thus the port is always blocked.
D force-authorized: The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the
controlled port to authorized. Thus the port is always opened.
D auto: The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the
outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant, au-
thenticator and the authentication server. The port mode is controlled by
the protocol.
D mac-based: Enable MAC-based 802.1X authentication on the port.
Default
force-authorized
Format
dot1x port-control {force-unauthorized | force-
authorized | auto | mac-based}
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x port-control
This command sets the port-control mode for the specified port to the
default mode (force-authorized).
Format
no dot1x port-control
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 521
6.1.14 dot1x port-control all

This command sets the authentication mode to be used on all ports. The
control mode may be one of the following.
D force-unauthorized: The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the
controlled port to unauthorized. Thus the ports are always blocked.
D force-authorized: The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the
controlled port to authorized. Thus the ports are always opend.
D auto: The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the
outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant,
authenticator and the authentication server. The port mode is controled by
the protocol.
D mac-based: Enable the MAC-based 802.1X authentication on the port.
Default
force-authorized
Format
dot1x port-control all {force-unauthorized | force-
authorized | auto |mac-based}
Mode
Global Config
U no dot1x port-control all

This command sets the port-control mode for all the ports to the default
mode (force-authorized).
Format
no dot1x port-control all
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
522 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.15 dot1x re-authenticate

This command begins the re-authentication sequence on the specified port.
This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is 'auto'.
If the control mode is not 'auto' an error will be returned.
Format
dot1x re-authenticate <slot/port>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
6.1.16 dot1x re-authentication

This command enables re-authentication of the supplicant for the specified
port.
Default
disabled
Format
dot1x re-authentication
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x re-authentication
This command disables re-authentication of the supplicant for the speci-
fied port.
Format
no dot1x re-authentication
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 523
6.1.17 dot1x safe-vlan

Use this command to enable the safe-vlan assignment on the switch.
MS30, RSR20/RSR30, MACH100, MACH1000, PowerMICE, MACH4000,
OCTOPUS devices.
Default
disabled
Format
dot1x safe-vlan
Mode
Global Config
U no dot1x safe-vlan
Use this command to disable the safe-vlan assignment on the switch.
Default
disabled
Format
no dot1x safe-vlan
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
524 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.18 dot1x system-auth-control

This command is used to enable the dot1x authentication support on the
switch. By default, the authentication support is disabled. While disabled, the
dot1x configuration is retained and can be changed, but is not activated.
Default
disabled
Format
dot1x system-auth-control
Mode
Global Config
U no dot1x system-auth-control
This command is used to disable the dot1x authentication support on the
switch.
Format
no dot1x system-auth-control
Mode
Global Config
6.1.19 dot1x timeout

This command sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state
machine on this port. Depending on the token used and the value (in seconds)
passed, various timeout configurable parameters are set. The following tokens are
supported.
D reauth-period: Sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on this port to determine when re-
authentication of the supplicant takes place. The reauth-period must be a
value in the range 1 - 65535.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 525
D quiet-period: Sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the

authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which
it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant. The quiet-period must be a value
in the range 0 - 65535.
D tx-period: Sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on this port to determine when to send an
EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame to the supplicant. The quiet-period
must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.
D supp-timeout: Sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the supplicant. The
supp-timeout must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.
D server-timeout: Sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the authentication
server. The supp-timeout must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.
Defaults
reauth-period: 3600 seconds
quiet-period: 60 seconds
tx-period: 30 seconds
supp-timeout: 30 seconds
server-timeout: 30 seconds
Format
dot1x timeout {{reauth-period <seconds>} | {quiet-
period <seconds>} | {tx-period <seconds>} | {supp-
timeout <seconds>} | {server-timeout <seconds>}}
Mode
Interface Config
U no dot1x timeout
This command sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on this port to the default values. Depending
on the token used, the corresponding default values are set.
Format
no dot1x timeout {reauth-period | quiet-period |
tx-period | supp-timeout | server-timeout}
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
526 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.20 dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period

Use this command to configure the timeout value for the guest-vlan-period.
The time, in seconds, for which the authenticator waits to see if any EAPOL
packets are received on a port before authorizing the port and placing the
port in the guest vlan (if configured). The guest vlan timer is only relevant
when guest vlan has been configured on that specific port.
Default guest-vlan-period: 90 seconds.
Default
90
Format
dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period <seconds>
Mode
Interface Config
<seconds>
Enter an integer in the range of 1-300.
U no dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period

The ‘no’ form of this command resets the timeout value for the guest-vlan-
period to its default value (90 seconds).
Format
no dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 527
6.1.21 dot1x unauthenticated-vlan

Use this command to configure the unauthenticated VLAN associated with
the specified interface. The unauthenticated VLAN ID can be a valid VLAN
ID from 0 to maximum supported VLAN ID. The unauthenticated VLAN must
be statically configured in the VLAN database to be operational. By default,
the unauthenticated VLAN is 0, i.e. invalid and not operational.
Default
0
Format
dot1x unauthenticated-vlan <vlan-id>
Mode
Interface Config
<vlan-id>
Enter an existing VLAN ID.
U no dot1x unauthenticated-vlan
The ‘no’ form of this command resets the value for the unauthenticated VLAN
to its default value.
Format
no dot1x unauthenticated-vlan
Mode
Interface Config
CLI L2P
528 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.22 dot1x user

This command adds the specified user to the list of users with access to the
specified port or all ports. The <user> parameter must be a configured user.
Format
dot1x user <user> {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Global Config
U no dot1x user
This command removes the user from the list of users with access to the
specified port or all ports.
Format
no dot1x user <user> {<slot/port> | all}
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 529
6.1.23 ip ssh protocol

Use this command to configure the IP secure shell (SSH) parameters, the
first and the optional second SSH protocol level).
Possible settings: v1, v2 or v1 & v2.
Format
ip ssh [protocol <protocollevel1>
[<protocollevel2>]]
Default
2 1
Mode
Privileged Exec
<protocollevel1>
Enter the first SSH Protocol Level (Version).
Possible values: 1, 2
<protocollevel2>
Optionally enter the second SSH Protocol Level (Version).
Possible values: 1, 2
U no ip ssh
This command sets IP secure shell (SSH) parameters to default value.
Format
no ip ssh
Mode
Privileged Exec
CLI L2P
530 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.24 radius accounting mode

This command is used to enable the RADIUS accounting function.
Default
disabled
Format
radius accounting mode
Mode
Global Config
U no radius accounting mode

This command is used to set the RADIUS accounting function to the
default value - i.e. the RADIUS accounting function is disabled.
Format
no radius accounting mode
Mode
Global Config
6.1.25 radius server host

This command is used to configure the RADIUS authentication and
accounting server.
If the 'auth' token is used, the command configures the IP address to use to
connect to a RADIUS authentication server. Up to 3 servers can be
configured per RADIUS client. If the maximum number of configured servers
is reached, the command will fail until one of the servers is removed by
executing the no form of the command. If the optional <port> parameter is
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 531
used, the command will configure the UDP port number to use to connect to
the configured RADIUS server. In order to configure the UDP port number,
the IP address must match that of a previously configured RADIUS
authentication server. The port number must lie between 1 - 65535, with
1812 being the default value.
If the 'acct' token is used, the command configures the IP address to use for
the RADIUS accounting server. Only a single accounting server can be
configured. If an accounting server is currently configured, it must be
removed from the configuration using the no form of the command before this
command succeeds. If the optional <port> parameter is used, the command
will configure the UDP port to use to connect to the RADIUS accounting
server. The IP address specified must match that of a previously configured
accounting server. If a port is already configured for the accounting server
then the new port will replace the previously configured value. The port must
be a value in the range 1 - 65535, with 1813 being the default value.
Format
radius server host {auth | acct} <ipaddr> [<port>]
Mode
Global Config
U no radius server host

This command is used to remove the configured RADIUS authentication
server or the RADIUS accounting server. If the 'auth' token is used, the
previously configured RADIUS authentication server is removed from the
configuration. Similarly, if the 'acct' token is used, the previously
configured RADIUS accounting server is removed from the
configuration. The <ipaddr> parameter must match the IP address of the
previously configured RADIUS authentication / accounting server.
Format
no radius server host {auth | acct} <ipaddress>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
532 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.26 radius server key

This command is used to configure the shared secret between the RADIUS
client and the RADIUS accounting / authentication server. Depending on
whether the 'auth' or 'acct' token is used, the shared secret will be configured
for the RADIUS authentication or RADIUS accounting server. The IP address
provided must match a previously configured server. When this command is
executed, the secret will be prompted. The secret must be an alphanumeric
value not exceeding 20 characters.
Format
radius server key {auth | acct} <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
6.1.27 radius server msgauth

This command enables the message authenticator attribute for a specified
server.
Default
radius server msgauth <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 533
6.1.28 radius server primary

This command is used to configure the primary RADIUS authentication
server for this RADIUS client. The primary server is the one that is used by
default for handling RADIUS requests. The remaining configured servers are
only used if the primary server cannot be reached. A maximum of three
servers can be configured on each client. Only one of these servers can be
configured as the primary. If a primary server is already configured prior to
this command being executed, the server specified by the IP address used
in this command will become the new primary server. The IP address must
match that of a previously configured RADIUS authentication server.
Format
radius server primary <ipaddr>
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
534 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.29 radius server retransmit

This command sets the maximum number of times a request packet is
retransmitted when no response is received from the RADIUS server. The
retries value is an integer in the range of 1 to 15.
Default
4
Format
radius server retransmit <retries>
Mode
Global Config
U no radius server retransmit

This command sets the maximum number of times a request packet is
re-transmitted, when no response is received from the RADIUS server,
to the default value, i.e. 10.
Format
no radius server retransmit
Mode
Global Config
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 535
6.1.30 radius server timeout

This command sets the timeout value (in seconds) after which a request must
be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received. The
timeout value is an integer in the range of 1 to 30.
Default
6
Format
radius server timeout <seconds>
Mode
Global Config
U no radius server timeout

This command sets the timeout value (in seconds) after which a request
must be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received,
to the default value, i.e. 6.
Format
no radius server timeout
Mode
Global Config
6.1.31 show radius accounting

This command is used to display the configured RADIUS accounting mode,
accounting server and the statistics for the configured accounting server.
Format
show radius accounting [statistics <ipaddr>]
Mode
CLI L2P
536 Release 8.0 05/2013
If the optional token 'statistics <ipaddr>' is not included, then only the
accounting mode and the RADIUS accounting server details are displayed.
Mode
Enabled or disabled
IP Address
The configured IP address of the RADIUS accounting server
Port
The port in use by the RADIUS accounting server
Secret Configured
Yes or No
If the optional token 'statistics <ipaddr>' is included, the statistics for the
configured RADIUS accounting server are displayed. The IP address
parameter must match that of a previously configured RADIUS accounting
server. The following information regarding the statistics of the RADIUS
accounting server is displayed.
Accounting Server IP Address
IP Address of the configured RADIUS accounting server
Round Trip Time
The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most
recent Accounting-Response and the Accounting-Request that
matched it from the RADIUS accounting server.
Requests
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this
accounting server. This number does not include retransmissions.
Retransmission
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to
this RADIUS accounting server.
Responses
The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from
this server.
Malformed Responses
The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets
received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 537
invalid length. Bad authenticators and unknown types are not

included as malformed accounting responses.
Bad Authenticators
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets containing
invalid authenticators received from this accounting server.
Pending Requests
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this
server that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts
The number of accounting timeouts to this server.
Unknown Types
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types, which were
received from this server on the accounting port.
Packets Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the
accounting port and dropped for some other reason.
CLI L2P
538 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.32 show authentication

This command displays the ordered authentication methods for all authenti-
cation login lists.
Format
show authentication
Mode
Authentication Login List
This displays the authentication login listname.
Method 1
This displays the first method in the specified authentication login list,
if any.
Method 2
This displays the second method in the specified authentication login
list, if any.
Method 3
This displays the third method in the specified authentication login list,
if any.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 539
6.1.33 show authentication users

This command displays information about the users assigned to the specified
authentication login list. If the login is assigned to non-configured users, the
user “default” will appear in the user column.
Format
show authentication users <listname>
Mode
User
This field displays the user assigned to the specified authentication
login list.
Component
This field displays the component (User or 802.1X) for which the
authentication login list is assigned.
6.1.34 show dot1x

This command is used to show a summary of the global dot1x configuration, summary
information of the dot1x configuration for a specified port or all ports, the detailed
dot1x configuration for a specified port and the dot1x statistics for a specified port -
depending on the tokens used.
Format
show dot1x [{summary {<slot/port> | all} | {detail
<slot/port>} | {statistics <slot/port>}]
Mode
If none of the optional parameters are used, the global dot1x configuration
summary is displayed.
CLI L2P
540 Release 8.0 05/2013
Administrative mode
Indicates whether authentication control on the switch is enabled or
disabled.
VLAN Assignment Mode
Indicates whether the VLAN Assignment Mode is enabled or
disabled.
Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode
Indicates whether the Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode is enabled or
disabled.
Safe VLAN Mode
Indicates whether the Safe VLAN Mode is enabled or disabled.
If the optional parameter 'summary {<slot/port> | all}' is used, the dot1x con-
figuration for the specified port or all ports are displayed.
Port
The interface whose configuration is displayed.
Control Mode
The configured control mode for this port. Possible values are
force-unauthorized | force-authorized | auto |
mac-based
Operating Control Mode
The control mode under which this port is operating. Possible values
are authorized | unauthorized
Reauthentication Enabled
Indicates whether re-authentication is enabled on this port
Key Transmission Enabled
Indicates if the key is transmitted to the supplicant for the specified
port
If the optional parameter 'detail <slot/port>' is used, the detailed dot1x

configuration for the specified port are displayed.
Port
The interface whose configuration is displayed
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 541
Protocol Version
The protocol version associated with this port. The only possible
value is 1, corresponding to the first version of the dot1x specification.
PAE Capabilities
The port access entity (PAE) functionality of this port. Possible
values are Authenticator or Supplicant.
Control Mode
Display the state of the Control Mode. Possible values: auto,
forceauthorized, ....
Authenticator PAE State
Current state of the authenticator PAE state machine. Possible
values are Initialize, Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating,
Authenticated, Aborting, Held, ForceAuthorized, and
ForceUnauthorized.
Backend Authentication State
Current state of the backend authentication state machine. Possible
values are Request, Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle, and
Initialize.
Quiet Period
The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to
define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a
supplicant. The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the
range 0 and 65535.
Transmit Period
The timer used by the authenticator state machine on the specified
port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity
frame to the supplicant. The value is expressed in seconds and will
be in the range of 1 and 65535.
Guest VLAN ID
Display the Guest VLAN ID. Default value: 0.
Guest VLAN Period (secs)
Display the Guest VLAN Period. Default value: 90 seconds.
CLI L2P
542 Release 8.0 05/2013
Supplicant Timeout
timeout the supplicant. . The value is expressed in seconds and will
be in the range of 1 and 65535.
Server Timeout
The timer used by the authenticator on this port to timeout the
authentication server. The value is expressed in seconds and will be
in the range of 1 and 65535.
Maximum Requests
The maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on
this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity before timing
out the supplicant. The value will be in the range of 1 and 10.
VLAN Id
Display the VLAN Id.
VLAN Assigned Reason
Display the state of the VLAN Assigned Reason parameter.
Possible values: RADIUS, Not Assigned, ....
Reauthentication Period
determine when reauthentication of the supplicant takes place. The
value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and
65535.
Reauthentication Enabled
Indicates if reauthentication is enabled on this port. Possible values
are ‘True” or “False”.
Key Transmission Enabled
Indicates if the key is transmitted to the supplicant for the specified
port. Possible values are True or False.
Control Direction
Indicates the control direction for the specified port or ports. Possible
values are both or in.
Maximum Users
Display the value of Maximum Users.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 543
Unauthenticated VLAN ID
Display the value of Unauthenticated VLAN ID
Session Timeout
Display the value of Session Timeout
Session Termination Action
Display the value of Session Termination Action
MAC-Authorized-Bypass
Display the value of MAC-Authorized-Bypass
If the optional parameter 'statistics <slot/port>' is used, the dot1x statistics for
the specified port are displayed.
Port
The interface whose statistics are displayed.
EAPOL Frames Received
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been
received by this authenticator.
EAPOL Frames Transmitted
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted
by this authenticator.
EAPOL Start Frames Received
The number of EAPOL start frames that have been received by this
authenticator.
EAPOL Logoff Frames Received
The number of EAPOL logoff frames that have been received by this
authenticator.
Last EAPOL Frame Version
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received
EAPOL frame.
Last EAPOL Frame Source
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received
EAPOL frame.
CLI L2P
544 Release 8.0 05/2013
EAP Response/Id Frames Received

The number of EAP response/identity frames that have been
received by this authenticator.
EAP Response Frames Received
The number of valid EAP response frames (other than resp/id frames)
that have been received by this authenticator.
EAP Request/Id Frames Transmitted
The number of EAP request/identity frames that have been
transmitted by this authenticator.
EAP Request Frames Transmitted
The number of EAP request frames (other than request/identity
frames) that have been transmitted by this authenticator.
Invalid EAPOL Frames Received
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this
authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.
EAP Length Error Frames Received
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this
authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.
6.1.35 show dot1x users

This command displays 802.1X port security user information for locally con-
figured users.
Format
show dot1x users <slot/port>
Mode
User
Users configured locally to have access to the specified port.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 545
6.1.36 show dot1x clients

This command displays 802.1X port security client information for locally
configured clients.
Format
show dot1x clients <slot/port>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Logical Interface
Display the Logical Interface.
Interface
Display the Interface.
User Name
Display the User Name.
Supp MAC Address
Display the Supp MAC Address.
Session Time
Display the Session Time.
Value range: ....
Vlan Id
Display the Vlan Id.
Possible values: ....
Vlan Assigned Reason
Display the Vlan Assigned Reason.
Possible values: RADIUS, ....
Session Timeout
Display the Session Timeout.
Value range: ....
Session Termination Action
Display the Session Termination Action.
Possible values: Reauthenticate, ....
CLI L2P
546 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.37 show ip ssh

This command displays the IP secure shell (SSH) information.
Format
show ip ssh
Mode
Privileged EXEC
Administrative Mode
Display the SSH administrative mode setting.
Protocol Levels
Display the SSH protocol levels setting.
Possible values: Versions 1 and 2, Version 1, Version 2
(default setting: Versions 1 and 2).
SSH Sessions Currently Active
Display the number of SSH sessions being currently set up.
Max SSH Sessions Allowed
Display the max. number of SSH sessions that can be set up
simultaneously.
Possible values: 1..5 (default setting: 5).
SSH Timeout
Display the SSH timeout in minutes.
Possible values: 1..160 (default setting: 5).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 547
6.1.38 show radius

This command is used to display the various RADIUS configuration items for
the switch as well as the configured RADIUS servers. If the optional token
'servers' is not included, the following RADIUS configuration items will be dis-
played.
Format
show radius [servers]
Mode
Primary Server IP Address
Indicates the configured server currently in use for authentication
Number of configured servers
The configured IP address of the authentication server
Max number of retransmits
The configured value of the maximum number of times a request
packet is retransmitted
Timeout Duration
The configured timeout value, in seconds, for request re-transmis-
sions
Accounting Mode
Yes or No
If the optional token 'servers' is included, the following information regarding
the configured RADIUS servers is displayed.
IP Address
IP Address of the configured RADIUS server
Port
The port in use by this server
Type
Primary or secondary
Secret Configured
Yes / No
CLI L2P
548 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.39 show radius statistics

This command is used to display the statistics for RADIUS or configured
server . To show the configured RADIUS server statistic, the IP Address
specified must match that of a previously configured RADIUS server. On ex-
ecution, the following fields are displayed.
Format
show radius statistics [ipaddr]
Mode
If ip address is not specified than only Invalid Server Address field is dis-
played. Otherwise other listed fields are displayed.
Invalid Server Addresses

The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets received from unknown
addresses.
Server IP Address
Round Trip Time

The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most
recent Access-Reply | Access-Challenge and the Access-Request
that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server.
Access Requests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server.
This number does not include retransmissions.
Access Retransmission
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to
this RADIUS authentication server.
Access Accepts
The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets, including both valid
and invalid packets, which were received from this server.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 549
Access Rejects
The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets, including both valid
and invalid packets, which were received from this server.
Access Challenges
The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets, including both
valid and invalid packets, which were received from this server.
Malformed Access Responses
The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets
received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an
invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown
types are not included as malformed access responses.
Bad Authenticators
The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid
authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.
Pending Requests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this
server that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts
The number of authentication timeouts to this server.
Unknown Types
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types, which were
received from this server on the authentication port.
Packets Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the
authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
CLI L2P
550 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.1.40 show users authentication

This command displays all user and all authentication login information. It
also displays the authentication login list assigned to the default user.
Format
show users authentication
Mode
Privileged EXEC
User
This field lists every user that has an authentication login list
assigned.
System Login
This field displays the authentication login list assigned to the user for
system login.
802.1x Port Security
This field displays the authentication login list assigned to the user for
802.1X port security.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 551
6.1.41 users login

This command assigns the specified authentication login list to the specified
user for system login. The <user> must be a configured <user> and the
<listname> must be a configured login list.
If the user is assigned a login list that requires remote authentication, all ac-
cess to the interface from all CLI, web, and telnet sessions will be blocked
until the authentication is complete.
Note: Note that the login list associated with the ‘admin’ user can not be
changed to prevent accidental lockout from the switch.
Format
users login <user> <listname>
Mode
Global Config
user
Enter user name.
listname
Enter an alphanumeric string of not more than 15 characters.
Note: When assigning a list to the 'admin' account, include an
authentication method that allows administrative access even when
remote authentication is unavailable (use 'authentication login
<listname> [method1 [method2 [method3]]]').
CLI L2P
552 Release 8.0 05/2013
CLI Commands: Security 6.2 HTTP Commands
6.2 HTTP Commands
6.2.1 ip http secure-port

This command is used to set the sslt port where port can be 1-65535 and the
default is port 443.
Default
443
Format
ip http secure-port <portid>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no ip http secure-port
This command is used to reset the sslt port to the default value.
Format
no ip http secure-port
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 553
6.2.2 ip http secure-protocol

This command is used to set protocol levels (versions). The protocol level
can be set to TLS1, SSL3 or to both TLS1 and SSL3.
Default
SSL3 and TLS1
Format
ip http secure-protocol [SSL3] [TLS1]
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
554 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.2.3 ip http server

This command enables access to the switch‘s graphical user interface (web-
based interface) via a web browser. When access is enabled, the user can
login to the switch from the web-based interface. When access is disabled,
the user cannot login to the switch's web server.
Disabling the web-based interface takes effect immediately. All interfaces are
effected.
Note: First enable HTTP before enabling HTTPS.
First disable the HTTPS web server before disabling HTTP.
See “ip https server” on page 557.
Default
enabled
Format
ip http server
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no ip http server
This command disables access to the switch‘s graphical user interface (web-
based interface) via a web browser. When access is disabled, the user can-
not login to the switch's web server.
Format
no ip http server
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 555
6.2.4 show ip http

This command displays the http settings for the switch.
Format
show ip http
Mode
Secure-Server Administrative Mode
This field indicates whether the administrative mode of secure HTTP
is enabled or disabled.
Secure Protocol Level
The protocol level may have the values of SSL3, TSL1, or both SSL3
and TSL1.
Secure Port
This field specifies the port configured for SSLT.
HTTP Mode
THis field indicates whether the HTTP mode is enabled or disabled.
CLI L2P
556 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.2.5 ip https server

This command is used to turn on the HTTPS server 3.
This command enables access to the switch‘s graphical user interface (web-
based interface) via a web browser. When access is enabled, the user can
login to the switch from the web interface. When access is disabled, the user
cannot login to the switch's web server.
Note: First enable HTTP before enabling HTTPS.
First disable the HTTPS web server before disabling HTTP.
See “ip http server” on page 555.
Default
disabled
Format
ip https server
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no ip https server
This command is used to turn off the HTTPS server 3.
This command disables access to the switch‘s graphical user interface (web-
based interface) via a web browser. When access is disabled, the user can-
not login to the switch's web server.
Format
no ip https server
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 557
6.2.6 ip https port

This command is used to set the HTTPS listening port.
The acceptable range is 1-65535. The default is 443
Note: After this setting, re-enable the HTTPS server.
See “ip http server” on page 555.
Default
443
Format
ip https port <port_no>
Mode
Privileged EXEC
U no ip https port
This command is used to reset the https port to the default value.
Format
no ip https port
Mode
Privileged EXEC
6.2.7 ip https certgen

Use this command to generate an X509/PEM certificate in-place.
Format
ip https certgen
Mode
Privileged EXEC
CLI L2P
558 Release 8.0 05/2013
6.2.8 show ip https

This command displays the status of the HTTPS server
(status of the server and port number).
Format
show ip https
Mode
HTTPS Mode
Displays the status of the HTTPS server (enabled, disabled).
HTTPS Port
Displays the port numberof the HTTPS server (default: 443).
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 559
CLI L2P
560 Release 8.0 05/2013
Appendix- VLAN Example
7 Appendix- VLAN Example
LAN switches can segment networks into logically defined virtual work-
groups.This logical segmentation is commonly referred as a virtual LAN
(VLAN). This logical segmentation of devices provides better LAN adminis-
tration, security, and management of broadcast activity over the network. Vir-
tual LANs have become an integral feature of switched LAN solutions.
The VLAN example below demonstrates a simple VLAN
configuration.
If a single port is a member of VLANs 2, 3 and 4, the port expects to see traffic
tagged with either VLAN 2,3 or 4.
The PVID (Port Virtual Identification) could be something entirely different,
for example '12' and things would still work fine, just so incoming traffic was
tagged.
Example:
Project A = (VLAN2, ports 1,2)
Project B = (VLAN3, ports 3,4)
Project C = (VLAN4, ports 5,6)
Project P = (VLAN 9, port 7)
VLAN Command
create VLAN 2 vlan database
vlan 2
exit
config
interface 1/1
vlan participation include 2
exit
interface 1/2
exit
Table 16: Creating VLANs
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 561
Appendix- VLAN Example
VLAN Command
vlan 3
exit
config
interface 0/3
exit
interface 0/4
exit
vlan 4
exit
config
interface 0/5
exit
interface 0/6
exit
vlan 9
exit
config
interface 0/1
exit
interface 0/2
exit
interface 0/3
exit
interface 0/4
exit
interface 0/5
exit
interface 0/6
exit
interface 0/7
exit
Table 16: Creating VLANs
CLI L2P
562 Release 8.0 05/2013
Appendix- VLAN Example 7.1 SOLUTION 1
7.1 SOLUTION 1
All traffic entering the ports is tagged traffic. Since the traffic is tagged, the
PVID configuration for each port is not a concern.
D The network card configuration for devices on Project A must be set to tag
all traffic with 'VLAN 2'
D The network card configuration for devices on Project B must be set to tag
D The network card configuration for devices on Project C must be set to tag
D The network card configuration for devices on Project P must be set to tag
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 563
CLI L2P
564 Release 8.0 05/2013
7.2 SOLUTION 2
The network card configuration for devices on Project A, B and C should be

set to NOT tag traffic.
To take care of these untagged frames configure the following:

D vlan pvid 2 (in interface 0/1)
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 565
CLI L2P
566 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
8 Glossary 802.1P. The IEEE protocol

designator for Local Area Network
(LAN). This Layer 2 network
standard improves support of time
critical traffic, and limits the extent of
Numerics high bandwidth multicast traffic
802.1D. The IEEE designator for within a bridged LAN. To do this,
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STP, 802.1P defines a methodology for
a link management protocol, is part introducing traffic class priorities.
of the 802.1D standard for media The 802.1P standard allows priority
access control bridges. Using the to be defined in all 802 MAC
spanning tree algorithm, STP protocols (Ethernet, Token Bus,
provides path redundancy while Token Ring), as well as in FDDI. For
preventing endless loops in a protocols (such as Ethernet) that do
network. An endless loop is created not contain a priority field, 802.1P
by multiple active paths between specifies a method for indicating
stations where there are alternate frame priority based on the new
routes between hosts. To establish fields defined in the 802.1Q (VLAN)
path redundancy, STP creates a standard.
logical tree that spans all of the 802.1Q VLAN. The IEEE protocol
switches in an extended network, designator for Virtual Local Area
forcing redundant paths into a Network (VLAN). This standard
standby, or blocked, state. STP provides VLAN identification and
allows only one active path at a time quality of service (QoS) levels. Four
between any two network devices bytes are added to an Ethernet
(this prevents the loops) but frame to allow eight priority levels
establishes the redundant links as a (QoS) and to identify up to 4096
backup if the initial link should fail. If VLANs. See “VLAN” on page 580 for
STP costs change, or if one network more information.
segment in the STP becomes
unreachable, the spanning tree
algorithm reconfigures the spanning
A
tree topology and reestablishes the Address Resolution Protocol. An
link by activating the standby path. Internet Protocol that dynamically
Without spanning tree in place, it is maps Internet addresses to physical
possible that both connections may (hardware) addresses on a LAN.
be simultaneously live, which could
result in an endless loop of traffic on Advanced Network Device Layer/
the LAN. Software. Hirschmann term for the
Device Driver level.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 567
Glossary
Aging. When an entry for a node is standard implementation of STP

added to the lookup table of a (Spanning Tree Protocol). It uses the
switch, it is given a timestamp. Each STP algorithm to insure that physical
time a packet is received from a loops in the network topology do not
node, the timestamp is updated. The result in logical looping of network
switch has a user-configurable timer traffic. Using one bridge configured
that erases the entry after a certain as root for reference, the BPDU
length of time with no activity from switches one of two bridges forming
that node. a network loop into standby mode,
so that only one side of a potential
Application Programming loop passes traffic. By examing
Interface. An API is an interface frequent 802.1d configuration
used by an programmer to interface updates, a bridge in the standby
with functions provided by an mode can switch automatically into
application. the forward mode if the other bridge
AVL tree. Binary tree having the forming the loop fails.
property that for any node in the
tree, the difference in height C
between the left and right subtrees
of that node is no more than 1. Checksum. A simple error-
detection scheme in which each
transmitted message is identified
B with a numerical value based on the
BPDU. See “Bridge Protocol Data number of set bits in the message.
Unit” on page 568. The receiving station then applies a
formula to the message and checks
BootP. See “Bootstrap Protocol.” to make sure the accompanying
on page 568. numerical value is the same. If not,
the receiver can assume that the
Bootstrap Protocol. An Internet message has been corrupted.
protocol that enables a diskless
workstation to discover its own IP CLI. See “Command Line Interface”
address, the IP address of a BootP on page 568.
server on the network, and a file to
be loaded into memory to boot the Command Line Interface. CLI is a
machine. This enables the line-item interface for configuring
workstation to boot without requiring systems.
a hard or floppy disk drive. Complex Programmable Logic
Bridge Protocol Data Unit. BPDU Device. CPLD is a programmable
is the IEEE 802.1D MAC Bridge circuit on which a logic network can
Management protocol that is the
CLI L2P
568 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
be programmed after its statements to determine how to

construction. forward a given network packet. An
analogy is made to travel services,
CPLD. See “Complex in which a person can choose
Programmable Logic Device.” on among different modes of travel -
page 568. train, bus, airplane - degree of
comfort, the number of stops on the
D route, standby status, the time of
day or period of year for the trip, and
DAPI. See “Device Application so forth. For a given set of packet
Programming Interface” on travel rules, a packet is given one of
page 569. 64 possible forwarding behaviors -
Device Application Programming known as per hop behaviors (PHBs).
Interface. DAPI is the software A six-bit field, known as the
interface that facilitates Differentiated Services Code Point
communication of both data and (DSCP), in the Internet Protocol
control information between the (Internet Protocol) header specifies
Application Layer and HAPI, with the per hop behavior for a given flow
support from System Support. of packets. Differentiated Services
and the Class of Service approach
DHCP. See “Dynamic Host provide a way to control traffic that is
Configuration Protocol.” on both more flexible and more
page 569. scalability than the Quality of
Service approach.
Differentiated Services. Diffserv is
a protocol for specifying and Diffserv. See “Differentiated
controlling network traffic by class so Services.” on page 569..
that certain types of traffic get
precedence - for example, voice Dynamic Host Configuration
traffic, which requires a relatively Protocol. DHCP is a protocol for
uninterrupted flow of data, might get assigning dynamic IP addresses to
precedence over other kinds of devices on a network. With dynamic
traffic. Differentiated Services is the addressing, a device can have a
most advanced method for different IP address every time it
managing traffic in terms of what is connects to the network. In some
called Class of Service (CoS). systems, the device's IP address
Unlike the earlier mechanisms of can even change while it is still
802.1P tagging and Type of Service connected. DHCP also supports a
(ToS), Differentiated Services avoids mix of static and dynamic IP
simple priority tagging and depends addresses. Dynamic addressing
on more complex policy or rule simplifies network administration
because the software tracks IP
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 569
Glossary
addresses rather than requiring an asynchronous communication is

administrator to manage the task. A called xon-xoff. In this case, the
new computer can be added to a receiving device sends a an “xoff”
network without the hassle of message to the sending device
manually assigning it a unique IP when its buffer is full. The sending
address. device then stops sending data.
When the receiving device is ready
E to receive more data, it sends an
“xon” signal.
EEPROM. See “Electronically
Erasable Programmable Read Only Forwarding. When a frame is
Memory” on page 570. received on an input port on a
switch, the address is checked
Electronically Erasable against the lookup table. If the
Programmable Read Only lookup table has recorded the
Memory. EEPROM is also known destination address, the frame is
as Flash memory. This is re- automatically forwarded on an
programmable memory. output port.
Frame Check Sequence. The

F extra characters added to a frame
Fast STP. A high-performance for error detection and correction.
Spanning Tree Protocol. See “STP” FCS is used in X.25, HDLC, Frame
on page 579 for more information. Relay, and other data link layer
protocols.
FIFO. First In First Out.
Flash Memory. See “EEPROM” on

G
page 570. GARP. See “Generic Attribute
Flow Control. The process of Registration Protocol.” on page 571.
adjusting the flow of data from one GARP Information Propagation.
network device to another to ensure
that the receiving device can handle GIP is the propagation of information
all of the incoming data. This is between GARP participants for the
particularly important where the same application in a bridge is
sending device is capable of carried out by a GIP component.
sending data much faster than the
receiving device can receive it. GARP Multicast Registration
There are many flow control Protocol. GMRP provides a
mechanisms. One of the most mechanism that allows Bridges and
common flow control protocols for end stations to dynamically register
(and subsequently, de-register)
CLI L2P
570 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
Group membership information with operation of the GARP Application

the MAC Bridges attached to the concerned.
same LAN segment, and for that
information to be disseminated Gigabit Ethernet. A high-speed
across all Bridges in the Bridged Ethernet connection.
LAN that support Extended Filtering GIP. See “GARP Information
Services. The operation of GMRP Propagation” on page 570.
relies upon the services provided by
the GARP. GMRP. See “GARP Multicast
Registration Protocol” on page 570.
GARP VLAN Registration
Protocol. GVRP allows GPCM. See “General Purpose
workstations to request admission to Chip-select Machine” on page 571.
a particular VLAN for multicast
purposes. GVD. GARP VLAN Database.
GE. See “Gigabit Ethernet” on GVRP. See “GARP VLAN

page 571. Registration Protocol.” on page 571.
General Purpose Chip-select H

Machine. GPCM provides
interfacing for simpler, lower- .h file. Header file in C code.
performance memory resources and Contains function and coding
memory mapped-devices. The definitions.
GPCM does not support bursting
and is used primarily for boot- HAPI. See “Hardware Abstraction
loading. Programming Interface” on
page 571.
Generic Attribute Registration
Protocol. GARP provides a Hardware Abstraction
generic attribute dissemination Programming Interface. HAPI is
capability that is used by participants the module that contains the NP
in GARP Applications (called GARP specific software that interacts with
Participants) to register and de- the hardware.
register attribute values with other hop count. The number of routers
GARP Participants within a Bridged that a data packet passes through
LAN. The definition of the attribute on its way to its destination.
types, the values that they can carry,
and the semantics that are
associated with those values when
I
registered are specific to the ICMP. See “Internet Control
Message Protocol” on page 572.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 571
Glossary
IGMP. See “Internet Group IP. See “Internet Protocol” on

Management Protocol” on page 572. page 572.
IGMP Snooping. A series of IP Multicasting. Sending out data

operations performed by to distributed servers on the MBone
intermediate systems to add logic to (Multicast Backbone). For large
the network to optimize the flow of amounts of data, IP Multicast is
multicast traffic; these intermediate more efficient than normal Internet
systems (such as Layer 2 switches) transmissions because the server
listen for IGMP messages and build can broadcast a message to many
mapping tables and associated recipients simultaneously. Unlike
forwarding filters, in addition to traditional Internet traffic that
reducing the IGMP protocol traffic. requires separate connections for
See “Internet Group Management each source-destination pair, IP
Protocol” on page 572 for more Multicasting allows many recipients
information. to share the same source. This
means that just one set of packets is
Internet Control Message transmitted for all the destinations.
Protocol. ICMP is an extension to
the Internet Protocol (IP) that Internet Protocol. The method or
supports packets containing error, protocol by which data is sent from
control, and informational one computer to another on the
messages. The PING command, for Internet. Each computer (known as
example, uses ICMP to test an a host) on the Internet has at least
Internet connection. one IP address that uniquely
identifies it among all other
Internet Group Management computers on the Internet. When
Protocol. IGMP is the standard for you send or receive data (for
IP Multicasting on the Internet. example, an e-mail note or a Web
IGMP is used to establish host page), the message gets divided
memberships in particular multicast into little chunks called packets.
groups on a single network. The Each of these packets contains both
mechanisms of the protocol allow a the sender's Internet address and
host to inform its local router, using the receiver's address. Any packet is
Host Membership Reports, that it sent first to a gateway computer that
wants to receive messages understands a small part of the
addressed to a specific multicast Internet. The gateway computer
group. All hosts conforming to Level reads the destination address and
2 of the IP Multicasting specification forwards the packet to an adjacent
require IGMP. gateway that in turn reads the
destination address and so forth
across the Internet until one
CLI L2P
572 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
gateway recognizes the packet as server that can support IPv6 packets
belonging to a computer within its can also support IPv4 packets.
immediate neighborhood or domain.
That gateway then forwards the J
packet directly to the computer
whose address is specified. Joint Test Action Group. An IEEE
group that specifies test framework
Because a message is divided into a standards for electronic logic
number of packets, each packet can, components.
if necessary, be sent by a different
route across the Internet. Packets JTAG. See “Joint Test Action
can arrive in a different order than Group” on page 573.
they were sent. The Internet
Protocol just delivers them. It's up to L
another protocol, the Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP) to put them LAN. See “Local Area Network” on
back in the right order. IP is a page 574.
connectionless protocol, which
means that there is no continuing LDAP. See “Lightweight Directory
connection between the end points Access Protocol” on page 573.
that are communicating. Each Lightweight Directory Access
packet that travels through the Protocol. A set of protocols for
Internet is treated as an independent accessing information directories.
unit of data without any relation to LDAP is based on the standards
any other unit of data. (The reason contained within the X.500 standard,
the packets do get put in the right but is significantly simpler. Unlike
order is because of TCP, the X.500, LDAP supports TCP/IP,
connection-oriented protocol that which is necessary for any type of
keeps track of the packet sequence Internet access. Although not yet
in a message.) In the Open Systems widely implemented, LDAP should
Interconnection (OSI) eventually make it possible for
communication model, IP is in Layer almost any application running on
3, the Networking Layer. The most virtually any computer platform to
widely used version of IP today is IP obtain directory information, such as
version 4 (IPv4). However, IP e-mail addresses and public keys.
version 6 (IPv6) is also beginning to Because LDAP is an open protocol,
be supported. IPv6 provides for applications need not worry about
much longer addresses and the type of server hosting the
therefore for the possibility of many directory.
more Internet users. IPv6 includes
the capabilities of IPv4 and any
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 573
Glossary
Learning. The bridge examines the what is called a WAN or Wide Area
Layer 2 source addresses of every Network.
frame on the attached networks
(called listening) and then maintains M
a table, or cache, of which MAC
addresses are attached to each of MAC. (1) Medium Access Control.
its ports. In LANs, the sublayer of the data link
control layer that supports medium-
Link-State. In routing protocols, the dependent functions and uses the
declared information about the services of the physical layer to
available interfaces and available provide services to the logical link
neighbors of a router or network. control (LLC) sublayer. The MAC
The protocol's topological database sublayer includes the method of
is formed from the collected link- determing when a device has
state declarations. access to the transmission medium.
LLDP. The IEEE 802.1AB standard (2) Message Authentication Code. In
for link layer discovery in Ethernet computer security, a value that is a
networks provides a method for part of a message or accompanies a
switches, routers and access points message and is used to determine
to advertise their identification, that the contents, origin, author, or
configuration and capabilities to other attributes of all or part of the
neighboring devices that store the message are as they appear to be.
data in a MIB (management (IBM Glossary of Computing Terms)
information base). Link layer Management Information Base.
discovery allows a network
management system to model the When SNMP devices send SNMP
topology of the network by messages to the management
interrogating the MIB databases in console (the device managing
the devices. SNMP messages), it stores
information in the MIB.
Local Area Network. A group of
computers that are located in one MBONE. See “Multicast Backbone”
area and are connected by less than on page 575.
1,000 feet of cable. A typical LAN
might interconnect computers and MDC. Management Data Clock.
peripherals on a single floor or in a MDI. Management Data Interface.
single building. LANs can be
connected together, but if modems MDIO. Management Data Input/
and telephones connect two or more Output.
LANs, the larger network constitutes
CLI L2P
574 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
MDIX. Management Dependent will allow users to easily join

Interface Crossover. multicast groups. Note that
multicasting refers to sending a
MIB. See “Management Information message to a select group whereas
Base” on page 574. broadcasting refers to sending a
MOSPF. See “Multicast OSPF” on message to everyone connected to
page 575. a network. The terms multicast and
narrowcast are often used
MPLS. See “Multi-Protocol Label interchangeably, although
Switching” on page 575. narrowcast usually refers to the
business model whereas multicast
Multicast Backbone. The MBONE refers to the actual technology used
is a virtual network. It is layered on to transmit the data.
top of portions of the physical
Internet to support routing of IP Multicast OSPF. With a MOSPF
multicast packets since that function specification, an IP Multicast packet
has not yet been integrated into is routed based both on the packet's
many production routers. The source and its multicast destination
network is composed of islands that (commonly referred to as source/
can directly support IP multicast, destination routing). As it is routed,
such as multicast LANs like the multicast packet follows a
Ethernet, linked by virtual point-to- shortest path to each multicast
point links called "tunnels". The destination. During packet
tunnel endpoints are typically forwarding, any commonality of
workstation-class machines having paths is exploited; when multiple
operating system support for IP hosts belong to a single multicast
multicast and running the "mrouted" group, a multicast packet will be
multicast routing daemon. replicated only when the paths to the
separate hosts diverge. See “P” on
Multicasting. To transmit a page 577 for more information.
message to specific recipients
across a network. A simple example Multiplexing. A function within a
of multicasting is sending an e-mail layer that interleaves the information
message to a mailing list. from multiple connections into one
Teleconferencing and connection.
videoconferencing also use
multicasting, but require more robust Multi-Protocol Label Switching.
protocols and networks. Standards An initiative that integrates Layer 2
are being developed to support information about network links
multicasting over a TCP/IP network (bandwidth, latency, utilization) into
such as the Internet. These Layer 3 (IP) within a particular
standards, IP Multicast and Mbone,
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 575
Glossary
autonomous system—or ISP—in fiber-optic cables to be plugged into

order to simplify and improve IP- compatible devices as easily as
packet exchange. MPLS gives plugging in a telephone cable.
network operators a great deal of
flexibility to divert and route traffic MUX. See “Multiplexing” on
around link failures, congestion, and page 575.
bottlenecks. From a QoS standpoint,
ISPs will better be able to manage N
different kinds of data streams
based on priority and service plan. NM. Network Module.
For instance, those who subscribe to nm. Nanometer (1 x 10e9) meters.
a premium service plan, or those
who receive a lot of streaming media NP. Network Processor.
or high-bandwidth content can see
minimal latency and packet loss. O
When packets enter into a MPLS-
based network, Label Edge Routers Open Systems Interconnection.
(LERs) give them a label (identifier).
These labels not only contain OSI is a seven (7) layer architecture
information based on the routing model for communications systems
table entry (i.e., destination, developed by the ISO for the
bandwidth, delay, and other interconnection of data
metrics), but also refer to the IP communications systems. Each
header field (source IP address), layer uses and builds on the
Layer 4 socket number information, services provided by those below it.
and differentiated service. Once this Operating System Application
classification is complete and Programming Interface. OSAPI is
mapped, different packets are a module within the System Support
assigned to corresponding Labeled software that provides a set of
Switch Paths (LSPs), where Label interfaces to OS support functions.
Switch Routers (LSRs) place
outgoing labels on the packets. With OS. Operating System.
these LSPs, network operators can
divert and route traffic based on OSAPI. See “Operating System
data-stream type and Internet- Application Programming Interface”
access customer. on page 576.
MT-RJ connector. A type of fiber- OSI. See “Open Systems

optic cable jack that is similar in Interconnection” on page 576.
shape and concept to a standard
telephone jack, enabling duplex
CLI L2P
576 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
P mirrored data to monitor each

segment separately. The analyzer
PDU. See “Protocol Data Unit” on captures and evaluates the data
page 577. without affecting the client on the
original port. The monitor port may
PHY. The OSI Physical Layer: The be a port on the same SwitchModule
physical layer provides for with an attached RMON probe, a
transmission of cells over a physical port on a different SwitchModule in
medium connecting two ATM the same hub, or the SwitchModule
devices. This physical layer is processor. Port mirroring can
comprised of two sublayers: the consume significant CPU resources
Physical Medium Dependent (PMD) while active. Better choices for long-
sublayer, and the Transmission term monitoring may include a
Convergence (TC) sublayer. passive tap like an optical probe or
an Ethernet repeater.
PMC. Packet Mode Channel.
Port Mirroring. Also known as a Protocol Data Unit. PDU is a
roving analysis port. This is a packet of data passed across a
method of monitoring network traffic network. The term implies a specific
that forwards a copy of each layer of the OSI model and a specific
incoming and outgoing packet from protocol.
one port of a network switch to
another port where the packet can Q
be studied. A network administrator
uses port mirroring as a diagnostic QoS. See “Quality of Service” on
tool or debugging feature, especially page 577.
when fending off an attack. It Quality of Service. QoS is a
enables the administrator to keep networking term that specifies a
close track of switch performance guaranteed level of throughput.
and alter it if necessary. Port Throughput is the amount of data
mirroring can be managed locally or transferred from one device to
remotely. An administrator another or processed in a specified
configures port mirroring by amount of time - typically,
assigning a port from which to copy throughputs are measured in bytes
all packets and another port where per second (Bps).
those packets will be sent. A packet
bound for or heading away from the
first port will be forwarded onto the
second port as well. The
administrator places a protocol
analyzer on the port receiving the
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 577
Glossary
R Simple Network Management

Protocol. SNMP is the protocol
Real-Time Operating System. governing network management and
the monitoring of network devices
RTOS is a component of the OSAPI and their functions. It is not
module that abstracts operating necessarily limited to TCP/IP
systems with which other systems networks. The versions have the
can interface. following differences:
RFC. Request For Comment. SNMPv1 (full): Security is based on
RMON. Short for remote community strings.
monitoring, a network management SNMPsec (historic): Security is based
protocol that allows network on parties. Few, if any, vendors
information to be gathered at a implemented this version of the
single workstation. Whereas SNMP protocol, which is now largely
gathers network data from a single forgotten.
type of Management Information
Base (MIB), RMON 1 defines nine SNMPv2p (historic): For this version,
additional MIBs that provide a much much work was done to update the
richer set of data about network SNMPv1 protocol and the SMIv1,
usage. For RMON to work, network and not just security. The result was
devices, such as hubs and switches, updated protocol operations, new
must be designed to support it. The protocol operations and data types,
newest version of RMON, RMON 2, and party-based security from
provides data about traffic at the SNMPsec.
network layer in addition to the
physical layer. This allows SNMPv2c (experimental): This
administrators to analyze traffic by version of the protocol is called
protocol. community string-based SNMPv2. It
is an update of the protocol
RP. Rendezvous Point. Used with operations and data types of
IP Multicast. SNMPv2p, and uses community-
based security from SNMPv1.
RPU. Remote Power Unit.
SNMPv2u (experimental): This
RTOS. See “Real-Time Operating version of the protocol uses the
System” on page 578. protocol operations and data types
of SNMPv2c and security based on
S users.
SDL. Synchronous Data Link. SNMPv2* (experimental): This

version combined the best features
CLI L2P
578 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
of SNMPv2p and SNMPv2u. (It is T

also called SNMPv2star.) The
documents defing this version were TBI. Ten Bit Interface.
never published as RFCs.
Telnet. A character-based UNIX
SNMPv3 (proposed): This version of application that enables users with a
the protocol is a combination of Telnet server account to log on to a
user-based security and the protocol UNIX computer and utilize its
operations and data types from resources.
SNMPv2p and support for proxies.
The security is based on that found TFTP. See “Trivial File Transfer
in SNMPv2u and SNMPv2*, and Protocol” on page 579.
updated after much review. The Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
documents defing this protocol will
soon be published as RFCs. TFTP is a simple form of the File
Transfer Protocol (FTP). TFTP uses
SimpleX signaling. SX is one of
the User Datagram Protocol (UDP, a
IEEE 802.3's designations for
direct protocol used to communicate
media. For example, 1000SX
datagrams over a network with little
indicates 1000 gigabit Ethernet over
error recovery) and provides no
"short haul" or "short wavelength"
security features. It is often used by
optical fiber.
servers to boot diskless
SMC1. A model of Serial workstations, X-terminals, and
Management Controller from routers.
Motorola.
Trunking. The process of combing
SMII. Serial Media Independent a set of trunks that are traffic-
Interface. engineered as a unit for the
establishment of connections
SNMP. See “Simple Network between switching systems in which
Management Protocol” on page 578. all of the communications paths are
interchangeable.
SODIMM. Small Outline Dual Inline
Memory Module.
U
SRAM. Static Random Access
Memory. UPM. User Programmable
Machine.
STP. Spanning Tree Protocol. See
“802.1D” on page 567 for more UPMA. The first of two UPMs in
information. Motorola's MPC855T processor.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 579
Glossary
UPMB. The second of two UPMs in client-server system to distribute

Motorola's MPC855T processor. information, based upon the
hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP).
USP. An abbreviation that
represents Unit, Slot, Port. Wide Area Network. A WAN is a
computer network that spans a
V relatively large geographical area.
Typically, a WAN consists of two or
Virtual Local Area Network. more local-area networks (LANs).
Operating at the Data Link Layer

(Layer 2 of the OSI model), the
X
VLAN is a means of parsing a single X.500. A directory standard that
network into logical user groups or enables applications like e-mail to
organizations, as if they physically access information that can either
resided on a dedicated LAN be central or distributed. The benefit
segment of their own. In reality, this of a directory is the ability to
virtually defined community may minimize the impact on the user of
have individual members peppered changes to a network. The standard
across a large, extended LAN. The is broken down under subsequent
VLAN identifier is part of the 802.1Q standards, as follows:
tag, which is added to an Ethernet
frame by an 802.1Q-compliant X.501 Models
switch or router. Devices
recognizing 802.1Q-tagged frames X.509 Authentication framework
maintain appropriate tables to track X.511 Abstract service definition
VLANs. The first three bits of the
802.1Q tag are used by 802.1P to X.518 Procedures for distributed
establish priority for the packet. operation
VLAN. See “Virtual Local Area X.519 Protocol specifications

Network” on page 580.
X.520 Selected attribute types
vMAN. Virtual Metropolitan Area
Network. X.521 Selected object types
XModem. One of the most popular

W file transfer protocols (FTPs).
Xmodem is fairly effective at
WAN. See “Wide Area Network” on detecting errors. It sends blocks of
page 580. data together with a checksum and
Web. Also known as World-Wide then waits for acknowledgment of
Web (WWW) or W3. An Internet the block's receipt. The waiting
CLI L2P
580 Release 8.0 05/2013
Glossary
slows down the rate of data

transmission considerably, but it
ensures accurate transmission.
Xmodem can be implemented either
in software or in hardware. Many
modems, and almost all
communications software packages,
support Xmodem. However, it is
useful only at relatively slow data
transmission speeds (less than
4,800 bps). Enhanced versions of
Xmodem that work at higher
transmission speeds are known as
Ymodem and Zmodem.
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 581
Glossary
CLI L2P
582 Release 8.0 05/2013
Index
9 Index
A clear lldp config all 340

addport 177 clear mac-addr-table 302
address-conflict 296 clear pass 302
adminmode 178 clear port-sec 484
arc 458 clear radius statistics 514
areaid 25 clear ring-coupling 304
authentication login 511 clear sfp-white-list 313
authorization network radius 513 clear signal-contact 303
auto-disable reason 179 clear traplog 304
auto-disable timer 180 clear vlan 304
auto-negotiate 181 Competence Center 593
auto-negotiate all 182 config commands
config lags adminmode 197
B config lags linktrap 198
boot skip-aca-on-boot 297, 297 config lags name 199
bridge address-learning 103 config loginsession 285
bridge address-relearn detect operation 104 config port admin-mode 255, 256
bridge address-relearn detect threshold 104
config port linktrap 257, 258
bridge aging-time 105
bridge duplex-mismatch-detect operation 106 config port physical-mode 260
bridge fast-link-detection 106 config switchconfig broadcast 261, 262,
bridge framesize 56 264
bridge vlan-learning 107 config switchconfig flowcontrol 265, 266
broadcasts config users add 290, 291
broadcast storm recovery mode 261, config users delete 289, 290, 291
262, 264 config users passwd 292
config vlan add 267
C config vlan delete 267
cable-crossing 183 config vlan garp jointime 199, 200, 201,
cablestatus 298 202, 203, 204, 205
classofservice dot1pmapping 87
config vlan garp leavealltime 207
classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 88
classofservice trus 89 config vlan garp leavetime 206
clear arp-table-switch 299 config vlan interface acceptframe 269,
clear commands 270, 275
clear arp-table-switch 299 config vlan name 272
clear config 300 config vlan participation 273, 274
clear pass 302 config vlan ports ingressfilter 271, 276
clear traplog 303, 304 config vlan ports pvid 277, 279
clear vlan 304 config vlan ports tagging 278, 280
clear config 300 config port autoneg 199
clear config factory 300 config switchconfig flowcontrol 265, 266
clear counters 300 config users delete 289, 290, 291, 292
clear dot1x statistics 513 config users passwd 289, 290, 291, 292
clear eventlog 298 config vlan delete 267
clear hiper-ring 301 config vlan ports acceptframe 279
clear igmpsnooping 301 config vlan ports ingressfilter 270, 275, 276,
clear inlinepower 398 277
clear link-aggregation 303 configuration reset 300
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 583
Index
config-watchdog 305 dot1x port-control 521

copy 305 dot1x port-control all 522
copy nvram clibanner 311 dot1x re-authenticate 523
copy nvram startup-config 313 dot1x re-authentication 523
copy system bootcode 313 dot1x safe-vlan 524
copy system image 313 dot1x system-auth-control 525
copy system running-config 313 dot1x timeout 525
copy nvram capture 308 dot1x user 529
copy nvram capture aca duplex settings 260
capture 308 dvlan-tunnel ethertype 94
copy nvram clibanner 308
copy nvram errorlog 309 E
copy nvram script 309 ethernet-ip 120
copy nvram traplog 310
copy system running-config 310 F
fast-hiper-ring 469
D flow control 265, 266
debug tcpdump filter delete 84 frame acceptance mode 269, 270, 275
debug tcpdump filter list 83
debug tcpdump filter show 83 G
debug tcpdump help 81 Global Config Mode 45
debug tcpdump start cpu 81 GVRP
debug tcpdump start cpu filter 82 join time 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204,
debug tcpdump stop 82 205
deleteport 185 leave time 206
deleteport all 185
device configuration commands 201 H
device-status connection-error 314 hiper-ring 463
device-status monitor 315 hiper-ring mode 463
DHCP server configuration example 490 hiper-ring port primary 464
dhcp-relay 486, 487 hiper-ring port secondary 464
dhcp-server addr-probe 494 hiper-ring recovery-delay 465
dhcp-server operation 495
dhcp-server pool add 495 I
dhcp-server pool delete 500 iec61850-mms 121
dhcp-server pool disable 500 IEEE 802.1Q 269, 270, 275
dhcp-server pool enable 500 ingress filtering 271, 276
dhcp-server pool modify hirschmann-device inlinepower (Global Config) 397
499 inlinepower (Interface Config) 398
dhcp-server pool modify mode 496 inlinepower budget slot 400
dhcp-server pool modify option 498 inlinepower threshold slot 401
dhcp-server pool modify leasetime 499 inlinepower trap slot 401
digital-input 107 Interface Config Mode 46
digital-output 109 inventory 231, 232, 233, 235, 236, 237, 239,
dip-switch operation 186 240, 511
disconnect 285 ip http secure-port 553
dot1x defaultlogin 514 ip http secure-protocol 554
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable 515 ip http server 555
dot1x guest-vlan 516 ip https certgen 558
dot1x initialize 517 ip https port 558
dot1x login 517 ip https server 557
dot1x mac-auth-bypass 518 ip ssh protocol 530
dot1x max-req 519
dot1x max-users 520
CLI L2P
584 Release 8.0 05/2013
Index
J lldp tlv ptp 353

join time 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205 lldp tlv sys-cap 354
lldp tlv sys-desc 354
L lldp tlv sys-name 354
LAGs lldp tlv vlan-name 355
enabling or disabling 197 logging buffered 164
link traps 198 logging buffered wrap 165
name 199 logging cli-command 166
summary information 244 logging console 167
leave time 206, 207 logging host 168
Line Config Mode 46 logging host reconfigure 169
Link Aggregation(802.3ad) Commands 97 logging host remove 169
link aggregations. See LAGs logging snmp-requests get operation 169
link traps logging snmp-requests get severity 170
interface 257, 258 logging snmp-requests set operation 170
logging snmp-requests set severity 171
LAG 198
logging syslog 171
link-aggregation 196 logging syslog port 172
link-aggregation adminmode 197 logical slot/port 26
link-aggregation linktrap 198 logout 316
link-aggregation name 199 logout command 316
link-aggregation staticcapability 97
lldp 336
LLDP - Link Layer Discovery Protocol 324
M
mac notification (Global Config) 190
lldp admin-state 340 mac notification (Interface Config) 191
lldp chassis tx-interval 339 macaddr 25
lldp config chassis admin-state 337 macfilter 187
lldp config chassis notification-interval 337 macfilter adddest 188
lldp config chassis re-init-delay 338 macfilter adddest all 189
lldp config chassis tx-delay 338 media-module 184
lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult 339 media-module remove 184
lldp fdb-mode 341 mode dvlan-tunnel 95
lldp hm-mode 341 monitor session 192
lldp max-neighbors 342 monitor session mode 194
lldp med 343 monitor session source/destination 195
lldp med al 344 mrp current-domain 455
lldp med confignotification 344 mrp delete-domain 457
lldp med confignotification all 345 mrp new-domain 457
lldp med faststartrepeatcount 346
lldp med transmit-tlv 347
lldp med transmit-tlv all 348
N
name 355
lldp notification 349 network javascriptmode 123
lldp tlv gmrp 352 network mgmt_vlan 85
lldp tlv igmp 352 network mgmt-access add 124
lldp tlv link-aggregation 349 network mgmt-access delete 124
lldp tlv mac-phy-config-state 349 network mgmt-access modify 125
lldp tlv max-frame-size 350 network mgmt-access operation 126
lldp tlv mgmt-addr 350 network mgmt-access status 126
lldp tlv pnio 350 network parms 127
lldp tlv pnio-alias 351 network priority 128
lldp tlv pnio-mrp 351 network protocol 127
lldp tlv port-desc 351 no dhcp-relay 486
lldp tlv portsec 353 no lldp 336
lldp tlv port-vlan 352 no sntp 361
lldp tlv protocol 353
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 585
Index
no sntp anycast address 362, 363, 369 ptp sync-lower-bound 378

no sntp client server 365 ptp sync-upper-bound 379
no sntp client server primary 366, 367, 368 ptp v1 burst 385
no storm-control broadcast 261 ptp v1 operation 385
ptp v1 preferred-master 379
P ptp v1 re-initialize 380
passwords ptp v1 subdomain-name 380
changing user 292 ptp v1 sync-interval 381
resetting all 302 ptp v2bc announce-interval 386
PDUs 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 207 ptp v2bc announce-timeout 387
ping 316 ptp v2bc asymmetry 389
ping command 314, 315, 316, 317 ptp v2bc delay-mechanism 387
PoE - Power over Ethernet 396 ptp v2bc domain 383
Port monitor 402 ptp v2bc network-protocol 388
port-monitor (Global Config) 407 ptp v2bc operation 386
port-monitor (Interface Config) 407 ptp v2bc pdelay-interval 388
port-monitor action 408 ptp v2bc priority1 382
port-monitor condition crc-fragment (Global ptp v2bc priority2 382
Config) 413 ptp v2bc sync-interval 387
port-monitor condition crc-fragment (Interface ptp v2bc utc-offset 383
Config) 413 ptp v2bc utc-offset-valid 383
port-monitor condition link-flap (Global Config) ptp v2bc v1-compatibility-mode 388
412 ptp v2bc vlan 384
port-monitor condition link-flap (Interface Con- ptp v2bc vlan-priority 384
fig) 412 ptp v2tc asymmetry 389
port-monitor overload-detection (Global Con- ptp v2tc delay-mechanism 389
fig) 409 ptp v2tc management 390
port-monitor overload-detection (Interface ptp v2tc multi-domain-mode 390
Config) 409 ptp v2tc network-protocol 391
ports ptp v2tc operation 391
administrative mode 255, 256 ptp v2tc pdelay-interval 392
frame acceptance mode 269, 270, 275 ptp v2tc power-tlv-check 394
information 243 ptp v2tc primary-domain 392
ptp v2tc profile 393
ingress filtering 271, 276
ptp v2tc sync-local-clock 395
link traps 257, 258 ptp v2tc syntonization 393
physical mode 260 ptp v2tc vlan 394
tagging 278, 280 ptp v2tc vlan-priority 395
VLAN IDs 277, 279
VLAN information 251 R
port-sec action 480 radius accounting mode 531
port-sec allowed-ip 481 radius server host 531
port-sec allowed-ip add 481 radius server key 533
port-sec allowed-ip remove 482 radius server msgauth 533
port-sec allowed-mac 482 radius server primary 534
port-sec allowed-mac add 483 radius server retransmit 535
port-sec allowed-mac remove 483 radius server timeout 536
port-sec mode 479 reboot 320
Privileged Exec Mode 45 reload 322
profinetio 129 reset system command 320, 322
Protocol Data Units. See PDUs ring-coupling 474
PTP - Precision Time Protocol 371 ring-coupling config 475
ptp clock-mode 377 ring-coupling net-coupling 476
ptp operation 378 ring-coupling operation 476
CLI L2P
586 Release 8.0 05/2013
Index
ring-coupling port 477 set prompt 130

ring-coupling redundancy-mode 477 show 52
rmon-alarm add 199 show address-conflict 52
rmon-alarm delete 200 show arc 459
rmon-alarm disable 201 show arp switch 53, 59
rmon-alarm enable 200 show authentication 58, 539
rmon-alarm modify falling-event 204 show authentication users 540
rmon-alarm modify interval 202 show auto-disable brief 229
rmon-alarm modify mib-variable 201 show auto-disable reasons 230
rmon-alarm modify rising-event 204 show boot skip-aca-on-boot 297, 297
rmon-alarm modify sample-type 203 show bridge address-learning 53
rmon-alarm modify startup-alarm 203 show bridge address-relearn-detect 54
rmon-alarm modify thresholds 202 show bridge aging-time 54
show bridge duplex-mismatch-detect 55
S show bridge fast-link-detection 55
Schulungsangebot 593 show bridge framesize 55
script apply 173 show bridge vlan-learning 56
script delete 174 show classofservice dot1pmapping 90
script list 174 show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 91
script show 175 show classofservice trust 92
script validate 175 show commands
selftest ramtest 226 show inventory 231, 232, 233, 235, 236,
selftest reboot-on-error 228 237, 239, 240, 511
selftest reboot-on-hdxerror 227 show lags summary 244
serial timeout 130 show loginsession 286
session-limit 102 show port 243
sessions
show stats switch detailed 60, 62, 68
closing 285, 316
show switchconfig 245, 246, 247, 248
displaying 286
show users 287
session-timeout 103
set garp timer join 205 show vlan detailed 248
set garp timer leave 206 show vlan interface 251
set garp timer leaveall 207 show vlan summary 251
set gmrp adminmode 208 show config-watchdog 57
set gmrp forward-all-groups 211 show device-status 57
set gmrp forward-unknown 212 show dhcp-relay 486, 488
set gmrp interfacemode 209, 210 show dhcp-server 492
set igmp 213, 214 show dhcp-server operation 493
set igmp aging-time-unknown 214 show dhcp-server pool 494
set igmp automatic-mode 215 show dhcp-server port 493
set igmp forward-all 216 show digital-input 112, 115
set igmp forward-unknown 217 show digital-input all 114
set igmp groupmembershipinterval 219 show digital-input config 113
set igmp interfacemode 220 show digital-output 116, 119
set igmp lookup-interval-unknown 220 show digital-output all 118
set igmp lookup-resp-time-unknown 221 show digital-output config 117
set igmp maxresponse 222 show dip-switch 231
set igmp querier max-response-time 223 show dot1x 540
set igmp querier protocol-version 223 show dot1x clients 546
set igmp querier status 224 show dot1x users 545
set igmp querier tx-interval 224 show dvlan-tunnel 96
set igmp query-ports-to-filter 225 show ethernet-ip 131, 134
set igmp static-query-port 218 show eventlog 59
set pre-login-banner text 226 show fast-hiper-ring 467
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 587
Index
show fast-hiper-ring current-id 468 show port-monitor 403, 404

show garp 232 show port-monitor brief 405
show gmrp configuration 232 show port-monitor crc-fragment 406
show hiper-ring 462 show port-monitor link-flap 406
show hiper-ring info 463 show port-sec mode 478
show iec61850-mms 122 show port-sec port 478
show igmpsnooping 233 show ptp 371
show inlinepower 396 show ptp configuration 374
show inlinepower port 396 show ptp operation 374
show inlinepower slot 399 show ptp port 375
show interface 60 show ptp status 376
show interface ethernet 62 show radius 548
show interface switchport 69 show radius accounting 536
show interface utilization 70 show radius statistics 549
show inventory 271 show reboot 321
show ip http 556 show reload 323
show ip https 559 show ring-coupling 472
show ip ssh 547 show rmon-alarm 245
show link-aggregation 244 show running-config 76
show link-aggregation brief 98 show selftest 246
show lldp 324 show serial 134
show lldp chassis tx-interval 327 show signal-contact 73
show lldp config 324 show slot 75
show lldp config chassis 325 show snmp-access 135
show lldp config chassis admin-state 325 show snmpcommunity 136
show lldp config chassis notification-interval show snmptrap 137
325 show sntp 356
show lldp config chassis re-init-delay 326 show sntp anycast 358
show lldp config chassis tx-delay 326 show sntp client 358
show lldp config chassis tx-hold-mult 326 show sntp operation 359
show lldp config port 328 show sntp server 360
show lldp config port tlv 329 show sntp status 360
show lldp med 330 show sntp time 361
show lldp med interface 331 show spanning-tree 417
show lldp med local-device detail 332 show spanning-tree brief 419
show lldp med remote-device 333 show spanning-tree interface 420
show lldp med remote-device detail 334 show spanning-tree mst detailed 421
show lldp remote-data 334 show spanning-tree mst port detailed 422
show logging 71 show spanning-tree mst port summary 425
show loginsession 286, 293 show spanning-tree mst summary 426
show mac notification 240 show spanning-tree summary 427
show mac-addr-table 72 show spanning-tree vlan 428
show mac-filter-table gmrp 235 show storm-control 247
show mac-filter-table igmpsnooping 236 show storm-control limiters port 248
show mac-filter-table multicast 237 show sub-ring 501
show mac-filter-table static 238 show switchconfig 105
show mac-filter-table staticfiltering 239 show sysinfo 77, 92, 93
show mac-filter-table stats 240 show telnet 138
show monitor session 242 show telnetcon 139
show mrp 453 show temperature 80
show mrp current domain 454 show trapflags 140
show network 105, 131 show users 287
show network mgmt-access 133 show users authentication 551
show port 243, 265, 266 show vlan 248
CLI L2P
588 Release 8.0 05/2013
Index
show vlan brief 251 spanning-tree forward-time 436, 438

show vlan port 251 spanning-tree guard loop 437
show voice vlan 253 spanning-tree guard none 438
show voice vlan interface 254 spanning-tree guard root 439
shutdown 255 spanning-tree hello-time 440
shutdown all 256 spanning-tree hold-count 441
signal-contact 317 spanning-tree max-age 442
signal-contact connection-error 317 spanning-tree max-hops 443
slot/port 26 spanning-tree mst 444
snmp trap link-status 257 spanning-tree mst instance 448
snmp trap link-status all 258 spanning-tree mst priority 446
snmp-access global 141, 142 spanning-tree mst vlan 447
snmp-access version v3-encryption 142 spanning-tree port mode 449
snmp-server 81, 144 spanning-tree port mode all 450
snmp-server community 145 spanning-tree stp-mrp-mode 451
snmp-server community ipaddr 147 spanning-tree tcnguard 452
snmp-server community ipmask 148 speed 260
snmp-server community mode 149 speeds 260
snmp-server community ro 150 statistics
snmp-server community rw 150 switch, related 201 commands 60, 62, 68
snmp-server contact 146 storm-control broadcast 261
snmp-server enable traps 151 storm-control broadcast (port-related) 263
snmp-server enable traps linkmode 154 storm-control egress-limit 263
snmp-server enable traps multiusers 155 storm-control egress-limiting 261
snmp-server enable traps port-sec 156 storm-control flowcontrol 265
snmp-server enable traps stpmode 157 storm-control flowcontrol per port 266
snmp-server location 150 storm-control ingress-limit 264
snmp-server sysname 151 storm-control ingress-limiting 262
snmptrap 158 storm-control ingress-mode 262, 264
snmptrap ipaddr 159 sub-ring mode 503
snmptrap mode 160 sub-ring mrp-domainID 507
snmptrap snmpversion 161 sub-ring operation 504
SNTP - Simple Network Time Protocol 356 sub-ring port 505
sntp anycast address 362 sub-ring protocol 504
sntp anycast transmit-interval 362 sub-ring ring-name 505
sntp anycast vlan 363 sub-ring vlan 506
sntp client accept-broadcast 363 Sub-Ring Commands 501
sntp client disable-after-sync 364 sub-ring delete-ring 508
sntp client offset 364 sub-ring new-ring 508
sntp client request-interval 365 switch
sntp client server primary 366 information, related 201 commands 245,
sntp client server secondary 367 246, 247, 248
sntp client threshold 368 inventory 231, 232, 233, 235, 236, 237,
sntp operation 369 239, 240, 511
sntp server disable-if-local 370
resetting 320, 322
sntp time system 370
spanning-tree 429 statistics, related 201 commands 60, 62,
spanning-tree auto-edgeport 430 68
spanning-tree bpduguard 431 System Information and Statistics Commands
spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck 259 85
spanning-tree configuration name 432 System Utilities 296, 511
spanning-tree configuration revision 433 system utilities 296–316
spanning-tree edgeport 434
spanning-tree forceversion 435
CLI L2P
Release 8.0 05/2013 589
Index
T adding 267
tagging 278, 280 changing the name of 272
telnet 99 deleting 267
sessions, closing 285, 316 details 248
sessions, displaying 286 frame acceptance mode 269, 270, 275
telnetcon maxsessions 162 IDs 277, 279
telnetcon timeout 163 ingress filtering 271, 276
temperature 319
jointime 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205
traceroute 299
transport input telnet 100 leave all time 207
transport output telnet 101 leave time 206
trap log participation in 273, 274
clearing 303, 304 port information 251
trunks. See LAGs resetting parameters 304
summary information 251
U tagging 278, 280
User Account Management Commands 285 voice vlan (Global Config Mode) 281
user account management commands voice vlan (Interface Config Mode) 282
201 commands 285 voice vlan auth 284
User Exec Mode 45
users W
adding 290, 291 Web connections, displaying 286
deleting 289, 290, 291
displaying 287
passwords 292, 302
users access 290
users defaultlogin 288
users login 289, 552
users name 291
users passwd 292
users snmpv3 accessmode 293
users snmpv3 authentication 294
users snmpv3 encryption 295
utilization alarm-threshold 80
V
vlan 267
vlan acceptframe 269, 270
vlan ingressfilter 271
VLAN Mode 45
vlan name 272
vlan participation 273
vlan participation all 274
vlan port acceptframe all 275
vlan port ingressfilter all 276
vlan port priority all 92
vlan port pvid all 277
vlan port tagging all 278
vlan priority 93
vlan pvid 279
vlan tagging 280
vlan0-transparent-mode 268
VLANs
CLI L2P
590 Release 8.0 05/2013
Further support
U Technical Questions
For technical questions, please contact any Hirschmann dealer in your
area or Hirschmann directly..
You will find the addresses of our partners on the Internet at
http://www.hirschmann.com
Contact our support at
https://hirschmann-support.belden.eu.com
You can contact us

in the EMEA region at:
D Tel.: +49 (0)1805 14-1538
D E-mail: hac.support@belden.com
in the America region at:
D Tel.: +1 (717) 217-2270
D E-mail: inet-support.us@belden.com
in the Asia-Pacific region at:
D Tel.: +65 6854 9860
D E-mail: inet-ap@belden.com
U Hirschmann Competence Center

The Hirschmann Competence Center is ahead of its competitors:
D Consulting incorporates comprehensive technical advice, from system
evaluation through network planning to project planning.
D Training offers you an introduction to the basics, product briefing and
user training with certification.
The current technology and product training courses can be found at
http://www.hicomcenter.com
D Support ranges from the first installation through the standby service
to maintenance concepts.
With the Hirschmann Competence Center, you have decided against

making any compromises. Our client-customized package leaves you
free to choose the service components you want to use.
Internet:http://www.hicomcenter.com

Command Line PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Command Line PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual

Command Line Interface

L2P Rel. 8.0

CLI L2P Technical Support

© 2013 Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH

Printed in Germany 4/26/13

Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH

About this Manual 21

4 CLI Commands: Base 51

4.1.6 show bridge aging-time 54

4.4.7 vlan port priority all 92

4.6.32 network parms 127

4.6.73 telnetcon maxsessions 162

4.9.17 monitor session <session-id> 192

4.9.58 set igmp querier tx-interval 224

4.9.99 storm-control broadcast (port-related) 263

4.11.2 boot skip-aca-on-boot 297

4.12.9 show lldp config chassis tx-interval 327

4.12.50 lldp tlv ptp 353

4.14.10 ptp v1 preferred-master 379

4.15.4 inlinepower (Interface Config) 398

5 CLI Commands: Switching 415

5.1.12 spanning-tree configuration name 432

5.4.3 fast-hiper-ring 469

5.8.14 dhcp-server pool disable 500

6 CLI Commands: Security 509

6.1.25 radius server host 531

7 Appendix- VLAN Example 561

10 Further support 591

About this Manual

The “GUI” reference manual contains detailed information on using the

The "Command Line Interface" reference manual contains detailed informa-

The "Installation" user manual contains a device description, safety instruc-

The "Redundancy Configuration" user manual contains the information you

The HiVision Network Management Software provides you with additional

Commands are followed by values, parameters, or both.

Parameters may be mandatory values, optional values, choices, or a combi-

sub-netted network may be used for the

Address Type Format Range

Table 1: Network Address Syntax

Empty strings (““) are not valid user defined strings.

Command completion finishes spelling the command when enough letters of

The value of '-----' designates that the value is unknown.

Some examples are provided below:

1.1.6 Special keys

BS delete previous character

1.1.7 Special characters in scripts

Character (plain) Meaning, when entered in the CLI

Tab. 2: Special characters

Character (escaped) Meaning, when entered in the CLI

Tab. 3: Special characters escaped

Tab. 4: Commands in Privileged Exec mode

Tab. 5: Commands in Global Config mode

Tab. 6: Commands in Interface Config mode

Tab. 7: Commands in VLAN Database mode

When a device creates a script, a human-readable header is included that

1.1.8 Secrets in scripts

The following commands produce scrambled secrets (if necessary):

Tab. 8: Commands in Global Config mode

Applying or validating a script requires the following conditions for a scram-

D string must not be longer than 64 hex digits

2.1 Quick Starting the Switch

2.2 System Info and System